SM 1500xeusb e 112081a1

Self-Service
Systems
ProCash 1500xe USB
Service Manual
Questions and suggestions
Do you have ...
... any questions or suggestions

regarding this manual?
Please contact the following address

giving the order number of this
manual in your message:
Address:
Wincor Nixdorf International GmbH
Handbuchredaktion BD PSD 43
33094 Paderborn
Germany
Fax: +49 (0) 52 51 693-62 09
E-mail: manuals.hardware@wincor-nixdorf.com
ProCash 1500xe USB - Service Manual 01750112081 A

ProCash 1500xe USB
Service Manual
Edition September 2006

Copyright © Information and trademarks
© Wincor Nixdorf International GmbH 2006
All rights, including rights of translation and

rights of reproduction by reprinting, copying
or similar methods, even of parts, are
reserved.
Any violations give rise to a claim for
damages
All rights, including rights created by patent

grants or registration of a utility model or
design, are reserved. Delivery subject to
availability; right of technical modifications
reserved.
All names of hardware and software

products mentioned in this manual are
trade names and/or trademarks of their
respective manufactures.
This manual was

produced using paper
treated with chlorine-free
bleach
ProCash 1500xe USB - Service Manual 01750112081 A

I Contents..…………....………...……….....
1 Introduction...................................……...
(Safety precautions, technical data)
2 Function and Integration...............….....

3 Basic Components.................................
(Power supply unit, power distributor, special electronics)
4 PCs and PC Cards..................................

5 Card Readers and Keyboards................
6 Monitors...................................................
7 Printers and Scanners............................

8 Cash Components……………….............
9 Multimedia...............................................
(Video equipment)
10 Miscellaneous.........................................
11 Removal / Installation of Components..
12 Maintenance and Service.......................
II Index.........................................................
01750112081 A ProCash 1500xe USB - Service Manual 0-1

0-2 ProCash 1500xe USB - Service Manual 01750112081 A
Contents
Abbreviations ............................................................................................... XXI
Introduction ...................................................................................................1-1
Symbols used in this manual ..........................................................................1-1
Important safety precautions...........................................................................1-2
General power interrupt ..................................................................................1-5
Description of the device.................................................................................1-6
Structure of the manual...................................................................................1-7
Outline .......................................................................................................1-7
Supplementary documentation..................................................................1-7
Manual release ..........................................................................................1-8
Technical data.................................................................................................1-9
Electrical characteristics of the supply network .........................................1-9
Device conditions ....................................................................................1-10
Installation specifications.........................................................................1-11
Environmental conditions ........................................................................1-12
Climatic environmental conditions in acc. with EN 60721 ..................1-12
Mechanical environmental conditions in acc. with EN 60721............1-12
Noise emission in acc. with EN 27779 ...............................................1-13
Compliance with standards and certifications .........................................1-14
Standards met....................................................................................1-14
Conformity..........................................................................................1-14
Notes concerning radio interference suppression and
electrical safety ..................................................................................1-14
FCC rules and Canadian Standard ICES - 003 .................................1-15
Certification for data transmission......................................................1-15
Environmental protection ..............................................................................1-16
Environmentally friendly product design and development .....................1-16
Saving energy..........................................................................................1-16
Disposing of used consumables..............................................................1-16
Labels on plastic case parts ....................................................................1-16
Returning, recycling and disposing of used units and consumables .......1-17
Further information ..................................................................................1-17
Function and Integration..............................................................................2-1

Block diagrams ...............................................................................................2-1
System wiring diagram USB......................................................................2-2
Journal printer............................................................................................2-3
01750112081 A ProCash 1500xe USB - Service Manual I-I

Contents
Receipt printer ...........................................................................................2-3

Cash media dispenser (CMD) ...................................................................2-4
Cash media dispenser with printing cassette TH60 ..................................2-4
Barcode reader BR 02...............................................................................2-5
Portrait camera..........................................................................................2-5
Portrait camera / Cash slot camera...........................................................2-5
Audio loudspeakers / headphone..............................................................2-6
Heater (only semi-outdoor)........................................................................2-6
Power supply ..................................................................................................2-7
Line voltage ...............................................................................................2-7
Configurations without SE or controller with compatible interface.............2-8
DC power supply .....................................................................................2-10
Connection of cash media dispenser, journal printer and
receipt printer .....................................................................................2-10
Power distribution ..............................................................................2-10
Pin assignment for 5-pin AMP connector...........................................2-10
Pin assignment for 2-pin AMP connector...........................................2-10
Central USB special electronics ...................................................................2-11
Customer panel special electronics.........................................................2-12
Connected components .....................................................................2-13
Assignment of media entry indicators ................................................2-13
External control unit.................................................................................2-14
Door switch ...................................................................................................2-14
SOP button ...................................................................................................2-15
Audio loudspeakers / headphone .................................................................2-15
CCTV monitoring ..........................................................................................2-16
System unit (PC)...........................................................................................2-17
Overview .................................................................................................2-17
PC settings ...................................................................................................2-18
Overview of PC cards..............................................................................2-21
Component assignment................................................................................2-22
System unit (PC) assignment..................................................................2-22
Central USB special electronics assignment...........................................2-23
Protection against reading of ID cards by others..........................................2-23
Touchscreen for LCD monitor.......................................................................2-24
Monitors ........................................................................................................2-24
Operating the flat displays ............................................................................2-25
Relay panel for external features USB .........................................................2-26
Remote status indicator ................................................................................2-26
Printers .........................................................................................................2-27
Card readers.................................................................................................2-27
Optical indicators ..........................................................................................2-28
Keyboard ......................................................................................................2-29
I-II ProCash 1500xe USB - Service Manual 01750112081 A

Contents
Cash media dispenser ..................................................................................2-29

Uninterruptible power supply (UPS)..............................................................2-30
Smart-UPS 750 .......................................................................................2-30
Connection to the central USB special electronics module................2-30
Temperature control......................................................................................2-31
Ventilation................................................................................................2-31
Heater (only semi-outdoor)......................................................................2-31
Central Power Supply Unit III 01750069162................................................3-1

Views ..............................................................................................................3-1
Description ......................................................................................................3-2
Safety functions .........................................................................................3-3
Short-circuit ..........................................................................................3-3
Overvoltage and overtemperature .......................................................3-3
Switch-on/switch-off behavior....................................................................3-4
Relationships between signals and output voltages..................................3-6
Technical data.................................................................................................3-7
Input voltages ............................................................................................3-7
Output voltages .........................................................................................3-8
Miscellaneous............................................................................................3-9
Pin assignment ........................................................................................3-10
Cleaning and maintenance ...........................................................................3-12
Power Distributor 01750073167.................................................................3-13
Central USB Special Electronics Module .................................................3-15

Introduction ...................................................................................................3-15
Functions of the special electronics ..............................................................3-17
Function description......................................................................................3-18
Switch-on characteristics.........................................................................3-18
Switch-on logic ........................................................................................3-19
Notes on individual functions...................................................................3-20
Technical specifications ................................................................................3-21
Pin assignments ......................................................................................3-21
Dimensions and weight ...........................................................................3-34
Customer panel special electronics..........................................................3-35

Introduction ...................................................................................................3-35
Technical specifications ................................................................................3-36
Pin assignments ......................................................................................3-36
01750112081 A ProCash 1500xe USB - Service Manual I-III

Contents
External Control Unit..................................................................................3-45

Introduction ...................................................................................................3-45
Description of keys and indicators ................................................................3-46
Function description ................................................................................3-47
Replacement during repairs..........................................................................3-49
Technical specifications................................................................................3-50
Pin assignment........................................................................................3-50
Embedded compact PC P4 / C4...................................................................4-1

Overview of PC variants .................................................................................4-1
Technical data ...........................................................................................4-2
Front side........................................................................................................4-4
Rear side ........................................................................................................4-5
ATX motherboard ...........................................................................................4-6
Lithium battery...........................................................................................4-7
Position of jumpers .........................................................................................4-8
Jumper settings .........................................................................................4-9
Pin assignment .............................................................................................4-11
Voltage output .........................................................................................4-11
COM 1 / COM 2.......................................................................................4-12
LPT1........................................................................................................4-13
Keyboard / mouse ...................................................................................4-14
USB .........................................................................................................4-15
DVI ..........................................................................................................4-16
VGA.........................................................................................................4-17
Audio Line-In ...........................................................................................4-18
Audio Microphone ...................................................................................4-18
Audio Line-out .........................................................................................4-18
BIOS SETUP ................................................................................................4-19
Standard CMOS features ........................................................................4-19
Advanced BIOS features.........................................................................4-20
Advanced Chipset features .....................................................................4-21
Integrated Peripherals .............................................................................4-22
Power Management Setup......................................................................4-23
PNP/PCI configurations...........................................................................4-24
Frequency/Voltage Control......................................................................4-24
EICON C91...................................................................................................4-25
PC cards .......................................................................................................4-25
View ..............................................................................................................4-26
Card accessories ..........................................................................................4-27
I-IV ProCash 1500xe USB - Service Manual 01750112081 A

Contents
Required hardware resources.......................................................................4-27

Manual installation ........................................................................................4-28
OSI Gateway for DOS .............................................................................4-28
OS/2, OSI or SNA gateway .....................................................................4-30
Windows NT 4.0: Connection for Windows NT V4R2b............................4-32
Automatic installation ....................................................................................4-33
Configuration of WAN Services ....................................................................4-36
Checking the function of the installed card and software..............................4-38
Testing the card with ECTEST under DOS or OS/2 .....................................4-39
Technical data...............................................................................................4-40
Pin assignment .............................................................................................4-41
Appendix .......................................................................................................4-42
Example for OS .......................................................................................4-42
Example: OSI Gateway (depending on the above directory entry) .........4-42
Default settings of the individual cards .........................................................4-44
Token Ring PCI Card ..................................................................................4-45

Hardware default settings .............................................................................4-46
General software information........................................................................4-47
Start LAN support software...........................................................................4-48
Software installation......................................................................................4-50
Installation under WIN NT.............................................................................4-50
Installation under OS/2 .................................................................................4-52
Installation under DOS..................................................................................4-52
Test programs...............................................................................................4-56
Anti-Skimming-Module.................................................................................5-1
Components....................................................................................................5-2
Principle of functioning....................................................................................5-5
Connection to SE III (internal inputs/outputs I) ..........................................5-6
Connection to the customer panel special electronics (connector X9)......5-7
Functions ........................................................................................................5-8
Suppression of alarm evaluation ...............................................................5-8
Resetting the alarm delay..........................................................................5-8
Switch-on/switch-off characteristics (auto-calibration)...............................5-8
Auto-calibration during operation...............................................................5-8
Manual calibration .....................................................................................5-8
Saving alarm / not saving alarm ................................................................5-9
Resetting an alarm ....................................................................................5-9
Calibration after device commissioning .....................................................5-9
Function elements.........................................................................................5-10
Status messages ..........................................................................................5-10
01750112081 A ProCash 1500xe USB - Service Manual I-V

Contents
LEDs on the board........................................................................................5-11

Resetting an alarm........................................................................................5-13
Saving alarm / not saving alarm ...................................................................5-13
Display of current setting.........................................................................5-14
Switching the setting ...............................................................................5-14
Calibration.....................................................................................................5-16
Connections..................................................................................................5-17
Pin assignment .............................................................................................5-18
Connector 1, USB port ............................................................................5-18
Connector 2, ASKIM button / status LED ................................................5-18
Connector 3, power supply connection ...................................................5-19
Connector 4, alarm output / enable .........................................................5-19
Function testing ............................................................................................5-20
Test programs .........................................................................................5-20
Test procedure ........................................................................................5-21
Card Reader CHD V2x ................................................................................5-23

Device views.................................................................................................5-25
Overall view.............................................................................................5-25
Front view................................................................................................5-27
Rear view ................................................................................................5-28
Device version used .....................................................................................5-30
Position of components ................................................................................5-32
Pin assignment .............................................................................................5-33
I/O Port ....................................................................................................5-33
V.24 .........................................................................................................5-35
USB .........................................................................................................5-36
Power supply...........................................................................................5-36
Technical data ..............................................................................................5-37
Testing ..........................................................................................................5-38
Removing a jammed card.............................................................................5-39
Maintenance and service..............................................................................5-40
Maintenance............................................................................................5-40
Cleaning and test utilities ........................................................................5-41
Spare parts..............................................................................................5-41
Card Reject Module ....................................................................................5-43

General description.......................................................................................5-43
Views ............................................................................................................5-44
Card reject module with short transport path ..........................................5-44
Card reject module with long transport path for 100 cards......................5-45
Card reject module with long transport path for 200 cards......................5-46
I-VI ProCash 1500xe USB - Service Manual 01750112081 A

Contents
How to test the card reject module ...............................................................5-48
Photosensor ............................................................................................5-48
Motor .......................................................................................................5-48
Troubleshooting ............................................................................................5-49
Pin assignment .............................................................................................5-50
Technical data...............................................................................................5-50
Hybrid DIP Reader ......................................................................................5-51

System connection........................................................................................5-52
Pin assignment .............................................................................................5-53
Block diagram ...............................................................................................5-54
Rear view.................................................................................................5-55
Top view ..................................................................................................5-56
Side view .................................................................................................5-57
Technical data...............................................................................................5-58
Maintenance and service ..............................................................................5-59
Softkeys .......................................................................................................5-61
Description ....................................................................................................5-61
Pin assignment .............................................................................................5-63
EPP V5 .........................................................................................................5-65
Description ....................................................................................................5-66
Port configuration (V.24 / USB) ...............................................................5-69
V.24 mode..........................................................................................5-69
USB mode..........................................................................................5-69
Reset button ............................................................................................5-70
Smartcard interfaces.....................................................................................5-71
Replacing the EPP in the event of an error...................................................5-72
Pin assignment .............................................................................................5-73
Maintenance work.........................................................................................5-74
Battery check...........................................................................................5-74
Replacing the battery...............................................................................5-74
MM / CIM 86 .................................................................................................5-75
12.1" DVI High Bright Box ............................................................................6-1

Important safety precautions...........................................................................6-2
Connections ....................................................................................................6-3
Connecting cables ..........................................................................................6-5
01750112081 A ProCash 1500xe USB - Service Manual I-VII

Contents
Circuit diagram................................................................................................6-5
Pin assignment ...............................................................................................6-6
DVI-I connection........................................................................................6-6
Voltage connection and backlight on / off..................................................6-7
Power supply connection for backlight ......................................................6-8
Technical data ................................................................................................6-8
General......................................................................................................6-8
LCD ...........................................................................................................6-9
12.1" LCD Box DVI ......................................................................................6-11

Connectors ...................................................................................................6-12
Important safety precautions ........................................................................6-13
Structure and functions.................................................................................6-14
Circuit diagram..............................................................................................6-15
Pin assignment .............................................................................................6-16
DVI-I connection......................................................................................6-16
Voltage connection and backlight on / off................................................6-17
Technical data ..............................................................................................6-18
General....................................................................................................6-18
LCD .........................................................................................................6-18
15" LCD Monitor .........................................................................................6-19

Important safety precautions ........................................................................6-20
Connections..................................................................................................6-21
Monitor accessories......................................................................................6-22
Power supply unit for monitor 4-pin Mini-Fit (01750081432)...................6-22
Monitor control panel (OSD panel 01750069628)...................................6-23
Setting the monitor........................................................................................6-24
Circuit diagram..............................................................................................6-25
Graphics modes............................................................................................6-26
Pin assignment .............................................................................................6-27
DVI-D connection ....................................................................................6-27
VGA connection ......................................................................................6-28
OSD panel connection ............................................................................6-29
Connector for monitor power supply unit (01750081432) / special
electronics ...............................................................................................6-30
Technical data ..............................................................................................6-30
General....................................................................................................6-30
LCD .........................................................................................................6-31
I-VIII ProCash 1500xe USB - Service Manual 01750112081 A

Contents
Power supply unit ....................................................................................6-32

Technical specifications .....................................................................6-32
Pin assignment...................................................................................6-32
Troubleshooting ............................................................................................6-33
15" LCD Box DVI .........................................................................................6-35

Connections ..................................................................................................6-36
Important safety precautions.........................................................................6-37
Structure and functions .................................................................................6-37
DVI interface board and inverter board ...................................................6-38
LCD panel................................................................................................6-39
Circuit diagram..............................................................................................6-40
Connection to DVI interface.....................................................................6-40
Connection to analog interface (VGA).....................................................6-41
Connecting cables ........................................................................................6-42
Pin assignment .............................................................................................6-43
DVI-I connection ......................................................................................6-43
Technical data...............................................................................................6-45
General....................................................................................................6-45
LCD .........................................................................................................6-46
15" LCD Box DVI 01750060091 ..................................................................6-47

Connections ..................................................................................................6-48
Important safety precautions.........................................................................6-49
Structure and functions .................................................................................6-49
DVI interface board and inverter board ...................................................6-50
LCD panel................................................................................................6-51
Circuit diagram..............................................................................................6-52
Pin assignment .............................................................................................6-53
DVI-D connection ....................................................................................6-53
Technical data...............................................................................................6-55
General....................................................................................................6-55
LCD .........................................................................................................6-55
Touchscreen for LCD Monitor (USB) ........................................................6-57

Structure .......................................................................................................6-57
Operation ......................................................................................................6-58
LED indicator on touch controller..................................................................6-59
Pin assignment .............................................................................................6-60
Technical data...............................................................................................6-61
01750112081 A ProCash 1500xe USB - Service Manual I-IX

Contents
Receipt Printer TP07/NP07...........................................................................7-1

Connecting the printer ....................................................................................7-2
Power supply.............................................................................................7-2
Data interface ............................................................................................7-2
Views of thermal printer TP07 ........................................................................7-3
Overall view...............................................................................................7-3
Detail views ...............................................................................................7-4
Control panel .............................................................................................7-6
Ports ..........................................................................................................7-7
Position of sensors ....................................................................................7-8
Views of matrix printer NP07 ..........................................................................7-9
Overall view...............................................................................................7-9
Detail views .............................................................................................7-10
Control panel ...........................................................................................7-11
Ports ........................................................................................................7-12
Position of sensors ..................................................................................7-13
Paper path monitoring ..................................................................................7-14
Functions ......................................................................................................7-15
Power-on procedure................................................................................7-15
Status indicators ...........................................................................................7-16
Indicators at power-on.............................................................................7-16
Indicators when online.............................................................................7-16
Functions of keys..........................................................................................7-17
Normal operation.....................................................................................7-17
Internal test..............................................................................................7-18
Internal test with paper.......................................................................7-18
Internal test without paper..................................................................7-18
Internal test ...................................................................................................7-19
Calling and exiting the 'internal test with paper'.......................................7-19
Calling and exiting the 'internal test without paper'..................................7-21
Indicators for the selected test level ........................................................7-22
Description of the test programs .............................................................7-23
Test level 1 (paper sensor test) .........................................................7-23
Test level 2 (printer test) ....................................................................7-23
Test level 3 (statistical information)....................................................7-23
Test level 4 (reset EEPROM parameters to default values) ..............7-27
Test level 5 mark test or cutter / presenter test..................................7-28
Test level 6 (carrier test) (only NP07) ................................................7-30
Test level 7 (set EEPROM sensor values to factory default) .............7-30
Paper control ................................................................................................7-31
How paper control is performed ..............................................................7-31
Replenishing the paper supply ................................................................7-32
Remaining paper supply..........................................................................7-32
I-X ProCash 1500xe USB - Service Manual 01750112081 A

Contents
Mark detection .........................................................................................7-32

Setting the printer to the paper type (only TP07) ..........................................7-33
Reset at power-on.........................................................................................7-36
Sensor calibration .........................................................................................7-36
Calibration of the mark sensor.................................................................7-38
Calibrating the ToF sensor ......................................................................7-38
Mark control ..................................................................................................7-39
Switching on the mark control .................................................................7-39
Disabling mark control .............................................................................7-39
Positioning the control mark sensor ........................................................7-40
Changing the position of the control mark sensor on the
thermal print side (only TP07) ............................................................7-41
print side (only NP07).........................................................................7-42
rear (only TP07) .................................................................................7-43
Changing the position of the control mark sensor between the
thermal print side and the rear (only TP07)........................................7-44
Paper out ......................................................................................................7-48
Physical paper out ...................................................................................7-48
Paper out during printing .........................................................................7-48
Paper-out detection .................................................................................7-48
Paper-low detection.................................................................................7-48
Error handling ...............................................................................................7-49
Error indicators ........................................................................................7-49
ERROR LED blinking pattern ..................................................................7-49
Recoverable errors.............................................................................7-49
Unrecoverable errors .........................................................................7-53
Troubleshooting.......................................................................................7-54
Paper jam...........................................................................................7-54
Mark control detection error ...............................................................7-56
Cutter .................................................................................................7-57
Temperature error in the print head or thermal array.........................7-57
High voltage / low voltage error..........................................................7-57
Printer error ........................................................................................7-58
Controller ......................................................................................................7-59
Pin assignment .............................................................................................7-60
24 V connector ........................................................................................7-60
Data connector ........................................................................................7-60
Maintenance and service ..............................................................................7-61
Maintenance counter ...............................................................................7-61
Remedying poor print quality...................................................................7-62
Matrix printer NP07 ............................................................................7-62
01750112081 A ProCash 1500xe USB - Service Manual I-XI

Contents
Thermal printer TP07 .........................................................................7-63

Technical data ..............................................................................................7-64
Electrical characteristics..........................................................................7-64
Interface to the host.................................................................................7-64
Room classification .................................................................................7-64
Print head ................................................................................................7-65
Matrix printing unit NP07....................................................................7-65
Thermal printing unit TP07.................................................................7-65
Ribbon cartridge ......................................................................................7-65
Paper feed unit ........................................................................................7-66
Print functions..........................................................................................7-66
Dimensions and weights .........................................................................7-67
Paper specifications......................................................................................7-68
Matrix printer NP07 .................................................................................7-68
Thermal printer TP07 ..............................................................................7-68
Receipt roll dimensions ...........................................................................7-69
Control mark print....................................................................................7-69
Control mark dimensions ...................................................................7-69
Preprinted receipts.............................................................................7-71
Removing / installing the components ..........................................................7-72
Print head ................................................................................................7-72
Thermal array ..........................................................................................7-73
Journal Printer TP06/NP06.........................................................................7-75

Connecting the printer ..................................................................................7-76
Power supply...........................................................................................7-76
Data interface ..........................................................................................7-76
Views of thermal printer TP06 ......................................................................7-77
Overall view.............................................................................................7-77
Control panel and connectors .................................................................7-79
Views of matrix printer NP06 ........................................................................7-81
Overall view.............................................................................................7-81
Control panel and connectors .................................................................7-83
Functions ......................................................................................................7-85
Power-on procedure................................................................................7-85
Status indicators ...........................................................................................7-86
Indicators at power-on.............................................................................7-86
Indicators when online.............................................................................7-86
Functions of keys..........................................................................................7-87
Normal operation.....................................................................................7-87
I-XII ProCash 1500xe USB - Service Manual 01750112081 A

Contents
Internal test..............................................................................................7-88
Internal test with paper.......................................................................7-88
Internal test without paper..................................................................7-88
Internal test ...................................................................................................7-89
Calling and exiting the 'internal test with paper'.......................................7-89
Calling and exiting the 'internal test without paper'..................................7-91
Displaying the selected test level ............................................................7-92
Description of the test programs..............................................................7-93
Test level 1 (paper sensor test)..........................................................7-93
Test level 2 (printer test) ....................................................................7-93
Test level 3 (statistical information)....................................................7-93
Test level 4 (reset EEPROM parameters to default values) ..............7-97
Test level 5 (test of the take-up reel)..................................................7-97
Test level 6 (carrier test (NP06 only)) ................................................7-98
Test level 7 (set EEPROM sensor values to factory default) .............7-98
Paper control.................................................................................................7-99
Loading paper..........................................................................................7-99
Remaining paper supply..........................................................................7-99
Error handling .............................................................................................7-100
Error indicators ......................................................................................7-100
ERROR LED blinking pattern ................................................................7-101
Recoverable errors...........................................................................7-101
Unrecoverable errors .......................................................................7-103
Troubleshooting.....................................................................................7-104
Temperature error in the print head or thermal array.......................7-104
High voltage / low voltage error........................................................7-104
Printer error ......................................................................................7-104
Paper motion error ...........................................................................7-105
Controller ....................................................................................................7-106
Pin assignment ...........................................................................................7-107
24 V connector ......................................................................................7-107
Data connector ......................................................................................7-107
Maintenance and service ............................................................................7-108
Maintenance counter .............................................................................7-108
Remedying poor print quality.................................................................7-108
Matrix printer NP06 ..........................................................................7-108
Thermal printer TP06 .......................................................................7-109
Technical data.............................................................................................7-110
Electrical characteristics ........................................................................7-110
Matrix printing unit NP06..................................................................7-110
Thermal printing unit TP06...............................................................7-110
Interface to the host...............................................................................7-110
Room classification................................................................................7-111
01750112081 A ProCash 1500xe USB - Service Manual I-XIII

Contents
Print head ..............................................................................................7-111

Ribbon cartridge ....................................................................................7-112
Paper feed unit ......................................................................................7-112
Print function .........................................................................................7-113
Paper specifications ..............................................................................7-115
Journal roll dimensions ....................................................................7-116
Dimensions and weights .......................................................................7-117
Removing / installing the components ........................................................7-118
Print head ..............................................................................................7-118
Thermal array ........................................................................................7-119
Printing Cassette (TH60) ..........................................................................7-121

View of printing cassette.............................................................................7-122
Components and controls...........................................................................7-123
Pulling out the printing cassette..................................................................7-124
Key panel....................................................................................................7-125
Problems.....................................................................................................7-125
Messages on the status display ............................................................7-126
Example of blink display 2 ...............................................................7-126
Status of Yellow LED .......................................................................7-126
Status of Green LED........................................................................7-126
Status of Red LED ...........................................................................7-127
Key functions ..............................................................................................7-128
Paper feed.............................................................................................7-128
Test printout ..........................................................................................7-129
Exiting the key functions........................................................................7-130
Setup menu ................................................................................................7-130
Menu structure .................................................................................7-132
Adjusting the paper low sensor...................................................................7-133
Status LEDs ..........................................................................................7-133
Installing/deinstalling components ..............................................................7-134
Thermal head with cutter.......................................................................7-134
Removing the printing cassette .............................................................7-136
Inserting the printing cassette ...............................................................7-139
Technical data ............................................................................................7-143
Power supply.........................................................................................7-143
Power input ...........................................................................................7-143
Print data ...............................................................................................7-143
I-XIV ProCash 1500xe USB - Service Manual 01750112081 A

Contents
Thermal paper specifications ......................................................................7-144

USB connector pin assignment...................................................................7-146
Barcode Reader BR 02 .............................................................................7-147

Important safety precautions.......................................................................7-149
Description ..................................................................................................7-149
Connecting the barcode scanner ................................................................7-151
Factory defaults ..........................................................................................7-152
Programming ..............................................................................................7-155
Problems.....................................................................................................7-156
Test .............................................................................................................7-156
Technical data.............................................................................................7-157
Electrical characteristics ........................................................................7-157
Optical characteristics ...........................................................................7-157
Physical characteristics .........................................................................7-157
Ambient conditions ................................................................................7-158
Safety standards....................................................................................7-158
Decoding ...............................................................................................7-158
Cash Media Dispenser (CMD-V4) ................................................................8-1
Ink Staining System......................................................................................8-3
CMD V4 Shutter 01750053690 / -56960........................................................8-5

Structure .........................................................................................................8-6
Function ........................................................................................................8-10
Cash removal ..........................................................................................8-11
Meaning of hybrid photosensors .............................................................8-12
Pin assignment .............................................................................................8-13
Maintenance .................................................................................................8-13
Technical data...............................................................................................8-14
Audio Changeover Switch 01750042748 ....................................................9-1

Circuit diagram................................................................................................9-2
Pin assignment ...............................................................................................9-3
System unit connection .............................................................................9-3
Loudspeaker connection ...........................................................................9-4
Headphone jack.........................................................................................9-4
Audio Changeover Switch with Volume Key 01750059867.......................9-5

Circuit diagram................................................................................................9-7
Pin assignment ...............................................................................................9-8
01750112081 A ProCash 1500xe USB - Service Manual I-XV

Contents
System unit connection .............................................................................9-8

Loudspeaker connection ...........................................................................9-9
Headphone jack ........................................................................................9-9
Key connection........................................................................................9-10
Portrait Camera (Maku) ..............................................................................9-11

Delivery package ..........................................................................................9-11
Instructions for replacement .........................................................................9-12
Technical data ..............................................................................................9-13
Pin assignment .............................................................................................9-14
Portrait Camera (Color) ..............................................................................9-15

Delivery package ..........................................................................................9-15
Instructions for replacement .........................................................................9-16
Technical data ..............................................................................................9-17
Pin assignment .............................................................................................9-18
Cash Slot Camera .......................................................................................9-19

Pin assignment .............................................................................................9-20
Technical data ..............................................................................................9-21
Relay Panel for External Features USB 01750083012 .............................10-1

Description ..............................................................................................10-1
Technical data .........................................................................................10-2
Description of connectors ..................................................................10-2
Terminal diagram ...............................................................................10-4
Sample connection of customer feedback .........................................10-4
Pin assignment ..................................................................................10-5
Replacement.................................................................................................10-8
Technical data ..............................................................................................10-8
Remote Status Indicator ............................................................................10-9

Description....................................................................................................10-9
Indicators and controls................................................................................10-10
Pin assignment ...........................................................................................10-11
Remote status indicator - standard .......................................................10-11
Remote status indicator - audio.............................................................10-12
Operator Panel USB .................................................................................10-13

Introduction .................................................................................................10-13
Description of keys and indicators ..............................................................10-16
Keys and indicators for operator panel functions ..................................10-17
I-XVI ProCash 1500xe USB - Service Manual 01750112081 A

Contents
Keys and indicators for functions of the external control unit ................10-18
Replacing the label strips............................................................................10-20
Technical specifications ..............................................................................10-22
Pin assignment ......................................................................................10-22
Technical data .......................................................................................10-24
Plug-in Media Entry Indicators ................................................................10-25

Structure .....................................................................................................10-25
Pin assignment ...........................................................................................10-26
Thermostat 0284502000 ...........................................................................10-27

Switching points of heating control .............................................................10-27
Ready indication .........................................................................................10-28
Pin assignment of thermostat (4 pins) ........................................................10-29
Temperature sensor....................................................................................10-29
Maintenance ...............................................................................................10-29
Smart UPS 750 ..........................................................................................10-31

Controls.......................................................................................................10-32
Front ......................................................................................................10-32
Rear.......................................................................................................10-33
APC Smart-UPS 750 (230 V) ...........................................................10-33
APC Smart-UPS 750 (120 V) ...........................................................10-34
Safety precautions ......................................................................................10-35
Switching on................................................................................................10-36
Switching off................................................................................................10-36
Self-test.......................................................................................................10-37
Settings via the software.............................................................................10-38
LEDs and acoustic signals..........................................................................10-39
Malfunctions................................................................................................10-42
Repairs and battery replacement................................................................10-45
Pin assignment ...........................................................................................10-46
RS-232 ..................................................................................................10-46
USB .......................................................................................................10-47
Technical data.............................................................................................10-48
230 V version.........................................................................................10-48
120 V version.........................................................................................10-49
Removal/Installation of Components........................................................11-1
Device views .................................................................................................11-2
Front views ..............................................................................................11-2
Device with front door (Front- and Rearload).....................................11-2
01750112081 A ProCash 1500xe USB - Service Manual I-XVII

Contents
Device with barcode reader (Front- and Rearload)............................11-3

Device with cash-out panel (Rearload) ..............................................11-4
Device with standard topper ..............................................................11-5
Rear views...............................................................................................11-6
Rearload device with strongbox .........................................................11-6
Rearload device with UL safe ............................................................11-7
Customer panel views .............................................................................11-8
Device with 10.4" LCD monitor with softkeys and
hybrid DIP reader...............................................................................11-8
Device with 12" LCD monitor, softkeys and barcode reader BR02....11-9
Device with 15" LCD touch monitor .................................................11-10
Device with 15" LCD monitor with touchscreen and
barcode reader.................................................................................11-11
Front door open.....................................................................................11-12
Frontload device with UL safe..........................................................11-12
Rearload device with strongbox .......................................................11-13
Safe door open......................................................................................11-14
Frontload device with UL safe..........................................................11-14
Customer panel open ............................................................................11-15
ProCash 1500xe USB Frontload......................................................11-15
ProCash 1500xe USB Rearload ......................................................11-16
Door of operating unit open (only Rearload) .........................................11-17
Opening / closing the device.......................................................................11-18
Opening / closing the front door ............................................................11-18
Opening / closing the cash-out panel ....................................................11-18
Lifting up / lowering the customer panel................................................11-19
Device with front door ......................................................................11-19
Device with cash-out panel ..............................................................11-20
Door of operating unit open / closed (only Rearload)............................11-21
Pulling out / pushing in the cash media dispenser ................................11-21
Pulling out / pushing in the equipment carriage ....................................11-22
Operator panel USB ...................................................................................11-23
External control unit ....................................................................................11-26
Keypad EPP V5 (Semi-Outdoor) ................................................................11-27
Keypad EPP V5 ..........................................................................................11-28
Barcode reader BR 02 ................................................................................11-29
Optical indicators for receipt printer / CHD V2x ..........................................11-30
Portrait camera ...........................................................................................11-31
Customer panel special electronics ............................................................11-32
Audio changeover switch............................................................................11-33
12.1" DVI Highbright box (Semi-Outdoor)...................................................11-35
12.1" LCD box DVI......................................................................................11-36
Softkeys ......................................................................................................11-37
I-XVIII ProCash 1500xe USB - Service Manual 01750112081 A

Contents
Protective screen ........................................................................................11-38

Touch controller ..........................................................................................11-39
15" LCD monitor .........................................................................................11-40
15" Touchscreen .........................................................................................11-41
Logo illumination .........................................................................................11-42
Standard topper.....................................................................................11-43
Logo cover ..................................................................................................11-47
Standard topper.....................................................................................11-47
System unit (PC).........................................................................................11-50
System loudspeaker ...................................................................................11-51
ASKIM module ............................................................................................11-52
General information ...............................................................................11-52
ASKIM sensor........................................................................................11-52
Anti-skimming base unit ........................................................................11-55
ASKIM button ........................................................................................11-57
Gas spring...................................................................................................11-61
Gas spring bracket......................................................................................11-63
Smart UPS 750 (USB-S).............................................................................11-64
Central power supply unit ...........................................................................11-65
Central power supply unit (USB-S) .............................................................11-66
Power distributor .........................................................................................11-67
Receipt printer TP07/NP07 .........................................................................11-69
Removing the rocking bar ...........................................................................11-70
Journal printer .............................................................................................11-73
Card handling device CHD V2x ..................................................................11-74
Capacitor.....................................................................................................11-76
Card reject box............................................................................................11-77
Card reject module......................................................................................11-78
Hybrid DIP reader .......................................................................................11-79
Loudspeakers .............................................................................................11-81
Fan..............................................................................................................11-82
Central USB special electronics..................................................................11-83
Equipment carriage lock .............................................................................11-87
Shutter ........................................................................................................11-88
Shutter (Semi-Outdoor)...............................................................................11-91
Optical indicator of shutter ..........................................................................11-92
Seal for cash-out panel (Semi-Outdoor) .....................................................11-93
Cash slot camera ........................................................................................11-94
Relay panel for external features USB........................................................11-94
Heating controller (Semi-Outdoor) ..............................................................11-95
Heating unit.................................................................................................11-96
Axial fan for the heating unit .......................................................................11-97
Power supply unit for the axial fan ..............................................................11-99
01750112081 A ProCash 1500xe USB - Service Manual I-XIX

Contents
Index ...............................................................................................................II-I
I-XX ProCash 1500xe USB - Service Manual 01750112081 A

Abbreviations
A
ACT Advanced Card Trap
AGP Accelerated Graphics Port
APC American Power Conversion Corp.
ASKIM Anti-Skimming Module
AT Advanced Technology
ATAPI AT Bus Attachment Packet Interface
ATX AT Bus Extended
B
BBA Teller-operated cash dispenser
BIOS Basic Input Output System
BNC Bayonet Nut Connector
bps Bits per second
BR Barcode Reader
BSMI Bureau of Standards, Metrology and Inspection
C
CCD Charge Coupled Device
CCIR Comité Consultatif International des Radio Communications
(International Radio Consultation Committee of ITU)
CD Compact Disk
CDRH Center for Devices and Radiological Health
CD-ROM Compact Disk - Read Only Memory
CE Communauté Européenne (European Community) Declaration
of Conformity
CFR Code of Federal Regulation
CH Channel
01750112081 A ProCash 1500xe USB - Service Manual I-XXI

Abbreviations
CHD Card Handling Device

Customer Help Desk
CIM Card Identification Module (security module)
CMD Cash Media Dispenser
CMD-V4 Cash Media Dispenser Version 4
CMOS Complementary Metal Oxide Semiconductor
CNS Chinese National Standards
COM Communication Port of PC
cpi Characters per inch
cpl Characters per line
CPU Central Processing Unit
CRT Cathode Ray Tube
CSA Canadian Standards Association
CTS Clear To Send
D
DC Direct Current
DCD Data Carrier Detect
DDC Diebold Direct Connect
Display Data Channel
DDR Double Data Rate
DIMM Dual Inline Memory Module
DIN German Institute for Standardization
DIP Dual-in-line Package
DOS Disk Operating System
Dot Refers to a printed dot
dpi Dots per inch
DPS Digital Photosensor
DSR Data Set Ready
D-SUB Connector series D, subminiature
DTR Data Terminal Ready
DVD Digital Versatile Disk
I-XXII ProCash 1500xe USB - Service Manual 01750112081 A

Abbreviations
DVI Digital Visual Interface

DVI-D Digital Visual Interface, Digital only out-/input
DVI-I Digital Visual Interface, Integrated, analog and digital out-/input
E
ec eurocheque
EC European Community
ECP Extended Capability Port
EDM Encryption / Decryption Module
EEC European Economic Community
EEPROM Electrical Erasable Programmable Read Only Memory
EGA Enhanced Graphics Adapter
EIA Electronic Industries Association (USA)
EMA Intruder alarm system
EMC Electromagnetic Compatibility
EMV Europay, Mastercard, Visa
EN European standard
EPLD Erasable Programmable Logic Device
EPP Encrypted PIN Pad
Enhanced Parallel Port
EPROM Erasable Programmable Read Only Memory
F
FCC Federal Communications Commission
FL Frontload
FW Firmware
G
GmbH Limited liability company
GND Ground
01750112081 A ProCash 1500xe USB - Service Manual I-XXIII

Abbreviations
H
HDD Hard Disk Drive
HW Hardware
I
IBM International Business Machines
IC Integrated Circuit
ICES Interference Causing Equipment Standards
ID Identification
IDCU ID Card Unit
IDE Integrated Drive Electronics
IEC International Electrotechnical Commission
IP International Protection
IRQ Interrupt Request
ISA Industrial Standard Architecture
ISDN Integrated Services Digital Network
ISO International Organization for Standardization
K
KDIAG Components Diagnostics
L
LAN Local Area Network
LCD Liquid Crystal Display
LCF Light Control Film
LED Light-Emitting Diode
Linux Linus Torvalds UNIX
LPT Line Printer
LVDS Low Voltage Differential Signal (digital interface for flat-panel
displays, standard procedure for high-speed data
transmission)
I-XXIV ProCash 1500xe USB - Service Manual 01750112081 A

Abbreviations
M
MEI Media Entry Indicator
MK Mark detection
MM Modular Marker of ID card (evaluation by means of security
modules like MM box or CIM 86)
MTBF Mean Time Between Failures
N
NC Not connected
NDC NCR Direct Connect
NP Needle (Matrix) Printer
NTSC National Television System Committee
NVRAM Nonvolatile Random Access Memory
O
OEM Original Equipment Manufacturer
OSD On-Screen Display (window for making display settings)
OSI Open System Interconnection
P
PAL Phase Alternation by Line
P Personal Computer (system unit of device)
PCI Peripheral Component Interconnect
PCS Print Contrast Sensitivity
PDIAG Periphery Diagnostics
PE Paper-out sensor
PIN Personal Identification Number
PnP Plug and Play
PrA Presenter output
ProPxD Platform Extended Diagnostic
PS Photosensor
PWE Weekend sensor
01750112081 A ProCash 1500xe USB - Service Manual I-XXV

Abbreviations
R
R/W Read / Write
RAM Random Access Memory
RCLK Receive Clock
RD Received Data
RGB Red, Green, Blue
RI Ring Indicator
RL Rearload
RLB Remote Loopback
ROM Read Only Memory
RS232 Recommended Standard 232
RSI Remote Status Indicator
RTS Request To Send
RxD Received Data
S
SAM Security Access Module (part of cashless payment)
SDRAM Synchronous Dynamic Random Access Memory
SE Special Electronics
SELV Safety Extra-Low Voltage
SGND Signal Ground
SLE Systemic Lupus Erythemosus
SNA System Network Architecture
SOP Service and Operating Program
SRAM Static Random Access Memory
SVGA Super Video Graphics Adapter
SW Software
I-XXVI ProCash 1500xe USB - Service Manual 01750112081 A

Abbreviations
T
TCLK Transmit Clock
TD Transmitted Data
TFT Thin Film Transistor
TH Thermal printer
TI Test Indicator
TMDS Transition Minimized Differential Signaling
TN network Power supply network in acc. with EN 60950
TOF Top of Form (TOF mark black mark for paper control)
TP Thermal Printer
TVSS Transient Voltage Surge Suppressors
TxD Transmit Data
U
UL Underwriters Laboratories Inc.
UPS Uninterruptible Power Supply
USB Universal Serial Bus
V
VCCI Voluntary Control Council for Interference by Information
Technology Equipment
VDE Association for Electrical, Electronic & Information
Technologies
VESA Video Electronics Standards Association
VGA Video Graphics Adapter
W
WAN Wide Area Network
WN Wincor Nixdorf International GmbH
01750112081 A ProCash 1500xe USB - Service Manual I-XXVII

Abbreviations
X
XGA Extended Graphics Adapter
Z
ZKA Central Credit Committee
ZSE Central Special Electronics Module
I-XXVIII ProCash 1500xe USB - Service Manual 01750112081 A

Introduction
This service manual has been compiled for authorized service personnel only.
The operating and installation instructions should also be read since certain
details are only described in these instructions.
Symbols used in this manual

− Text following a dash represents an item in a list.
" " Text in quotation marks refers to other chapters or sections in this
document.
• Text following this symbol describes actions to be performed in the
specified order.
Text following this symbol should be given special attention in order to

avoid damage and injury.
i Text following this symbol contains general information to facilitate use

of the device and help avoid operating errors.

Important safety precautions Introduction
Important safety precautions

Please read the following notes carefully before doing any work on the
device.
Please note that there is danger of head injury when the customer
panel or the door of the operating unit is raised!
This device complies with the relevant safety regulations for information
processing equipment.
− When moving the device from a cold to a warm environment, do not
operate it for at least two hours to prevent possible damage caused by
condensation.
− Only use the original packaging material to transport the device.
− Observe the warning and information labels on the device.
− The device is equipped with a safety-tested power cable, which must be
connected only to a suitable grounded outlet.
− Always hold the plug when removing the power cable. Never pull the cable
itself.
− Install all cables in such a way that they will not be stepped on or tripped
over or damaged and crushed in any other way.
− Have damaged power cables replaced immediately.
− Make sure that there is always free access to the sockets used or to the
electrical circuit-breakers of the house installation.

Introduction Important safety precautions
− In case of an emergency (e. g. damaged cabinets, controls or power

cables, liquids or foreign objects in the device) observe the following
instructions:
Deactivate the device immediately by:
Switching off the automatic circuit-breaker or removing the fuse inset
from the fuse holder in the distribution box of the building installation;
Disconnecting the plug connector of the power supply cable from the
grounded socket in the building installation;
Switching the ON/OFF switch on the power distributor.
− During a thunderstorm, data transmission lines may not be connected or
disconnected.
− Always keep the device's vents free from obstruction to ensure proper air
circulation and to prevent malfunctions resulting from overheating.
− Only use accessories and extension components which have been
approved by us. Nonobservance can result in damage to the device or
violations of regulations concerning safety, radio interference and
ergonomical requirements.
− Note that there are only safety extra-low voltage circuits (SELV circuits) if
you want to feed voltage from an external source into prepared cables to
install additional electronics (e.g. connection for an intruder alarm system).
− Only use cleaning agents approved by Wincor Nixdorf International GmbH
for cleaning and maintenance (see chapter "Maintenance and Service").

Important safety precautions Introduction
Repair work
Repair work may only be carried out by authorized personnel.
Unauthorized opening of the device or repair work carried out

improperly could result in considerable danger to the user.
In case of noncompliance, Wincor Nixdorf International GmbH

excludes all liability.
Lithium batteries
There is danger of fire or explosion if the batteries are handled

incorrectly.
It is therefore important to note the following points:

– Avoid short circuits.
– Never recharge the battery.
– Avoid temperatures above 100 °C.
– Do not try to open the battery by force.
– Do not allow the battery to come into contact with water or fire.
Replace the battery only with the same or an equivalent type

recommended by Wincor Nixdorf International GmbH (see chapter
"Appendix", section "Consumables" in the operating manual).
Dispose of used batteries in compliance with national regulations

(observe the manufacturer's specifications, if necessary).
Start-up
i Before operating the device, remove all parts inside of it which secure
its components during transportation or check whether they have been
removed (see info sheet supplied with the device).

Introduction General power interrupt
General power interrupt

A general power interrupt has the following effects:
i
– All current transactions are immediately aborted (exception:
transport of the ID card).
– Dispensed banknotes remain in the transport path of the cash
media dispenser. They will be transported to the stacking position of
the gripper or to the reject/retract cassette of the cash media
dispenser after the device has been turned on again.
– Depending on the parameter setting, ID cards are either output,
retained or transported to the ID card reject tray. This transaction
will be properly completed.
When the customer panel is lifted up, there is danger of head injury!
• Open the front door and lift the customer panel up (see chapter "Basic
Operation" in the operating manual).
• Disconnect the power cable from the left rubber socket at the rear side of
the power distributor.
• To ensure that the entire device is disconnected from power, you must also
pull the plug of the power cable from the wall outlet or interrupt the power
supply in the distributor box of the building by switching off the circuit-
breaker or by removing the fuse.
Devices with UPS (optional) and/or heating control (optional) in the safe:
• Open the safe door (see the operating manual).
• Turn the UPS off.

How to switch off the UPS depends on the UPS unit used.
For more details see chapter "Uninterruptible Power Supply (UPS)” in
the operating manual.

Description of the device Introduction
Description of the device

Function and use
The ProCash 1500xe USB is a monofunctional automated teller machine for
indoor installation.
The ProCash 1500xe USB series includes a basic device which is available as
a frontload and rearload version with strongbox or UL safe.
The ProCash 1500xe Frontload USB Semi-Outdoor is a device designed for
special needs which can also be used in outdoor applications. The ProCash
1500xe Frontload USB Semi-Outdoor is a frontload device featuring a UL safe.
All device versions are based on a modular system which, apart from the basic
functions of the cash output and information display, can be extended with the
following functions:
− Printing receipts or other documents
− Audio systems (loudspeaker / headset)
The functions are implemented by the use of components which can be
combined as needed. They are described in detail in the following chapters
and apply to all device versions.
If the device versions vary from one another, this is pointed out explicitly and
the respective device version is listed in parentheses behind the component.

Introduction Structure of the manual
Structure of the manual
Outline
The chapter "Introduction" describes the important safety precautions and the
general power interruption. It also gives an overview of the possible functions
of the device.
The features are also described in the chapter "Introduction" in the section
"Technical data".
In the chapter "Function and Integration" you will find the block diagrams and a
short description of the main functions of the device.
This is followed by the chapters describing the components which are used or
can be used.
The next chapter "Removal/Installation of Components" provides detailed
information on how to remove and install each component.
Finally, the chapter "Maintenance and Service" contains information on
maintenance work to be carried out regularly.
Supplementary documentation
For the operation and installation of the system, separate manuals are
available in several languages.
These manuals can be ordered from our print partner. They are also available
in the intranet.
Usually the manufacturers' original manuals for OEM components are included
in the shipment. They may contain more detailed information.

Structure of the manual Introduction
Manual release
Since production began, some components have been replaced for various
reasons (e. g. progress in technology, cost reduction).
Often the hardware replacement does not result in a changed construction of
the device (mechanical or electrical) or the functional integration.
In this case, the new component is added to the service manual and the
previous component remains in the respective chapter.
If the integration of a new component results in changes, the corresponding
chapters will be adapted (e. g. block diagrams, removal/installation, preventive
maintenance, etc.).

Introduction Technical data
Technical data
Electrical characteristics of the supply network

Line voltage range: 110 - 120 V 220-240 V
Rated frequency: 50/60 Hz 50/60 Hz
Network type: TN (network with PE TN (network with PE
conductor) conductor)
Permissible tolerance for
rated voltage: - 10 to + 6 % - 10 to + 6 %
Permissible tolerance for
rated frequency: ±1% ±1%

Technical data Introduction
Device conditions
110 - 120 V 220 - 240 V
Idle Operation Idle Operation
mode (maximum) mode (maximum)
Rated current
consumption: 1.2 A 3.0 A 0.7 A 1.7 A
Apparent power
consumption: 161 VA 360 VA 145 VA 270 VA
Real power: 130 W 330 W 136 W 261 W
Power factor: 0.94 0.91 0.80 0.84
Heating
(without device; only Semi-Outdoor)
Rated current
consumption: 1.2 A
Apparent power
consumption: 270 VA
Real power: 270 W
Power factor: 1
Protection class:
Leakage current: 3.5 mA 3.5 mA
Power supply connection
(wall outlet): country-specific safety country-specific safety
plug plug
Safety plug
230 V / 16 A
Fuse: 10 A slow fuse or 16 A 10 A slow fuse or 16 A
automatic circuit- automatic circuit-
breaker breaker
Degree of protection in acc.
with EN 60529:
Indoor: IP 20 IP 20
Outdoor: IP 54 IP 54
(only semi-outdoor
version)

Installation specifications
Frontload Rearload Semi-outdoor
device device version
Dimensions:
Height: 1398 mm 1398 mm 1398 mm
Depth: 722 mm 822 mm 708 mm
Width: 450 mm 450 mm 450 mm
Width incl. heater: 530 mm
Operation and maintenance
space:
Device with
strongbox: 1.27 m² 1.59 m²
Device with UL safe: 1.31 m² 1.71 m² 1.40 m²
Fan capacity: 60 m³/h 60 m³/h 60 m³/h
Device weight:
ProCash 1500xe approx. approx.
USB with strongbox 220 kg 240 kg
USB with UL safe 420 kg 450 kg
Surface load:
USB with strongbox 8.7 kN/m² 8.1 kN/m²
ProCash 1500xe approx. approx. approx.
USB with UL safe 15.6 kN/m² 14.3 kN/m² 14.4 kN/m²
i For detailed information concerning the dimensions please refer to the

chapter "Planning the Installation", section "Device dimensions and
views" in the installation guide.

Environmental conditions
Climatic environmental conditions in acc. with EN 60721

Class Ambient temperature Relative humidity
°C % r.h.
Operation (indoors) 3K2 + 15 to + 35* 10 to 75
Operation (indoors) + 5 to + 35 10 to 75
Operation (outdoors) ** - 15 to + 40 10 to 75
Limit range of operation
(indoors) *** 3K3 + 5 to + 40 5 to 85
Transport 2K2 - 25 to + 60 15 to 98
Storage 1K2 + 5 to + 40 5 to 85
* The temperature value of + 35 °C deviates from the value of the standard

(+ 32 °C).
** Only semi-outdoor version
*** In the limit range the device may only be operated for a short period of
time.
Mechanical environmental conditions in acc. with

EN 60721
Class Comment
Operation 3M2 Building with minimum external vibration.
Transport (in original 2M2 All types of commercial vehicles and trailers
packing) as well as rail and air transport
Storage (in original 1M3 Noticeable vibration and shocks, e.g. by
packing) machines or passing vehicles.

Noise emission in acc. with EN 27779

Noise values acc. to ISO 9296 Idle mode Operation ***
Sound power level LWAd 5.9 B 6.4 B
Workplace-related sound pressure level LpAm 42 dB 47 dB
(at adjacent workplace)
*** typical operating cycle
i When selecting the installation site, noise emission should be taken

into account.
Fans in operation or the noise produced during a transaction could
disturb people in the immediate vicinity of the device and may
therefore need to be diminished with soundproofing (e.g. soundproof
cabinets, etc.).
They must comply with the environmental conditions that apply to the
specific device (see above) and the maintenance areas (see the
Installation Guide).

Compliance with standards and certifications
Standards met
Safety standards: EN 60950, CSA C22.2-950, CSA C22.2-60950,
UL 60950
EMC standards: EN 55022 / B, EN 55024,

FCC CFR 47, part 15, subpart B, class A
ICES-003 (CSA 108.8)
BSMI-Standard CNS 13438 class B
Conformity
The CE mark of conformity attached to the product or its package indicates
that the product complies with the requirements of the following EC directives:
− EMC Directive 89/336/EEC including the amending directive 93/68/EEC
− Low Voltage Directive 73/23/EEC including the amending directive
93/68/EEC
The corresponding statement of compliance has been issued by
Heinz-Nixdorf-Ring 1
33106 Paderborn
Germany
Notes concerning radio interference suppression and

electrical safety
All other devices connected to this product must comply with the EMC
Directive 89/336/EEC including the amending directive 93/68/EEC and the Low
Voltage Directive 73/23/EEC including the amending directive 93/68/EEC.

FCC rules and Canadian Standard ICES - 003

NOTE: This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for
a Class A digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC rules and Canadian
Standard ICES - 003. These limits are designed to provide reasonable
protection against harmful interference when the equipment is operating in a
commercial environment. The equipment generates, uses and can radiate high
frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the
instruction manual, may cause harmful interference to radio communications.
Operation of this equipment in a residential area is likely to cause harmful
interference in which case the user will be required to correct the interference
at his own expense.
Certification for data transmission

The certification number of the data transmission module (if present) is
attached to the housing of the system unit.

Environmental protection Introduction
Environmental protection
Environmentally friendly product design and

development
This product has been designed according to our corporate standard
"Environmentally friendly product design and development".
This means that crucial criteria such as long life, choice of material and its
labeling, emissions, packaging, ease of disassembly and recyclability have
been taken into account.
This saves resources and relieves the strain on the environment.
Saving energy
Please switch on devices that need not be constantly running only when they
are actually needed. They should also be turned off when they are not needed
for longer periods of time.
Disposing of used consumables

Please dispose of printer consumables, batteries, fluorescent tubes as well as
cleaning and maintenance material according to the applicable regulations of
your country (observe manufacturer's specifications).
Labels on plastic case parts

Please do not stick any labels on plastic case parts since that would make
recycling more difficult.

Introduction Environmental protection
Returning, recycling and disposing of used units

and consumables
Details regarding the return and recycling of used units and consumables can
be obtained from your local branch office or from our Recycling Center in
Paderborn:
Tel.: +49 (0) 52 51 8-1 80 10
Fax.: +49 (0) 52 51 8-1 80 15
Further information
can be obtained from our Environmental Protection section (Referat
Umweltschutz):
Tel.: +49 (0) 52 51 693-67 07
Fax.: +49 (0) 52 51 693-67 09
E-Mail: mailto:referat.umweltschutz@wincor-nixdorf.com

Environmental protection Introduction

Function and Integration
This chapter provides information on the functions of the components and their
integration into the device.
Block diagrams
The following block diagrams show the connections between the individual
components.

2-2
Audio
Audio / head- Headphone
phone switch Taster jack
Switch
loudspeakers
115/230V Power output
Audio output
Door switch Loud- Cash output Customer panel Sensor
Gameport Touch-
Y customer panel speaker light
Z
USB on board F screen
Mouse
EPP
Keyboard IDCU
Softkey
Softkey
LED
LPT Askim Button
VGA
LCD Receipt printer
High-
Optical indicators
LAN
A
bright
Block diagrams
USB on board W
X
U Intrusion protection
USB on board V facility for card CHD
MUX1 reader V2x,
SUNIX card
MUX2 Hybrid
MUX3 LCD light on/off DIP
MUX4 Customer panel SE reader
Data line
COM 2
Power distributor
COM 1
C
(+5,+12,-12,+24V)
Power input "Only rearload devices"
DVI Door switch

rear door
12V LCD
A
B
C
D
E
F
Netzverteiler G Central SE K
H
(+5,+12,-12,+24V) I L
J X
External
D A C control
B W unit
Central power
B
supply unit
B
Operat. Barcode Portrait
Power supply
System wiring diagram USB
scanner camera
Panel
Fan Fan
H
Control
Safety switch
Power output MM
switched B
Power output
module Safe door
Capacitor
switched Relay panel for
Sensor
sensor
E
Sensor
D
Power output
external features
ID cards
unswitched
Box for 100

Power input
CMD-V4 Shutter
ProCash 1500xe USB - Service Manual

Power switch Controller
Power distributor
CIM 86 MM customer- RSI
Receipt Journal IDCU specific
interface
connection
Removable
printer printer
card reject box

J K
Video
Video
Front light Printing

("Logo" signal) cassette
C
Camera
Keyboard Lower light

("Logo" signal)
120V 230V
ATM frame
UPS
Data line
Modem
COM1: Camera
Power supply connection Alarm cable COM2: CIM or MM or barcode reader or modem mounitng kit
(country-specific) CH1: IDCU
01750112081 A
Function and Integration
Function and Integration Block diagrams
Journal printer
Connection to the central USB special electronics module
Central power supply

24 V
Connector B Journal
printer
Central USB special electronics USB
Port: USB E
Receipt printer
Central power supply

24 V
Connector B
Receipt
Central USB special electronics USB printer
Port: USB D

Block diagrams Function and Integration
Cash media dispenser (CMD)
Safety
Central USB special electronics Standby switch
CMD Safe door

Central USB special electronics sensor
USB
Port: USB B
Shutter
Central power supply 24 V
Connector B
Customer panel
special electronics Optical indicator
Cash media dispenser with printing cassette

TH60
Safety
Central USB special electronics Standby switch
Safe door
Central USB special electronics CMD sensor
USB
Port: USB B
Shutter
Central power supply 24 V TH60
Connector B
Central USB special electronics

Port: USB K
Customer panel
Optical indicator
special electronics

Function and Integration Block diagrams
Barcode reader BR 02
Central power supply 5V

Barcode
System unit (PC) reader
COM 2 V.24
Portrait camera
Power distributor 12 V
Portrait
Video camera
Portrait camera / Cash slot camera
Power distributor 12 V / 5 V
Port on PC: COM 1 V.24 Camera
Video

Block diagrams Function and Integration
Audio loudspeakers / headphone
Loudspeakers on / in
customer panel
L R
Line Out
(Speaker Out)
Head-
PC
phone jack Audio
Headphone Gameport
changeover switch
Button
Heater (only semi-outdoor)
ProCash 1500xe Frontload USB Semi-Outdoor
Power
Country-specific Fan
supply
connection (axial)
12 V
Fan
Thermostat / heater
Heating control

Function and Integration Power supply
Power supply
Line voltage
The device is equipped with the 01750073167 power distributor to supply the
components with line voltage.
The power distributor is connected via a power cord to the UPS (optional)
which, in turn, is connected to the building installation.
The PC and the central power supply unit III are connected to the power
distributor.
The heater of ProCash 1500xe Frontload USB Semi-Outdoor is connected
with the power cord directly by means of a Y adapter cable.
Any optional modem that is installed must not be connected to the
power distributor. It must always be connected to an outlet outside.
The on/off switch can be used as a central system switch for all components
connected to the power distributor.
The device is equipped with the central power supply unit III 01750069162.

Power supply Function and Integration
Configurations without SE or controller with

compatible interface
The central power supply unit III supplies the voltages at the power output
terminals only if the NEN strapping plug (1) 7070200416 is attached to
connector A.
1 NEN strapping plug 7070200416

Function and Integration Power supply
Pin assignment
1 Type of connector:
AMP-UNIV-MATE-N-LOK 8M
Pin Name Comment

1 0V
2 Jumper between pins 1 and 3
3 PON PON former (NEN)
4
5
6
7
8

Power supply Function and Integration
DC power supply
The required DC voltages for all components without a power supply unit of
their own are generated in the central power supply unit.
Connection of cash media dispenser, journal printer and

receipt printer
Due to the required power, these components must be connected to
the 24 V connectors B1, B2 and B3 of the central power supply unit.
Power distribution
The direct voltage is distributed via a 24 V distributor board and voltage cables
with respective branches.
Pin assignment for 5-pin AMP connector

Pin Voltage
1 GND
2 + 24 V
3 +5V
4 - 12 V
5 + 12 V
Pin assignment for 2-pin AMP connector

Pin Voltage
1 GND
2 + 24 V

Function and Integration Central USB special electronics
Central USB special electronics Customer panel

special electronics
I²C Port 3
2
USB Port (A to L)
1
Full Speed / Low Speed
USB Control unit

input
USB component
USB component Operator Panel
e.g. journal printer
In a frontload device a customer panel special electronics and an external

control unit with controls and indicators or an operator panel USB are
connected to the central USB special electronics.
A rearload device always features the operator panel USB.
Other components, such as the journal printer, are also connected to the
central USB special electronics module. The applicable pin assignment of the
central USB special electronics module is listed in the section "Central USB
special electronics assignment".
i The connectors of the I²C ports may only be attached or detached

when the device is disconnected from the power supply.
Improper handling can cause complete damage to the components.

Central USB special electronics Function and Integration
Functions of the central USB special electronics used

The following functions of the central USB special electronics can be used:
− Central ON/OFF switch
− Emergency operation
− Signal tone generation
− Control of the customer panel special electronics
− Control of the external operating unit
− Control of the removable card reject box
− Logic for turning 24V equipment, power supply unit, reserve outputs on and
off
− Fan function query
− Service functions for turning off 5V, 12V and 24V equipment
− Door sensor queries (only rearload devices)
− Reserve outputs 1 to 3, reserve inputs 1 to 4
− SOP key / switch function
− LCD lighting query
− Logo light
− Firmware download
Further information concerning the central USB special electronics is provided
in the block diagrams in this chapter as well as in the respective chapter on
this module in this manual.
Customer panel special electronics

This component is an extension to the central USB special electronics module.
Further information concerning the customer panel special electronics is
provided in the block diagrams in this chapter as well as in the respective
chapter on this module in this manual.
i The connector of the I²C port for the central USB special electronics
may only be attached or detached when the device is disconnected
from the power supply.

Function and Integration Central USB special electronics
Connected components
The following components can be connected to the customer panel special
electronics:
− Softkeys (left and right)
− ASKIM
− IDCU intrusion protection facility
− Three additional media entry indicators (MEI)
− Customer panel illumination (BBA)
− Signal generator (e.g. loudspeaker)
− Door switch - customer panel
− Up to three additional feedbacks
− LCD light control
Assignment of media entry indicators

Connector of the customer panel special electronics 01750070596 (indicator
control)
Signal Bit Component Optical indicator, pluggable
Power source 1 0 Card slot PC 2XXXxe cpl.
Power source 2 1 Cash output PC 2XXXxe cpl.
Power source 3 2 Receipt output PC 2XXXxe cpl.

Door switch Function and Integration
External control unit

This component includes the keys and indicators of the central USB special
electronics module (01750070463, 01750099885).
The connection to the central USB special electronics is performed via an I²C
port.
The + 5 V operating voltage is supplied via the I²C port connector from the
central USB special electronics.
Further information concerning the external control unit is provided in the block
diagrams in this chapter as well as in the respective chapter on the external
control unit in this manual.
Door switch
The door of the operating unit (rearload only), the customer panel and the safe
door are equipped with a door switch that sends a signal to the input of the
SOP button of the central USB special electronics reporting when the door is
opened.
The application can signal through the loudspeakers that the door switch has
been pressed.

Function and Integration SOP button
SOP button
The operator can press the SOP button to tell the application that he or she
wants to perform operating or maintenance tasks on the device.
The application can signal through the system loudspeakers that the SOP
button has been pressed.
On ProCash 1500xe USB Frontload the SOP button is located on the external
control unit (see also chapter "External Control Unit"), or on the operator panel
USB (customer-specific), on the rearload device it is located on the operator
panel USB.
Audio loudspeakers / headphone

If the device is shipped with the headphone jack only or with loudspeakers
only, they are directly connected to 'Speaker Out' on the PC.
Optionally, the device can be delivered with the sound system 'Audio
loudspeakers / headphone'. The circuit diagram is shown in the block diagram
in the section "Audio loudspeakers / headphone".
If the headphone jack features a volume control, the volume for the headphone
can be set to four levels via a button. Pressing the button increases the volume
by one level. Once the button has been pressed four times, you return to the
initial volume.
The headphone jack with volume control is always connected to the audio
changeover switch.
The audio changeover switch is connected to the PC's game port (audio card).
For further information on the audio changeover switch please refer to the
chapter "Audio Changeover Switch 01750042748" or "Audio Changeover
Switch with Volume Key 01750059867".

CCTV monitoring Function and Integration
CCTV monitoring
The cash dispensing process can be monitored by a portrait camera and a
cash slot camera mounted on the cash output slot.
Image transmission is implemented by means of a camera which the customer
has to connect externally. The following cameras can be used in
ProCash 1500xe USB:
Portrait camera
Black / white Color
PAL standard 01750048416 01750063352
NTSC standard 01750050429 01750063376
Cash slot camera
PAL standard 01750085502, 01750109332

NTSC standard 01750085503, 01750109333
The camera is supplied with voltage from the central power supply unit III via a
power distributor.

Function and Integration System unit (PC)
System unit (PC)
Overview
The device can be equipped with the following PCs:
Description / Part CPU RAM HDD Optical drive
no.
Embedded compact Celeron 256 MB - 40 GB / CD-ROM 24-
C4-2000 2.0 GHz 1 GB * 80 GB * speed
01750075723, DVD-ROM *
01750106677 CD burner *
Embedded compact Pentium IV 256 MB - 40 GB / CD-ROM 24-
P4-2000 2.0 GHz 1 GB * 80 GB * speed
01750075724, DVD-ROM *
01750106678 CD burner *
Embedded compact Pentium IV 256 MB - 40 GB / CD-ROM 24-
P4-2800 2.8 GHz 1 GB * 80 GB * speed
01750084440, DVD-ROM *
CD burner *
01750106679
* customer-specific

PC settings Function and Integration
PC settings
Component Possible Assigned Poss. Used Usable Assigned Special
I/O addr. I/O addr. inter- IRQ DMA DMA features
(hex) (Hex) rupts
Keyboard - - 1 1 - -
COM1 02F8, 03F8 3, 4 4 - - IRQ can be

03F8, switched
02E8, off
03E8
COM2 02F8, 02F8 3, 4 3 - - IRQ can be
03F8, switched
02E8, off
03E8
COM3 02F8, 03E8 10, 11 10 IRQ can be
03F8, switched
02E8, off
03E8,
0270
COM4 02F8, 0270 10, 11 11 IRQ can be
03F8, switched
02E8, off
03E8,
0270
Parallel 0278, 0378 5, 7 7 1, 3 IRQ can be
interface 0378 switched
LPT1 off ECP
occupies
DMA
Realtime - - 8 8 - -
clock
USB PnP - - -
controller
Mouse - - 12 - - - IRQ
controller switched
off

Function and Integration PC settings
Component Possible Assigned Poss. Used Usable Assigned Special

I/O addr. I/O addr. inter- IRQ DMA DMA features
(hex) (Hex) rupts
Num. - - 13 13 - -
processor
IDE - 01F0 - 14 14 - -
controller 1 01F7
IDE - 0170- 15 15 - -
controller 2 0177E
Free - - 5, 9, 0, 1, 3,
resources 11, 12 5, 6, 7
Ethernet PnP one - -
PRO/1000 IRQ
GT
Eicon C91 PnP
Token Ring PnP

PCI card

PC settings Function and Integration
Overview of PC cards
W Wide area network S System control C Components
L Local area network D Display M Multimedia
Card BUS W L S D C M
EICON C91 PCI X
No.: depending on the driver
Token Ring PCI card PCI X
No.: 1750107116
Ethernet card PRO/1000 GT PCI X
No.: 1750107095

Function and Integration Component assignment
Component assignment
System unit (PC) assignment

Component on PC Port on PC
Portrait camera / Cash slot camera COM 1
CIM 86 or MM module or barcode COM 2
reader or modem
CH 1
CH 2
CH 3
CH 4
Operator panel USB USB W
Central USB special electronics USB X
module
USB Y
USB Z

Protection against reading of ID cards by others Function and Integration
Central USB special electronics assignment

Component on
central USB special electronics
Keypad EPP V5 USB A
CMD-V4 controller USB B
IDCU USB C
Receipt printer USB D
Journal printer USB E
Touchscreen USB F
USB G
Relay panel for external features USB H
USB
USB I
UPS USB J
TH60 USB K
USB L
Protection against reading of ID cards by

others
To prevent ID cards from being read by third parties an intrusion protection
facility or an anti-skimming module (ASKIM) can be installed on the device.
These two protection facilities cannot be combined.
Further information on the ASKIM can be found in the system wiring diagram
in this chapter or in the chapter "Anti-Skimming Module (ASKIM)
01750080047, 1750108535").

Function and Integration Touchscreen for LCD monitor
Touchscreen for LCD monitor

The following touchscreens can be integrated in the device:
− 01750106261 without LCF for 12.1" LCD monitor
− 01750106264 with LCF for 12.1" LCD monitor
− 01750106267 without LCF for 15" LCD monitor
Voltage is supplied to the touchscreen via the USB interface.
Monitors
The following monitors can be integrated into the customer panel of the device:
− DVI High Bright Box 12.1" (01750081436, 01750107937) in conjunction
with touch or softkey version *
− 12.1" LCD box DVI (01750092357, 01750107720) in conjunction with touch
or softkey version *
− LCD box 15" DVI 01750060091 in conjunction with touch
− LCD monitor 15" Open Frame (01750078980, 01750107936) in conjunction
with touch
− LCD box 15" DVI (01750084538, 01750107721) in conjunction with touch

Operating the flat displays Function and Integration
Softkey keypads for 12.1" LCD monitor

The following softkey keypads can be used:
Barcl. NDC C H.K.-GPO: 01750057215
Std. C Brai. H.K. GPO: 01750059611
Standard C H.K. GPO: 01750059753
Standard C Brai. H.K. GPO: 01750059611
NDC C Standard H.K. GPO: 01750059755
NDC C Standard Braille H.K. GPO: 01750059756
Barcl. NDC C H.K.-GPO: 01750057215
DDC C H.K. GPO: 01750059754
DDC C Braille H.K. GPO: 01750059634
NDC_C 64.5 - 33: 01750074503
Operating the flat displays

To operate the various LCD flat displays, there must be a suitable graphics
version in the system unit and an interface card in the display assembly.

Function and Integration Relay panel for external features USB
Relay panel for external features USB

The relay panel for external features USB is a low speed USB component and
enables the following functions in connection with the application software:
− Control of the system via max. four external pieces of signal equipment
(inputs 1 - 4)
− Control of up to four external pieces of equipment by the system
(relay 1 - 4)
− Connection of a remote status indicator (RSI)
Voltage is supplied via the USB cable.
Operation of a remote status indicator, however, requires an additional 24 V
connector.
For further information on the relay panel for external features USB, please
refer to the block diagrams in this chapter and in the relevant chapter on this
component in this manual.
Remote status indicator

In conjunction with a relay panel for external features RSI / alarm
01750047685, the device can be equipped with a remote status indicator.
This indicator can be installed physically separate from the device. It informs
the operator about the current status of the device.
You will find further information in the relevant chapter of this manual.

Printers Function and Integration
Printers
The following printers can be used in the device:
− Receipt printer NP07, TP07
− Journal printer NP06, TP06
For further information on the printers and different versions of printers that are
used, please refer to the block diagrams in this chapter and in the relevant
chapters on printers in this manual.
Card readers
The following card readers can be used:
− Card handling device CHD V2x
− Hybrid DIP reader
The following card deposit facilities can be installed in the device in

combination with the CHD V2x card reader:
Card reject tray (open card tray) 01750019995
Card reject module 01750029082
(with short transport path for 100 cards) 01750109600
Card reject box (lockable and removable) 01750037579
Card reject box (removable) 01750057198
For further information on the card readers, different versions of readers and
card reject modules, please refer to the block diagrams in this chapter and to
the relevant chapters on card readers in this manual.

Function and Integration Optical indicators
Optical indicators
The following plug-in optical indicators are integrated in the customer panel of
the ProCash 1500xe USB:
Part number Use
Optical indicator PC 2XXXxe 01750058806 Cash output
cpl. ID card slot
Receipt output
Control
The media entry indicators are controlled via the customer panel special
electronics 01750070596. Various statuses can be defined by the application:
– Permanently lit
– Blinking
Blinking frequency 0.5 Hz
Blinking frequency 1 Hz

Keyboard Function and Integration
Keyboard
The following keyboard can be used in the device:
− Keypad EPP V5
The optional softkeys are controlled via the customer panel special electronics.
The keypad EPP V5 is connected to the USB port of the central USB special
electronics.
Cash media dispenser

A separate service manual is available for the cash media dispenser (CMD)
(order number: 01750060162).

Function and Integration Uninterruptible power supply (UPS)
Uninterruptible power supply (UPS)
Smart-UPS 750
When the power supply is interrupted, the UPS starts supplying voltage to the
device.
Depending on the device configuration the connection may differ.
Connection to the central USB special electronics module
PC USB W
Central USB special electronics Operator panel
with integrated
external control unit
USB X I²C port 1
2 External
USB port (12x) control unit
3
X8 *1) Full Speed / Low Speed for configurations without
Power supply operator panel
X14
A J K L
Power
distributor
UPS D-SUB
USB
Power input
1* Pin 2 24 V standby for PC relay

Pin 4 Energy saving power distributor for supplying power to the
other components
For further details on the UPS, please refer to the chapter "Smart UPS-750".

Temperature control Function and Integration
Temperature control
Ventilation
Ventilation of the device is implemented by means of two fans switched in
parallel.
In addition, some pieces of equipment or modules are equipped with fans (e.g.
PC). However, these fans have no air channels which connect them directly to
the outside.
Heater (only semi-outdoor)

Type Part number Supply voltage / Power
Fan heater KH-4925 230 V 6369307317 230 V / 250 W
ProCash 1500xe Frontload USB Semi-Outdoor is equipped with a heater

which is mounted on the outside on the safe.
It consists of a fan heater with an integrated safety temperature monitor, the
electronic thermostat 0284502000 and the temperature sensor.
The fan heater is located on the outside and firmly mounted on the device.
An axial fan 01750085588 is mounted on the fan heater. This axial fan is
supplied with voltage via a 12 V power supply unit 01750081432.
The heating system is always ready for operation regardless of the

operating state since the supply voltage is provided through a Y
adapter on the power cable rather than being controlled via the power
distributor (see section "Block diagram").

Central Power Supply Unit III
01750069162
Views
Front view

Description Central Power Supply Unit III 01750069162
Rear view
Description
The central power supply unit III 01750069162 supplies all components that do
not have their own power supply with the required DC voltages.
The central power supply unit III is designed for the voltage range 115 V /
240 V and is automatically set to the mains voltage supplied. However, the
limiting values for detection of undervoltage at power input must be set to the
input voltage of 115 V or 230 V must be set with a slide switch.
The central power supply unit III has no main switch and changes
automatically to standby mode when line voltage is applied. In this operating
mode, standby voltages only (- 12 V, + 5.2 V and + 12 V) are supplied.

Central Power Supply Unit III 01750069162 Description
There are three open collector input signals (PON, PFC, PDON) and one
open collector output signal (PFN) to control the other outputs (switchable
voltages + 5.2 V, + 12 V and + 25 V) and the switchable voltage + 24 V at
connector D.
If all outputs are to be controlled automatically via the central power supply unit
III, the PON signal has to be set to low (0 V) with the NEN jumper
70702001416 at connector A.
All outputs are protected against short-circuits and overtemperature. The
central power supply unit III also has a temperature-based switch-off function if
overheating does occur.
The unit is cooled by an integrated fan.
Safety functions
Short-circuit
If a short-circuit occurs at the outputs, the central power supply unit III switches
off immediately. It switches on again automatically.
Overvoltage and overtemperature

In case of overvoltage or overtemperature, the central power supply unit III
switches off immediately and can only be switched on again by switching the
supply voltage off and on again (configuration-dependent: e.g. disconnect
power plug, press switch on power distributor).

Switch-on/switch-off behavior
If the central power supply unit III is not connected to a suitable controller (e.g.
special electronics module), all switchable voltages are supplied automatically,
and automatically switched off in the event of a power failure (see the
"Description" section).
The following signals are used to monitor the status of the input voltage and to
control the switchable outputs of the central power supply unit III.
Output signal
PFN: PFN = Power Fail Not (Not = Active Low)

The signal (formerly NAN) is set to Active Low by the central
power supply unit III when the supply voltage falls below 170 V
(switch position 230 V) or 75 V (switch position 115 V) for more
than 26 (± 4) ms.
Voltage level below the set value: PFN = Low
Input signals
PON: PON = Power On Not (Not = Active Low)

With this signal (formerly NEN), the outputs for the switchable
voltages+ 5.2 V, + 12 V, + 25 V and + 24 V are controlled via the
PDON signal.
On: PON = active low (signal level < 2.5 V)
PDON: Power Distributor Off Not (Not = Active Low)
Release of the switched voltages with the PON signal only has
an effect on all switched voltages, including + 24 V at connector
D, if PDON is in the Active High state.
Otherwise (PON Active Low) only the + 24 V voltage at connector
D switches on (PDON Active Low).
The signal can only be used in the configuration with the USB
special electronics module.
Switched voltage off: PDON = Active Low

Central Power Supply Unit III 01750069162 Description
PFC: Power Fail Control

This signal (formerly STNANT) defines how the switchable
voltages are controlled when a power failure is detected.
PFC = Contact Open

When the central power supply unit III detects a power failure the
switched voltages are switched off automatically.
Switching back on is defined by the PON, PDON and PFN signals.
PFC = Low
When the central power supply unit III detects a power failure only
PFN changes to the Active Low state. The control logic can switch
off the switchable voltages with the PON signal. Switching back on
is only defined by the two signals PON and PDON.

Relationships between signals and output

voltages
Power input PFN PFC PON PDON Effect on switched
condition (NAN) (STNANT) (NEN) voltages
Voltage in the high # low low Only + 24 V is
tolerance switched on at
range connector D.
Voltage in the high # low high Normal operations
tolerance All switchable voltages
range are switched on.
Voltage in the high # high # All switchable voltages
tolerance are switched off.
range
Supply low high # # All switchable voltages
voltage below are switched off.
level
Supply low low high / high / PON and PDON
voltage below low low control the switchable
level *1) *1) voltages.
# State without effect

*1) The connected control logic controls the state of these two signals.
Power failure
Standby voltages (- 12 V, + 5.2 V und + 12 V) are automatically supplied again
following a power failure. In contrast, the voltages switched for the power
outputs (5.2 + 12 V, + 25 V and + 24 V) are switched on in compliance with the
relations described above.

Central Power Supply Unit III 01750069162 Technical data
Technical data
Input voltages
Input voltage range: 100 - 240 V ± 10 %
Rated voltage: 115 / 240 V
Frequency: 47 - 63 Hz

Technical data Central Power Supply Unit III 01750069162
Output voltages
Output Voltage Tolerance Max. Comment
current
1 - 12 V ± 10 % 0.3 A Standby
2 + 5.2 V ± 3 % 0.5 A Standby
3 + 12 V ± 10 % 0.4 A Standby
4 + 5.2 V ± 3 % 4.0 A Controllable via PON
and PDON
5 + 25 V *1) *2) Controllable via PON
and PDON
6 + 12 V ± 10 % 3.5 A Controllable via PON
and PDON
7 + 24 V ± 10 % 0.1 A Controllable via PON
and PDON
*1) Max. voltage: + 26.4 V

Min. voltage: + 25 V with a load of 10 A
The inrush current through the connected components must not exceed
12 A for 5 ms.
*2) Connectors A and C:

The maximum continuous current at contact 2 (+ 25 V) is 6 A in each
case.
The current limit is 8 A.
Connectors B1, B2, B3:

The max. total constant load at connector B1, B2 and B3 is 10 A.
A current of 15 A is permitted for a duration of 10 s every 60 s.
A peak current of 23 A can be supplied for 300 ms with the same cycle
(60 s).
i The total load on the 25 V output must not exceed 10 A.

Miscellaneous
Protection class: I
Leakage current: < 1 mA at 264 V
Dimensions: 180 x 220 x 92 (width x length x height in mm)
Weight: 2480 g
Noise emission: 35 dB (1 m distance)
Climatic environmental condition:

Operation: + 5 °C to + 50 °C at 5 % to 95 % r.h.
Transport: - 25 °C to 70 °C at max. 95 % r.h.
Storage: + 5 °C to + 40 °C at 5 % to 85 % r.h.

Technical data Central Power Supply Unit III 01750069162
Pin assignment
1 Connector D 5 Connector B3
2 Connector B1 6 Power input
3 Connector B2 7 Connector C
4 Slide switch (voltage limit setting) 8 Connector A

Connector A
Connection to the special electronics module
AMP-UNIV-MATE-N-LOK 8F
Pin Assignment Remarks

1 0V
2 + 25 V (switched)
3 PON Input signal (NEN)
4 PFC Input signal (STNANT)
5 PFN Output signal (NAN)
6 + 12 V (standby)
7 + 5,2 V (standby)
8 - 12 V (standby)
Connectors B1, B2, B3

Connection of components

1 0V
2 + 25 V (switched)

Cleaning and maintenance Central Power Supply Unit III 01750069162
Connector C
Connection of the operator panel

1 0V
2 + 25 V (switched)
3 + 5.2 V (switched)
4 - 12 V (standby)
5 + 12 V (switched)
Connector D
Connection to the special electronics module
Molex-Mini-Fit, 3M

1 0V
2 + 24 V (switched)
3 PDON Power Distributor Off Not
Cleaning and maintenance

The central power supply unit III is maintenance-free.

Power Distributor 01750073167
Power is supplied via a rubber plug. Two of the three rubber plug sockets used
to supply the components with line voltage are switched over a relay.
The relays are controlled via the special electronics.
The power distributor has a two-pin on/off switch. The built-in board has a
sensitive fuse (8 A / slow, dimensions: 6.35 x 31.75 mm).
1 ON/OFF switch 4 Power output, switched

2 Power input 5 Power output, switched
3 Power output, not switched 6 Power distributor control

Power Distributor 01750073167
Schalter Switch Commutateur Steckerbelegung Netzverteiler

Netzeingang maximaler Gesamtstrom = 8 A
Power input
Entrée du réseau Connector assignment
1 Power distributor
Netzausgang, ungeschaltet whole current maximum = 8 A
Power output, non-switched
Sortie du réseau commutée
2 Attribution de signaux sur le connecteur
Netzausgang, geschaltet Connecteur de tension
Power output, switched ampérage maximum = 8 A
Sortie du réseau on
3
Monitor Monitor Moniteur
If the device has a CRT monitor, the monitor is usually connected to the
switched power output 3 (monitor).
Pin assignment (power distributor control)
Berg, 6-pin M
Pin Name
1 + 24 V
2 + 24 V (relay control power output 2)
3 GND
4 GND
5
6 + 24 V (relay control power output 3) monitor

Central USB Special Electronics
Module
Introduction
Central USB Special Electronics Module 01750070463
Central USB Special Electronics Module 01750099885
The central USB special electronics module represents, in addition to the built-
in PC, the central control and monitoring unit of the system and is connected to
the PC via the USB port.
The central USB special electronics module handles functions in the self-
service system which have not been assigned to any other typical components
for printing, scanning, cash management, customer identification and the like.

Introduction Central USB Special Electronics Module
An external control unit featuring controls and indicators and up to two

customer panel special electronic modules can be configured for the central
USB special electronics module.
The functions of the external control unit are also incorporated in the USB
operator panel. An additional external control unit is not allowed to be installed
in system configurations that are fitted with an operator panel.
The two assemblies customer panel special electronics module and external
control unit (also the version integrated in the operator panel) are operated via
the I²C bus. Power is supplied to these components via the I²C bus.
i The connectors of the I²C ports may only be attached and detached
when the device is disconnected from the power supply.
Separate descriptions are available in system-specific service manuals for the

operator panel, customer panel special electronics module and external control
unit.
Voltage supply via

- USB port
- RJ45 (external control unit)
Customer panel
special electronics
01750070596
(2 modules may be connected)
Customer panel
Central USB special electronics special electronics
01750070463 01750070596
I²C Port 1
24V DC (only necessary
2 for logo or customer
USB port (A to L) panel illumination
3
Full Speed / Low Speed
USB 01750073862
input for configurations without
operator panel
USB component Integrated

external control unit
e.g. relay panel for external
features Operator panel
01750076793

Central USB Special Electronics Module Functions of the special electronics
Functions of the special electronics

− Emergency mode
− Acoustic signal generation
− Control of the first and second customer panel special electronics modules
− Control of the external control unit
− Control of media entry indicators (MEIs)
− Switch-on/off logic for 24 V devices, power supply units, spare outputs
− Fan function inquiry
− Service functions to switch off 5 V, 12 V and 24 V loads
− Door switch inquiries
− Spare outputs 1 to 3, spare inputs 1 to 4
− SOP button / switch function
− IDCU reject tray
− LCD backlight inquiry, customer panel lighting
− Logo lighting
− Switching a CRT monitor on/off via the power distributor
− 1 Power output for door magnet locking
− PIN pad inquiry with encryption
− Firmware download

Function description Central USB Special Electronics Module
Function description
Switch-on characteristics
The central USB special electronics module is started when power is supplied
to the self-service system. All outputs are reset first, and the initialization
phase is started after a test phase.
After the initialization phase the self-service system is either switched on again
or remains off, depending on the switch-on status that was stored before the
last powerdown.
During the switch-on process the central power supply unit is turned on via the
PON signal (formerly NEN), and then the connected power distributor is turned
on with a delay of about 160 ms.
All other components remain off, and have to be switched on via a request.
This state is indicated by the green ON LED and the red STANDBY LED
lighting up on the external control unit.
The end of the initialization phase is indicated by an acoustic signal with a
rising pitch if the system is going to be switched on.
If the system is not going to be switched on (standby mode), the initialization
phase is terminated and the red STANDBY LED and the green ON LED go out
on the external control unit.
Pressing the ON/OFF button in standby mode

If the special electronics module is in standby mode, the system can be
switched on with the ON/OFF button on the external control unit or via a
separate external ON/OFF button.
When one of these buttons has been pressed, the green ON LED flashes in
confirmation and to indicate the restart phase which takes about 10 seconds.
The system is switched on at the end of the restart phase.

Central USB Special Electronics Module Function description
Switch-on logic
When the supply voltage has been turned on, the central USB special
electronics module switches the self-service device to the state that it was in
before it was powered down, i.e. standby or switched on.
In standby mode, nearly all individual components are switched off. Only
components that condition air (e.g. heaters) and do not normally receive power
from the power distributor are switched on.
The self-service device is switched on by pressing an ON/OFF button. In the
special electronics module, the PON (NEN) signal is switched low and the
Power Switched control signal is switched high.
Pressing the ON/OFF button in switched-on mode resets a flag whose status
is reported to the system unit (PC). The PC can then turn off the device via a
cold start request (PON switches to high).
The states are indicated via the red STANDBY LED and the green ON LED on
the external control unit or on the operator panel.
The control signal for power-switched voltages can be turned off for service
purposes with a request. The request is triggered via the SOP application.
The 24 V standby voltage to operate the power distributor, which in turn
operates the system control unit (PC), is retained, i.e. it is not necessary to
shut down the system to replace components. Pressing the ON/OFF button
again turns the switch voltages back on. Central power supply unit III or a
compatible power supply unit is required for this function. The special
electronics module can detect whether such a power supply is present by
issuing an inquiry.

Function description Central USB Special Electronics Module
Notes on individual functions
Fan monitoring
It is possible to monitor up to four fan heaters that generate a speed-
dependent squarewave signal. If the signal is not received, the firmware can
report this to the application software.
Outputting an acoustic signal and adjusting the volume

Single or double tones can be set at various pitches via the application
software.
The volume can be adjusted via the external control unit.
Controlling media entry indicators (MEIs)

Different flashing frequencies or constant light can be selected via the
application software.

Central USB Special Electronics Module Technical specifications
Technical specifications
Pin assignments
1 2 3 4 5
6 7 8 9 10
1 USB port A 6 USB port B

2 USB port C 7 USB port D
3 USB port E 8 USB port F
4 USB port G 9 USB port H
5 USB port I 10 USB port J

Technical specifications Central USB Special Electronics Module
10
11 12 13 14 15 16 17
1 X12 Power supply 10 X3 Door 1, 2,

2 X16 Input External SE on/off button, LCD,
3 X15 Door 4 loudspeaker, 24 V device 3 on/off
4 X14 UPS 11 X2 24 V device 1, 2 on/off
5 X8 Power distributor 12 X1 Switchable LCD backlight
6 X7 Optical indicator, door 3 13 Connector X13 (USB input)
7 X6 Fan input 14 Connector X17 USB port 11, 12 (K, L)
8 X5 Customer panel/logo 15 Connector X9 (I²C port 1)
lighting 16 Connector X10 (I²C port 2)
9 X4 SOP switch/SOP button 17 Connector X11 (I²C port 3)

Connector X1, switchable LCD backlight
Type of connector:
JST PH 3M
1
Pin Name Comment

1 Switching signal
2 GND
3 n.c.
Connector X2, switch-on/off logic for 24 V devices
Type of connector:
JST PH 7M
1
Pin Name Comment

1 n.c.
2 n.c.
3 24 V control output 1
4 GND
6 GND
7 n.c.

Connector X3, door switch, signal generator (loudspeaker), ext. ON/OFF

button, LCD backlight inquiry, switch-on/off logic for 24 V devices
JST PHD 16M
Pin Name Comment

1 5 V switched
2 5 V switched
3 Door 1 feedback
4 GND
5 Door 2 feedback
6 GND
7 External on/off button
8 GND
9 LCD backlight inquiry
10 GND
11 Signal generator + (*1)
12 Signal generator -
14 GND
15 24 V switched
16 24 V switched
(*1) Only one signal generator may be connected to the central USB special
electronics module and to the customer panel special electronics
module. Multiple signal generators can lead to destruction.

Connector X4, SOP switch/button, spare outputs and feedbacks
JST PHD 10M
Pin Name Comment

1 Spare output 1
2 GND
3 Spare output 2
4 GND
5 Spare output 3
6 GND
7 Spare feedback 1
8 GND
9 SOP button feedback
10 GND

Connector X5, customer panel/logo lighting, spare feedback,

switched 24 V outputs
JST PHD 18M
Pin Name Comment

1 24 V switched
2 24 V switched
3 24 V switched
4 Customer panel lighting
5 Logo lighting
6 Logo lighting
7 Spare feedback 3
8 GND
9 Spare feedback 4
10 GND
11 Spare feedback 5
12 GND
13 GND load
14 GND load
15 GND load
16 GND load
17 GND load
18 GND load

Connector X6, fan inputs, switched 24 V outputs
JST PHD 12M
Pin Name Comment

1 24 V switched
2 24 V switched
3 24 V switched
4 24 V switched
5 Fan monitoring 1
6 GND
7 Fan monitoring 2
8 GND
9 Fan monitoring 3
10 GND
11 Fan monitoring 4
12 GND

Connector X7, MEIs (2x), power output, spare feedback,

door feedback
JST PHD 14M
Pin Name Comment

1 Power source 9
2 GND
3 Power source 10
4 GND
5 Power output 1 Open collector with diode after 24 V
6 GND
7 24 V switched
8 GND
9 Spare feedback 2
10 GND
11 Door 3 feedback
12 GND
13 5 V switched
14 5 V switched

Connector X8, power distributor, CRT monitor
Type of connector:
JST PH 6M
1
Pin Name Comment

1 24 V switched
2 24 V standby for PC relay
3 GND
4 Eco power distributor
5 Logo power distributor
6 CRT monitor

Connector X12, power supply
Molex Mini-Fit Jr. 12M
Pin Name Comment

1 24 V standby
2 12 V standby
3 PDON (Power_Switched)
4 5 V standby
5 GND
6 PFN (NACheck) NAN from central power
supply unit
7 PON Output signal (NEN)
8 PFC Fixed low-level output signal
(STNANT)
9 24 V switched
10 GND
11 5 V switched
12 GND

Connector X9, X10, X11X, I²C bus + signal generator
Type of connector:
RJ45 8F
Pin Name Comment

1 5 V switched
2 5 V standby
3 GND
4 Signal generator + (1*)
6 Data
7 GND
8 Clock
(*1) Only one signal generator may be connected to the central USB special
electronics module and to the customer panel special electronics
module. Multiple signal generators can lead to destruction.

X13, USB input
1 2 Type of connector:
USB 4-pin
4 3
Pin Name Comment

1 5V
2 D-
3 D+
4 GND
Connector X17 - X22, USB
Type of connector:
USB 4-pin
Pin Name Comment

1 5V
2 D-
3 D+
4 GND

Connector X14, UPS
Type of connector:
JST PH 5M
1
Pin Name Comment

1 Emergency power mode Input
2 GND
3 Battery capacity Input
4 GND
5 n.c.
Connector X15, door switch (1x), spare feedback
Type of connector:
JST PH 4M
1
Pin Name Comment

1 Door 4 feedback
2 GND
3 Spare feedback 6
4 GND

Connector X16, IDCU reject tray
Type of connector:
JST PH 2M
1
Pin Name Comment

1 IDCU reject tray
2 GND
Dimensions and weight

Length: 290 mm
Width: 117 mm
Height: 27 mm
Weight: 0.700 kg

Introduction
Part number: 01750070596
This component is an extension for the central USB special electronics
(01750070463) and is used to connect the following assemblies:
− PIN pad
− Softkeys (left and right)
− ASKIM
− Up to 8 additional media entry indicators (MEIs)
− Customer panel illumination (BBA)
− Lighting for up to two logo panels
− Signal generator (e.g. loudspeaker)
− Additional door switch
− Up to three additional feedbacks
− LCD light control
It is controlled by the central USB special electronics via the I²C bus.
The operating voltage of +5 V is supplied via the central USB special
electronics. The voltage of +24 V needed to connect the customer panel and
logo lighting is supplied by the central power supply unit.
Up to two customer panel special electronic modules can be installed in a self-

service system. To address the second component it is necessary to insert a
jumper at connector X3 (used to connect the PIN pad). When a PIN pad is
connected, this jumper is located in the connecting cable. A separate jumper
has to be inserted for configurations without a PIN pad in the second unit.

Technical specifications Customer panel special electronics
Pin assignments
1 Connector X8, +24V 5 Connector X4,

2 Connector X7, I²C bus Lighting for customer panel and
3 Connector X6, logos
LCD backlight On/Off 6 Connector X9, ASKIM
4 Connector X5, 7 Connector X3, PIN pad
LCD lighting query 8 Connector X2, softkey right
Optical indicators, door switch, 9 Connector X2, softkey left
signal generator, reserve inputs

Customer panel special electronics Technical specifications
Connector X1, softkey left
Type of connector:
1 FCI(Berg) Dubox male connector 5M
Pin Name Comment

1 Matrix signal Y0
2 Matrix signal Y1
3 Matrix signal Y2
4 Matrix signal Y3
5 Matrix signal X3
Connector X2, softkey right
Type of connector:
1 FCI(Berg) Dubox male connector 5M
Pin Name Comment

1 Matrix signal Y0
2 Matrix signal Y1
3 Matrix signal Y2
4 Matrix signal Y3
5 Matrix signal X2

Connector X3, PIN pad
Print male connector 14M (Low
Profile)
14 2
Pin Name Comment

1 Matrix signal X1
2 Matrix signal X0
3 Matrix signal X3
4 Matrix signal X2
5 Matrix signal Y3
6 Matrix signal Y2
7 Matrix signal Y5
8 Matrix signal Y4
9 Matrix signal Y7
10 Matrix signal Y6
11 Matrix signal Y1
12 Matrix signal Y0
13 Coding for 1st or 2nd *1)
14 Customer panel special *1)
electronics
*1) A jumper at pins 13 and 14 indicates the second customer panel

special electronics. Otherwise the first customer panel special
electronics is coded.
Connecting pins 13/14 causes the customer panel special electronics

to have address 2. This enables a clear distinction between the
central special electronics USB and the customer panel special
electronics (13/14 open).

Connector X4, customer panel/logo lighting
JST PHD 16M
Pin Name Comment

1 24 V switched
2 24 V switched
3 24 V switched
4 Customer panel lighting (24 V ↔ GND)
5 Logo 1 switching signal (24 V ↔ GND)
6 Logo 2 switching signal (24 V ↔ GND)
7 Spare feedback 2
8 GND
9 Spare feedback 3
10 GND
11 GND load
12 GND load
13 GND load
14 GND load
15 GND load
16 GND load

Connector X5, MEIs, door switch, signal generator, spare feedbacks and
LCD illumination query
JST PHD 24M
Pin Name Comment

1 Power source 1
2 GND
3 Power source 2
4 GND
5 Power source 3
6 GND
7 Power source 4
8 GND
9 Power source 5
10 GND
11 Power source 6
12 GND
13 Power source 7
14 GND
15 Power source 8
16 GND
17 Spare feedback 1
18 GND
19 LCD lighting query
20 5 volts
21 Feedback for door 5
22 GND
23 Signal generator + *1)

*1) Only one signal generator may be connected to the central USB
special electronics and to the customer panel special electronics.
i Multiple signal generators can lead to destruction.
Connector X6, switchable LCD backlight
Type of connector:
JST PH 3M
1
Pin Name Comment

1 Switching
signal
2 GND
3 n. c.

Connector X7, I²C bus + signal generator
Type of connector:
RJ45 8F
Pin Name Comment

1 5 V switched
2 5 V standby
3 GND
4 Signal generator + *1)
6 I²C Data
7 GND
8 I²C Clock
*1) Only one signal generator may be connected to the central USB
special electronics and to the customer panel special electronics.
i Multiple signal generators can lead to destruction.

Connector X8, power cable
Type of connector:
Pin Name Comment

1 24 V switched
2 GND load
Connector X9, control of ASKIM module
Type of connector:
JST PH 4M
1
Pin Name Comment

1 ASKIM feedback
2 GND
3 ASKIM switching signal (24 V ↔ GND)
4 GND load


Length: 199 mm
Width: 53 mm
Height: 27 mm
Weight: 0.250 kg

External Control Unit
Introduction
Y
DB
AN
ST
FF
/O ON G
ON KIN
OR
SW TY
UP E MP
I TY
PAC
CA
T
I GH
DL
LC
P
SO
P
SO
This component contains the controls and indicators for the central USB
special electronics 01750070463).
It is connected to the central USB special electronics via an I²C port.
The operating voltage of +5 V is supplied via the central USB special
electronics' I²C port connector.

Description of keys and indicators External Control Unit
Description of keys and indicators
5
STAND BY
ON/OFF
1 6
ON
2 UPS WORKING 7
CAPACITY EMPTY
3 8
LCD LIGHT
4 SOP
SOP
9
10
1 ON / OFF key 5 STANDBY (red LED)

2 SPEAKER key 6 ON (green LED)
3 LCD LIGHT key 7 UPS WORKING (yellow LED)
4 SOP key 8 CAPACITY EMPTY (yellow LED)
9 LCD LIGHT (yellow LED)
10 SOP (yellow LED)

External Control Unit Description of keys and indicators
Function description
This description must be seen in conjunction with the function description of
the central USB special electronics.
SPEAKER key
This key is used to adjust the volume of the system loudspeaker in eight steps.
The volume is increased by one step whenever this key is pressed. When the
highest volume is reached, the next keystroke will return the volume to the
lowest level. The last setting is automatically saved.
ON / OFF key
If the central USB special electronics is in standby mode (red STANDBY LED
on, green ON LED off), pressing this key tells the system that you want to
switch it on. Switching on then takes place according to the application
software settings.
Pressing this key causes the green ON LED to flash in confirmation and to
indicate the restart phase which takes about ten seconds. At the end of the
restart phase, the system is switched on and the green ON LED shines
continuously.
Pressing this key in operating mode is interpreted as a request to switch to
standby mode, and the green LED flashes in confirmation. If this switchover
takes place according to the application software settings, the red STANDBY
LED shines continuously.
LCD LIGHT key

This key is used to switch the LCD backlight on and off. Enabling of this
function is indicated by the yellow LCD LIGHT LED, and the backlight is
switched on permanently and cannot be switched off by a software request.
SOP key
Pressing this key tells the system that you want to switch on the application
program's SOP mode.

Description of keys and indicators External Control Unit
The yellow SOP LED lights up briefly to confirm that this key has been
pressed. SOP mode itself is called according to the application program's
settings.
Indicators for UPS operation

The state of an uninterruptible power supply (UPS) is indicated by the following
yellow LEDs:
UPS WORKING The power supply has failed and the UPS is active.
CAPACITY EMPTY The UPS's storage capacity is no longer adequate.

External Control Unit Replacement during repairs
Replacement during repairs

Depending on the installation situation it may be necessary to turn the printed
circuit board with the keys and indicators in the housing prior to replacement.
Undo the screw (1) and detach the
cover.
Remove the nuts and washers (1) to

(4).
Turn the board to the required position

and put the assembly back together.
After connecting the cable, fasten it

with a cable tie at position (1).

Technical specifications External Control Unit
Pin assignment
I²C bus
Type of connector:
RJ45 8F
Pin Name Comment

1 5 V switched Not used
2 5 V standby
3 GND
4
5
6 I²C data
7 GND
8 I²C clock

Height: 88 mm
Width: 88 mm
Depth: 60 mm
Weight: 0.230 kg

Embedded compact PC P4 / C4
i Depending on the device configuration the PC can be equipped with
other or additional components (e.g. DVD-ROM drive) or with
components with larger memory (e.g. larger hard disk).
If a PC is replaced, these components must be transferred from the
old to the new PC. In case of a defect they must be ordered
individually.
Overview of PC variants
Description Part number
Embedded compact C4-2000 01750075723
Embedded compact C4-2000 01750106677
Embedded compact P4-2000 01750075724
Embedded compact P4-2000 01750106678

Overview of PC variants Embedded compact PC P4 / C4
Technical data
Pentium IV and Celeron
ATX motherboard
Chip set: Intel 845GV
Microprocessors: Intel Pentium 4 2.0 GHz
Intel Celeron 2.0 GHz
Front side bus: 400 / 533 MHz
Main memory: 256 MB, max. 2 GB; Non-ECC; 3,3 V
DIMM slot: 2x DDR DIMM socket (184-pin) DDR
SDRAM technology, unbuffered,
DDR200/266
Flash EPROM: BIOS update via diskette possible
Interfaces (rear side) 2 x USB
Interfaces (rear side) 2 x serial (9-pin)

1 x parallel (25-pin, EPP, ECP)
1 x keyboard (PS/2)
1 x mouse (PS/2)
4 x USB
1 x CRT
1 x DVI-D
1 x Game Port
1 x microphone
1 x Line in
1 x Line out / speaker out
1 x LAN
Interfaces (internal) 2 x IDE, primary & secondary

1 x floppy
1 x Wake-on-LAN
Floppy disk drive 3.5", 1.44 MB Slim-line

Embedded compact PC P4 / C4 Overview of PC variants
Hard disk drive

Hard disk capacity: min. 40 GB, 2.5"
80 GB, 2.5" *
Optical drive CD-ROM drive ATAPI

DVD-ROM drive ATAPI *
Slots 4 x PCI
Video: Integrated graphics

Required memory: Video memory shared 8 - 64 MB
Audio: On-board sound card,

4 W amplifier
LAN: On-Board 10/100 Mbit/sec Ethernet

(RJ 45)
Electrical ratings
Line voltage: 110 - 120V / 220 - 240V
Line frequency: 50 - 60 Hz
Max. power dissipation: 200 Watt
Dimensions
Dimensions (H x W x D): 130 x 385 x 260 mm
Compatibility (references) Microsoft operating systems

(DOS, WIN NT/2000/XP)
Linux
OS/2
* customer-specific

Front side Embedded compact PC P4 / C4
Front side
1 CD-ROM 5 LED power (green)

2 3.5" floppy disk drive 6 LED HDD (yellow)
3 Two USB ports 7 RESET button
4 ON/OFF button

Embedded compact PC P4 / C4 Rear side
Rear side
1Power output 12 Line (in)

2Power input 13 three PCI slots
3Mouse 14 Slot provided for
4LPT1 COM expansion card
5Voltage output + 12 V DC (COM 3 (MUX 1), COM 4
6LAN on board (Ethernet) (MUX 2))
7COM 2 15 Game port
8Port for COM 5 (MUX 3) 16 DVI-D port
and COM 6 (MUX 4) (optional) 17 Two USB ports
9 Two USB ports 18 CRT video
10 Line (out) 19 COM 1
11 Microphone 20 Keyboard

ATX motherboard Embedded compact PC P4 / C4
ATX motherboard
1 Fan 2 (system) 10 Fan 1 (CPU)

2 COM 2 11 Jumper switching
3 LCD monitor Standard CPU -> Mobile CPU
4 Two USB ports and LAN 12 Floppy
5 CRT monitor 13 IDE (secondary)
6 LPT1 14 IDE (primary)
7 COM 1 15 USB 2
8 Keyboard and mouse 16 Fan 1 (system)
9 CPU socket 17 USB 1

Embedded compact PC P4 / C4 ATX motherboard
Lithium battery
There is a lithium battery on the motherboard for preserving the date, time and
the CMOS. This battery needs to be changed about every three years.
Danger of explosion if replaced improperly.
It is therefore important to note the following points:

– Avoid short circuits.
– Never recharge the battery.
– Avoid temperatures above 100 °C.
– Do not try to open the battery by force.
– Do not allow the battery to come into contact with water or fire.
Replace the battery only with the same or an equivalent type

recommended by Wincor Nixdorf International GmbH (see chapter
"Appendix", section "Consumables" in the operating manual).
Dispose of used batteries in compliance with national regulations

(observe the manufacturer's specifications, if necessary).

Position of jumpers Embedded compact PC P4 / C4
Position of jumpers
1 JP 6 5 JP 1
2 JP 12 /13 6 JP 2
3 JP 5 7 JP 14
4 JP 20

Embedded compact PC P4 / C4 Position of jumpers
Jumper settings
FSB Auto Select (1-2)

Jumper 1
133 MHz (3-4)
Front side bus
100 MHz (4-5)
Jumper 2 Normal (1-2)
RTC reset
Reset (2-3)
5 V standby (1-2)
Jumper 5
Vcc (2-3)
Keyboard power
Enabled (1-2)
Jumper 6
Disabled (2-3)
On-Board AC97
Jumper 12 Enabled (1-2)

Jumper 13
Audio Amplifier Disabled (2-3)

(left and right channel)
bold = default

Position of jumpers Embedded compact PC P4 / C4
Jumper 14
Signal to AC97
Route PC speaker
Standard CPU (1-2)

Jumper 20
Mobile CPU (2-3)
bold = default

Embedded compact PC P4 / C4 Pin assignment
Pin assignment
Voltage output
Pin Name
1 GND
2 GND
3 + 12 V DC
4 + 12 V DC

Pin assignment Embedded compact PC P4 / C4
COM 1 / COM 2
DSUB 9M
Pin Name
1 DCD
2 RXD
3 TXD
4 DTR
5 GND
6 DSR
7 RTS
8 CTS
9 RI

LPT1
DSUB 25F
14
Pin I/O Standard Extended Enhanced

interface Capability Parallel Port
Port (ECP) (EPP)
1 I/O STROBE STROBE WRITE
2 I/O D0 D0 D0
3 I/O D1 D1 D1
4 I/O D2 D2 D2
5 I/O D3 D3 D3
6 I/O D4 D4 D4
7 I/O D5 D5 D5
8 I/O D6 D6 D6
9 I/O D7 D7 D7
10 I ACK ACK INTR
11 I BUSY BUSY, WAIT
PERIPHACK
12 I PE PE, PE
ACKREVERSE
13 I SLCT SLCT SLCT
14 O AUTOFD AUTOFD, DATASTB
HOSTACK
15 I FAULT FAULT, FAULT
PERIPHREQST
16 O INIT INIT, RESET
REVERSERQST
17 O SLCTIN SLCTIN ADDRSTB
18 GND GND GND
19 GND GND GND

Pin I/O Standard Extended Enhanced

interface Capability Parallel Port
Port (ECP) (EPP)
20 GND GND GND
21 GND GND GND
22 GND GND GND
23 GND GND GND
24 GND GND GND
25 GND GND GND
Keyboard / mouse
Mini DIN 6F
4 3
2 1
Pin Name
1 Data
2 NC
3 GND
4 + 5 V FS
5 Clock
6 NC

USB
Type of connector:
USB 4F
Pin Name
1 VCC + 5 V
2 - Data
3 + Data
4 GND

DVI
1 8 C1 C2 Type of connector:
DVI-D (24 + 1) F
9 C5
17 24 C3 C4
Pin Name Active Comment

1 T.M.D.S DATA 2- Yes
2 T.M.D.S DATA 2+ Yes
3 T.M.D.S DATA 2/4 SHIELD Yes
4 T.M.D.S DATA 4- No
5 T.M.D.S DATA 4+ No
6 DDC CLOCK Yes
7 DDC DATA Yes
8 ANALOG VERT. SYNC No
14 + 5 V POWER Yes
15 GND Yes
16 HOT PLUG DETECT Yes
22 T.M.D.S CLOCK SHIELD Yes
23 T.M.D.S CLOCK+ Yes

Pin Name Active Comment

24 T.M.D.S CLOCK- Yes
C1 ANALOG RED No
C2 ANALOG GREEN No
C3 ANALOG BLUE No
C4 ANALOG HORZ SYNC No
C5 ANALOG GROUND Yes = digital ground
VGA
DSUB 15/09F
15 11
Pin Name
1 RED
2 GREEN
3 BLUE
4 NC
5 GND
6 GND
7 GND
8 GND
9 + 5 V FS
10 GND
11 NC
12 MONID 1
13 HSYNC
14 VSYNC
15 MONID 2

Audio Line-In
Symbol:
Socket color: light blue
Pin Name
Tip Audio Left in
Ring Audio Right in
Sleeve GND
Audio Microphone
Symbol:
Socket color: pink
Pin Name
Tip Mono in
Ring Mic Bias voltage
Sleeve GND
Audio Line-out
Symbol:
Socket color: light green
Pin Name
Tip Audio Left out
Ring Audio Right out
Sleeve GND

Embedded compact PC P4 / C4 BIOS SETUP
BIOS SETUP
i For the system-specific deviations of the BIOS settings refer to the
hardware configuration which is included with every system on
diskette or CD-ROM.
Bios version: WN EP4-M VER2.10 (2K041117)
Standard CMOS features
Date (mm:dd:yy)
Time (hh:mm:ss)
> IDE Primary Master Auto

> IDE Primary Slave Auto
> IDE Secondary Master Auto
> IDE Secondary Slave Auto
Drive A 1.44M, 3.5 in.

Drive B None
Video EGA/VGA
Halt On All, but keyboard

BIOS SETUP Embedded compact PC P4 / C4
Advanced BIOS features
Virus Warning Disabled

CPU L1 & L2 Cache Enabled
P4-M CPU Speed HIGH
Quick Power On Self Test Enabled
First Boot Device Floppy
Second Boot Device CDROM
Third Boot Device HDD-0
Boot Other Device Enabled
Swap Floppy Drive Disabled
Boot Up Floppy Seek Disabled
Boot Up NumLock Status On
Gate A20 Option Fast
Typematic Rate Setting Disabled
Security Option Setup

APIC Mode Enabled
MPS Version Control for OS 1.4
OS Select For DRAM > 64 MB Non-OS2
Report No FDD For WIN 95 No
Full Screen LOGO Show Enabled
Small Logo (EPA) Show Enabled

Advanced Chipset features
DRAM Timing Selectable By SPD
Command Pre Clock Auto

Memory Frequency For Auto
System BIOS Cacheable Enabled
Video BIOS Cacheable Disabled
Memory Hole At 15M-16M Disabled
Delayed Transaction Disabled
Delay Prior to Thermal 16 Min
AGP Aperture Size (MB) 64
On Chip VGA Enabled

On-Chip Frame Buffer Size 8 MB

Integrated Peripherals
On-Chip Primary PCI IDE Enabled

IDE Primary Master PIO Auto
IDE Primary Slave PIO Auto
IDE Primary Master UDMA Auto
IDE Primary Slave UDMA Auto
On Chip Secondary PCI IDE Enabled
IDE Secondary Master PIO Auto
IDE Secondary Slave PIO Auto
IDE Secondary Master UDMA Auto
IDE Secondary Slave UDMA Auto
USB Controller Enabled
USB 2.0 Controller Enabled
USB Keyboard Support Enabled
AC97 Audio Auto
AC97 Modem Disabled
Init Display First Onboard
Onboard PCI LAN Disabled
AC97 Audio AMP Disabled
IDE HDD Block Mode Disabled
POWER ON Function BUTTON ONLY
Onboard FDC Controller Enabled

Onboard Serial Port 1 3F8/IRQ4
Onboard Serial Port 2 2F8/IRQ3
UART Mode Select Standard
Onboard Parallel Port 378/IRQ7
Parallel Port Mode ECP
PWRON After PWR-Fail On

Game Port Address 200
Midi Port Address Disabled

Power Management Setup
ACPI function Disabled

ACPI Suspend Type S1(POS)
Power Management User Define

Video Off Method Blank Screen
Video Off In Suspend No
Suspend Type Stop Grant
Modem use IRQ 3
Suspend Mode Disabled
HDD Power Down Disabled
Soft-Off by PWR-BTTN Instant-Off
Wake-Up by PCI card Enabled
Power On by Ring Disabled
Wake Up On LAN Enabled
Resume by Alarm Disabled
Primary IDE 0 Disabled

Primary IDE 1 Disabled
Secondary IDE 0 Disabled
Secondary IDE 1 Disabled
FDD, COM, LPT Port Disabled
PCI PIRQ(A-D)# Disabled

PNP/PCI configurations
Reset Configuration Data Disabled
Resources Controlled By Auto(ESCD)
PCI/VGA Palette Snoop Disabled
Frequency/Voltage Control
i The following settings are factory defaults and may not be changed.
Auto Detect PCI Clk Enabled

Spread Spectrum Enabled
Linear Spread Model 11
Linear Spread Base 11
Linear Spread Range 1
CPU clock 100 MHz

EICON C91
EICON C91 V.1 01750032855
EICON C91 V.2 01750095766
This card replaces the following X.25 cards by EICON:

− ISA PnP card C21
− ISA card S51
The cards are used for data transmission via the following connections:
− X.25
− 'X.25 via ISDN D channel' (X.31 interface)
PC cards
The order number 01750095766 includes drivers for Windows NT and
Windows XP.

View EICON C91
View
C91
LED
ISDN
1 LED
LED
V.24
14 1

EICON C91 Card accessories
Card accessories
− Terminator (1)
The terminator is not required for the standard ISDN access in Europe.
For more details see the enclosed supplier's Installation Guide.
− ISDN cable
− Driver software
Required hardware resources

The PCI card does not feature switches or jumpers. The setting of the
resources is made by the PC BIOS. An interrupt, two I/O segments (e.g. D800-
D87F and E000-E00F) and a shared memory area (e.g. FEDFBC00 -
FEDFBCFF) are required.

Manual installation EICON C91
Manual installation
i For error-free installation the configuration program ECCFG.EXE
assumes that the card to be configured is built in.
OSI Gateway for DOS
Copy gateway software from diskette to hard disk:
• Install gateway software at DOS level from the first floppy with a:\setup
<Return>.
Enter the boot drive when prompted (e. g. C:). Select target drive for
installation (e.g. C:).
Enter the directory to which the software is to be copied (e.g. C:\OSIGate).
Answer with no when the setup software asks you whether you wish to
install X.PAD (OSI).
The same applies to the 802.2 protocol (SNA).
i Ensure that the changes are written into a batch file, and, when exiting
from the setup program, enter them manually in AUTOEXEC.BAT
before running NCPSTART.EXE.

EICON C91 Manual installation
Configuration
• Select 'Communications Protocol Configuration'.
• F4 for Config.
• Enter the following parameters:

(if necessary, change entries using the space bar, move cursor with arrow
keys)
Interface type PCI

Number of Cards 1
Card Nr. 1
Card type EC C91
Frbs. Logical ports 0
Number of ports 1
Auto activate ports YES
Auto detect YES
ISDN NO
• Save the configuration with <F2 Save> and page to the gateway settings
using <F4 Config>.
• Ask your network administrator for the values required for the setting. If an
executable installation already exists, you can print out the configuration
and then make the entries.
• Save the setup by pressing <F2 Save> and quit by pressing <F10 Quit>.
• Then edit the AUTOEXEC.BAT file as described above (also see the
examples in the appendix).
If settings are to be changed later, you can call the configuration program
ECCFG.EXE again.

OS/2, OSI or SNA gateway
Copy OSI or SNA gateway software from diskette to hard disk and
configure:
• Call setup in the OS/2 window: [A:\] SETUP

OSI:’X.25 Connect VxRy Installation Utility’ screen is displayed or
SNA: ‘SNA Connect VxRy Installation Utility’ screen is displayed.
• Accept the Software License Agreement with <Continue>.

'Install'
• Select the CONFIG.SYS update.

• Confirm the product number xxx-xxx-xx; version xx.xx.xx; feature: xxxx with
<OK> and have it installed.
The ’Install-directories’ screen is displayed.
• Select the Eicon Card / PC (EC/PC), C21, S51 or C91 with the spacebar in
the ‘Select the components that you want to install’ field.
• Select the installation directory and confirm with <Install>.
The configuration program ECCFG.EXE is started automatically.
The ‘Gateway Configuration’ screen is displayed.
• Confirm the configuration file EC.CFG and the installation directory with
<F4 Config>.
‘Hardware Configuration’ screen is displayed.
It is recommended the following parameters be set for an X.25 connection:
Interface type PCI
Number of cards 1
Card no. 1
Card type EC C91
Frbs. Logical ports 0
Number of ports 1
Auto activate ports YES
Auto detect YES
ISDN NO

EICON C91 Manual installation
• Save the parameters with <F2 Save>.
• Page with <F4 Config> to the gateway settings. Ask your network
administrator for the required gateway settings.
• Save with <F2 Save> and exit the ECCFG.EXE configuration program with
<F10 Quit>.
With SNA Connect, the SNA configuration program ECSNACFG.EXE is also
called automatically: The ‘Node Configuration’ screen is displayed.
• Page with <F3 Add> to the protocol selection. Select the required protocol
with the function keys and then enter the parameters. Save with <F2 Save>
and exit from the screen with <F10 Cancel>, page back with <F10 Quit>
and confirm ‘Exit to System’ with <F1 Confirm>.
A message appears, which indicates that the software has been installed and
that CONFIG.SYS has been modified.
It is recommended that you reboot your PC.
i Is SNA Gateway installed for OS/2, the file C:\<Eicon-

Verzeichnis>\BIN\SNACONN.CMD has to be changed manually. An
example is given in the appendix.
During the reboot the message is displayed that the ECBIOS Eicon Card
Driver is being installed. ECCARD START is called. The program is linked at
the first start, the card is initialized, and the ports are activated.
If settings are to be changed later, the configuration program ECCFG.EXE or
ECSNACFG.EXE can be called again. The programs are in the BIN
subdirectory of the default directory (e. g. \EICON\BIN\ECCFG).

Windows NT 4.0: Connection for Windows NT

V4R2b
Administrator rights are necessary for the installation of an Eicon card. PnP
OS = NO should be selected in the PC's BIOS.
The Eicon card is installed by the network configuration of Windows NT.
• Selection by menu: Start - Settings — Control Panel - Network

• For an installation of X.25 or X.31, NT-Network support is not required.
• The card is installed by pressing the button <Add> under Network Card.
• Selection of the network card: Button <Diskette ...>
• Specify the directory for the EICON CD in the window ‘Insert floppy’: e.g.:
<CD-ROM drive>:\
• Select the card in the following window ’Select OEM option’:
EICON (S-Series, C-Series, Other).
The card can be installed automatically or manually. For the C91 card
automatic installation is recommended, since the PCI card configuration is
performed by the BIOS and cannot be changed by the operating system or the
driver.

EICON C91 Automatic installation
Automatic installation
When the card is installed automatically, an attempt is made to detect the card
in the system and to define the hardware resources.
• In the ’Installation’ screen, the standard parameters are adopted by clicking

<OK>:
Destination Directory: C:\EICON and Installation Group: EICON.

Automatic installation EICON C91
After this selection, Eicon Software prepares the installation and copies some
files to the hard drive.
The result of automatic detection is displayed in the ’Detection Results’ screen.

EICON C91 Automatic installation
• The screen is acknowledged with the <OK> button.

The ‘Configuration’ screen is displayed. How to proceed from here is described
in the section ‘Configuration of WAN-Services’.

Configuration of WAN Services EICON C91
Configuration of WAN Services

The 'WAN Services Install' screen is displayed. The Eicon card and the
protocols can be configured by acknowledging with <Yes>.
Specified sections can be selected inside the directory structure. The

dependent data is displayed on the right side and can also be changed there.
The parameters are saved by calling the function 'File-Save'.
i Ask your network administrator for the parameters for protocol

configuration.
The protocol configuration of the card can be saved by the function
‘File—Export’ and read again by the function ‘File-Import’. This way, a
once set configuration can be set on other systems. Hardware settings
of the card like I/O address, IRQ, etc., are not overwritten.
Configuration can be performed without using the mouse. You can
toggle between windows as well as the individual parameters by
pressing the <TAB> key. Tabs are selected by pressing <CTRL>-
<TAB>.
• After leaving the program by means of the function ’File — Exit’, the
program will be closed. If the parameters were not saved, there will be an
additional request.

EICON C91 Configuration of WAN Services
• Answer the following query as to whether ‘Eicon Wan Services’ are to be

installed with ‘No’.
• Installation and configuration are completed. The network installation

window can be closed by clicking the <Close > button.
• After installation the computer has to be restarted.
• Reinstall Service Pack 3 (or higher).

Checking the function of the installed card and software EICON C91
Checking the function of the installed card

and software
The faultless function of the card can be checked with the program ‘ECCARD
STATUS’.
EiconCard Management Utility
Copyright (C) Eicon Technology Corporation 1993-1999. All Rights Reserved.
EiconCard Configuration :
Card Type ID Status PCB IO Port IRQ Address
-------------------------------------------------------------------
1 C91 D LOADED 800339.1 E000 11 n/a
EiconCard Port mapping :

Card Port Port name Protocol
-------------------------------------
1 01 P1 X25
EiconCard Memory status :

Card Type Free Total
-------------------------------------
1 C91 259 K 512 K
Command completed successfully.
Status LOADED indicates, that the card could be started without errors.

EICON C91 Testing the card with ECTEST under DOS or OS/2
Testing the card with ECTEST under DOS

or OS/2
• Enter:
ecbios start /readport any
ectest /force /show
Output e.g.:
EiconCard Self-Test Utility
ECTEST 3.05 Rev. 05
Copyright (c) Eicon Technology Corporation 1999. All Rights Reserved.
-------------------------
Card #1: C91
CARD CONFIGURATION:
I/O Port Address : e800

Interrupt Request Level : 11
Memory size : 1024 K
Card Unique Id : 7b413722
CARD DIAGNOSTIC:
EC<->HOST INTERFACE
First 4K Memory test : Passed
CPU
Quick : Passed
MEMORY TEST
CPU->EC Memory test : Passed
Concurrent Memory Access test : Passed
HOST->EC Interrupt test : Passed
EC->HOST Interrupt test : Passed
ISDN S/T INTERFACE
ISDN S/T Interrupt test : Passed
CPU<=>SCC Loopback test : Passed
CPU<=>ISDN S/T Transceiver Loopback test : Passed
VHSI Port
Registers : Passed
Internal loop back : Passed
Interrupt(connector) : Passed
Drivers(connector) : Passed
EiconCard C91, Diagnostic: Passed
-------------------------
DIAGNOSTIC SUMMARY:
Card #1: Success.
-------------------------
i Under OS/2, the module ECBIOS.SYS is started in the CONFIG.SYS.

The output can differ for the various operating systems.

Technical data EICON C91
Technical data
PC Bus: PCI
Transmission rate: max. 64 Kbps
External interfaces: V.24 (RS-232-C) via 25-pin D-Sub
connector ISDN via RJ45 socket
Voltage requirement: +5V Current consumption 1.5 A
+ 12 V Current consumption 50 mA
- 12 V Current consumption 50 mA
Voltage tolerance ±5%
Ambient conditions Temperature 0 °C to 50 °C
(operation): rel. humidity 0 to 90 %
(non-condensing)
Dimensions: 15.8 cm x 9.6 cm

EICON C91 Pin assignment
Pin assignment
V.24 interface connector
Pin Signal Description Direction

Ground
1 PGND Protective Ground Common
2 TXD Transmit Data Output
3 RXD Receive Data Input
4 RTS Request to Send Output
5 CTS Clear to Send Input
6 DSR Data Set Ready Input
7 SGND Signal Ground Common
8 DCD Data Carrier Detect Input
9
10
11
12
13
14
15 TCLK Transmit Clock (DCE) Input
16
17 RCLK Receive Clock Input
18 Test Local Loopback Aviation Output
19
20 DTR Data Transmit Ready Output
21 RLB Remote Loopback Output
22 RI Ring Indicator Input
23
24 DTECLK Transmit Clock (DTE) Output
25 TI Test Indicator Input

Appendix EICON C91
Appendix
Example for OS
Under DOS, identical configurations can be used for the EC/PC, C21 and C91
cards. The two cards are only distinguished by the settings in the ECCFG file.
An example for automatic installation under DOS can be found on
http://seeus.pdb.sni.de/ftp-user3/hw/lan_wan/eicon/c91/c91_faq.htm.
Example: OSI Gateway (depending on the above

directory entry)
REM Eicon statement begin
C:
CD C:\OSIGATE
ECBIOS START /READPORT ANY
ECCARD START
REM Eicon statement end
…
Start of the CSC-M/OS operating systems
Examples for OS/2
Example 1: X.25 Connection for OS/2 (OSI Gateway)

CONFIG.SYS für C91
LIBPATH=C:\EICON\DLL;...
SET PATH=C:\EICON\BIN;...
SET DPATH=C:\EICON\BIN;C:\EICON\CONFIG;C:\EICON\DLL;...
...
REM ******* Eicon Technology Corporation statements Start *******
SET CONFIG=C:\EICON\BIN;
DEVICE=C:\EICON\BIN\ECBIOS.SYS
rem **** the following entry only applies to the C21 card*****
rem DEVICE=C:\EICON\BIN\ECBIOS.SYS PnP
REM ******* Eicon Technology Corporation statements End *******
i Only the C21 card may be/has to be started with the PnP parameter,
otherwise a manual entry is required to acknowledge a faulty
configuration.
STARTUP.CMD
@ECHO OFF
CALL C:\EICON\BIN\X25CONN
EXIT

EICON C91 Appendix
X25CONN.CMD
REM EICON statements begin
C:
CD C:\EICON\BIN
ECCARD START
REM Eicon statements end
Example 2: SNA connection for OS/2 (SNA Gateway)

CONFIG.SYS für C91
LIBPATH=C:\EICON\DLL;...
SET PATH=C:\EICON\BIN;...
SET DPATH=C:\EICON\BIN;C:\EICON\CONFIG;C:\EICON\DLL;...
REM ******* Eicon Technology Corporation statements Start *******
SET CONFIG=C:\EICON\BIN;
DEVICE=C:\EICON\BIN\ECBIOS.SYS
rem **** the following entry only applies to the C21 card*****
rem DEVICE=C:\EICON\BIN\ECBIOS.SYS PnP
REM ******* Eicon Technology Corporation statements End *******
i Only the C21 card may be/has to be started with the PnP parameter,
otherwise a manual entry is required to acknowledge a faulty
configuration.
STARTUP.CMD
@ECHO OFF
CALL C:\EICON\BIN\SNACONN
EXIT
SNACONN.CMD for C91

REM EICON statements begin
C:
CD C:\EICON\BIN
ECCARD START
ECSNA START /P 1 /N NODE1
REM Eicon statements end
i Replace the term 'node' with the generated terms in the SNACFG
(e.g.: ECSAN START /P 1 /N Primary).

Default settings of the individual cards EICON C91
Default settings of the individual cards

Card C91 C21 EC/PC 1MByte EC S51
Interface type PCI Plug and Industrial Industrial
Play Standard Standard
Architecture Architecture
(PC bus) (PC bus)
Number of cards 1 1 1 1
Card number 1 1 1 1
Card type EC C91 EC C21 EC EC S51
Frbs. Logical ports 0 0 0 0
Number of ports 1 1 1 1
Auto activate ports YES YES YES YES
Auto detect (1) YES NO (1)
IRQ level 05 05 05
I/O port addr. 360h 220h 220h
Unique ID 00000000
(2)
Mem. segment 0CC00 (DOS) 0CC00 (DOS)
addr. 0D0000 (OS/2) 0D0000 (OS/2)
(1) The C21 card only functions with all operating systems and PCs
i
when the required hardware resources are preset. Therefore the
Auto detect parameter must always be set to NO.
(2) The default parameter can be adopted. No entry is required.

Token Ring PCI Card
Token Ring PCI Card 01750038747
Token Ring PCI Card 01750107116
As fewer and fewer ISA slots will be available in future PC generations, the
PCI token ring card 'Smart 100/16/4 PCI Ringnode' replaces the present ISA
cards (part number: 9069501409 and 01750012715).
Delivery package:
− Smart 100/16/4 PCI ringnode card
− CD with LAN support software 7.0(0).

Hardware default settings Token Ring PCI Card
Current additional information to this card is published in the Intranet on the

following page:
− http://intranet.wincor-nixdorf.com/bd/HWSWSup/
− http://intranet.wincor-
nixdorf.com/bd/HWSWSup/hw/lan_wan/index.htm#Token-Ringcards
Hardware default settings

Parameter Setting Note
Ring speed Adapter will auto-
The Token ring card detects the ring
detect speed automatically.
I/O address e. g.: FC00 not adjustable, automatically assigned
by the PC bios
IRQ e. g.: 5 not adjustable, automatically assigned
by the PC bios
Smartrom Disabled Boot Prom is deactivated
LAA address Not using an LAA The MAC address of the adapters is not
address overwritten.
Promiscuous Promiscuous mode Mode, which enables reading data in
mode enabled the token ring. A corresponding
software is necessary.
The hardware parameters are set via the ASSIST program (see section "Test
programs").

Token Ring PCI Card General software information
General software information

The LAN support software 7.0(0) CD contains the drivers for DOS, OS/2 and
the Microsoft Windows environments. In addition, some tools which simplify
the installation and the support are available.
If installation or test diskettes are necessary, they can be produced via the
programs on the CD (see sections "Start LAN support software" and "Test
programs").
The software supports the following cards:
− 51-05 Smart 100/16/4 PCI ringnode
i The LAN support software 7.0(x) is not backwards compatible to the

older cards.
The software in directory <CD-ROM>:\ARCHIVE\MADGE\LSS611
supports the card:
- 52-03 Smart 16/4 AT Plus ringnode (part no.: 01750012715).
Older cards are not supported.

Start LAN support software Token Ring PCI Card
Start LAN support software

The Madge CD ROM menu is displayed after inserting the CD or by the
command <CD-ROM>:\ MDGCD.EXE:
The following functions can be started via the menu points:

− Read the license
Display of the Madge software license and guarantee agreements
− Read the release overview
Information about LAN support software 7.0(0)
− Read the documentation
User manual about LAN support software
− Explore the CD
Access to the software structure of the CD
− Upgrade driver
Use of the Madge tool QuickREV for the upgrade of the miniport driver for
Windows 95/98 workstation versions.

Token Ring PCI Card Start LAN support software
− Create diskette
Creation of Madge diskettes for:
Disk 1: Assist (bootable test diskette)
Disk 2: Windows 9x/NT (NDIS3/NetWware)
Disk 3: Windows 9x/NT (NDIS4)
Disk 4: Windows 2000 (NDIS5)
− Install utilities
Installation of the following Madge tools:
Miniport status tool
DMI agent (Desktop management interface agent)
Version Indicator for the Madge driver.
− Madge on the Web
Madge in the Internet
− EXIT
Exit the program

Software installation Token Ring PCI Card
Software installation
See the documentation of the various operating systems for the installation of
the different network drivers. You can find additional notes on the CD of the
LAN support software (see also the menu point 'Read the documentation' in
section "Start LAN support software").
Installation under WIN NT

The following example of a NT configuration guarantees that the connection
will be rebuild even when the line has been interrupted.
The parameter 'Quiet Mode: Enabled (reconnect)' is available starting with

LAN support software 7.0(0).

Token Ring PCI Card Installation under WIN NT
i The Windows NT driver, release v3.95.03 for the SMART 16/4 AT

PLUS is available on the Intranet page
http://pdbh9a9a.pdb.siemens.de/bd/hwswsup/hw/lan_wan/index.htm#
Token-Ringcards.

Installation under OS/2 Token Ring PCI Card
Installation under OS/2

See the documentation of the OS/2 operating system for the installation of the
network driver.
The NDIS 2 drivers are no longer part of the LAN support software 7.0(0).
They are on the same CD in directory:
<CD-ROM>:\ARCHIVE\MADGE\LSS611\OS2NDIS
The driver names under OS/2 have been changed:
− The network adapter to be installed in release 5.0(2) was:
Madge Fastmac PLUS OS/2 NDIS MAC driver for Smart 16/4 Ringnodes.
− The name in release 6.1(1) has been changed into:
Madge Token-Ring Adapter.
Furthermore some driver settings in the PROTOCOL.INI are no longer
permitted. The setting AutoOpen=YES is part of the basic setting of the driver
and may no longer be specified.
Installation under DOS

The driver SMARTLSP.EXE may no longer be used, as the new PCI token ring
card has no memory on the card. The LLC2 / NetBIOS protocol stack is
replaced by the Client32 software. It needs only 2 KByte conventional memory
and approx. 800 KByte XMS/EMS memory. For that, the driver HIMEM.SYS /
EMM386.EXE has to be installed.
i The Client32 software can not be used with the ISA cards. For that
reason, you can find an operational configuration which detects the
installed card automatically and loads the corresponding driver under
the following Intranet address.
http://intranet.wincor-
nixdorf.com/bd/HWSWSup/hw/lan_wan/index.htm#Token-Ringcards
The software is on the CD in directory \NWDOSWIN.

Token Ring PCI Card Installation under DOS
A protocol stack can be produced as follows:
• Start the batch file <CD-ROM>:\ASSIST.BAT.

The following menu is displayed:
• Press the button [Make Disk].


Installation under DOS Token Ring PCI Card
• Select the entry 'DOS Multi-protocol support using Client 32' from the
'Install Disks' list and confirm the selection with the button [Action]. A DOS
installation diskette is produced.
• Copy the contents of this diskette into a directory on the hard disk (e. g.
\Madge\Novell\CLIENT32).
The batch file STARTNET.BAT is in this directory. It can be adjusted as
follows:
STARTNET.BAT
@ECHO OFF
REM --- This file demonstrates how to load the Madge
LLC and NETB protocols.
REM --- This produces a low memory multi-protocol
solution for DOS/Win3.1
REM --- Install the Novell Client 32 handler and

support modules
CD \madge\novell\client32
SET NWLANGUAGE=ENGLISH
NIOS.EXE
LOAD LSLC32.NLM
LOAD CMSM.NLM
LOAD TOKENTSM.NLM
: CMDGODI
REM --- The following line loads the 32-bit ODI
network adapter driver.
REM --- Part of the file (CD-ROM):
\DOCS\ONLINE\DRIVERS\PARACMDG.HTM.
REM NODE=(n)
REM Use this parameter to specify a locally
administered node address
REM override for the adapter. This address will be
a 12-digit hexadecimal
REM number in the range 400000000000 to
7FFFFFFFFFFF. If you do not
REM specify an override (and this is the normal
case), the adapter's
REM unique burned-in address is used.
REM RINGSPEED=(4;16;100)
REM Override the current adapter setting for ring
speed (where possible).

Token Ring PCI Card Installation under DOS
REM In general, Madge recommends that you

configure the adapter's
REM ring speed using Assist.
LOAD CMDGODI.LAN FRAME=TOKEN-RING
REM Jump to CMDGODI if it was not possible to open
the token ring driver
REM (for example: if the date-cable is missing.
if error level 1 goto CMDGODI
REM --- The following line should be present if you

require IEEE
REM --- 802.2 (LLC) and/or NetBIOS protocol support.
LOAD MTOKRING
REM --- The following line should be present if you
require NetBIOS
REM --- protocol support.
LOAD MNETBIOS
REM --- Client applications that use LLC,NETB
interfaces can now be loaded.
REM --- End of STARTNET.BAT
• Start the protocol stack in the AUTOEXEC.BAT before NCPSTART or

CIPSTART.
CALL \Madge\\Novell\CLIENT32\STARTNET.BAT.
As the new protocol stack must be compatible to the SMARTLSP.EXE, the file
\Madge\Novell\Client32\Net.cfg must be produced as follows:
PROTOCOL MNETBIOS
PIGGYBACK_ACK_TIMEOUT 0
If further configuration parameter have to be changed, the enclosed file

NET.TXT can be renamed into NET.CFG. All available parameters are
explained in the file.
The necessary parameters can be activated as follows:

PROTOCOL <Protocol name> ; Protocol entry at the
start of a line
Parameter value ; Indent parameter with
space characters

Test programs Token Ring PCI Card
Test programs
The installed card can be configured or checked via the ASSIST program.
Proceed as follows:
• Start the ASSIST program by the command <CD-ROM>:\ASSIST.BAT.
i The program is on the first diskette of the diskette set and is

automatically started during the first booting.
• Select the network card as shown on the previous picture and confirm the
selection with the [Properties] or [Diagnostics] button.

Token Ring PCI Card Test programs
Button [Properties]
After the [Properties] button has been pressed, the current settings of the
network card are displayed:
If necessary, these can be changed as follows:
• Select the parameter to be changed and confirm the selection with the
[Change] button. The possible parameter values are displayed and can be
changed if necessary.

Test programs Token Ring PCI Card
Button [Diagnostics]
After the [Diagnostics] button has been pressed, the following menu is
displayed:
• Select the index card 'Standard Diagnostics' and start the standard test by
pressing the [Test] button.
i In addition, a connection test can be performed. This requires a

second system with the same software to be started.
• Select the index card 'Connection Diagnostics' and start the connection test
by pressing the [Test] button.

Ethernet Adapter Intel PRO/1000 GT
01750107095
Introduction
The Intel PRO/1000 GT PCI Ethernet adapter allows PCs to be connected to a
Gigabit Ethernet network. It has an RJ-45 connector.
The Ethernet adapter is compatible with Fast Ethernet and Ethernet. This
makes it easy to migrate 10/100 Mbit/s Ethernet networks to Gigabit Ethernet
networks. The existing 4-pair cabling can continue to be used in the event of
migration. The Ethernet adapter automatically detects the transmission rate
and uses the fastest data rate.
It dynamically tests and reports network problems (interrupts, error rate, cable
length) and automatically compensates for cable issues such as crossover
cable and incorrect pin assignment or polarity. In addition, the Ethernet
adapter assigns addresses and IRQs in accordance with the plug & play
specification.
The drivers for this adapter are on the firmware / driver / utilities CD from
Wincor Nixdorf which is shipped with the card or they are available in the
extranet/internet.

Introduction Ethernet Adapter Intel PRO/1000 GT 01750107095
1 Activity LED (ACT) 3 Link LED (LNK)

2 RJ45 connector
The Intel PRO/1000 GT PCI Ethernet adapter connects your PCI-compatible

PC to a 10 Mbit/s, 100 Mbit/s or 1000 Mbit/s Ethernet network and supports a
variety of desktop and network management functions.
Supported desktop and network management functions:
− Offline diagnostics
− Intel Boot Agent
− ACPI Power Management
− Wake on LAN
− Desktop Management Interface (DMI) 2.0

Ethernet Adapter Intel PRO/1000 GT 01750107095 Card settings
Meaning of LEDs
The Ethernet card has two light emitting diodes (LEDs) to indicate the state of
operation. The LEDs have the following meaning:
i The LNK LED can be yellow or green.

The color shown depends on the link that has been established (see
following table).
LED State Meaning

LNK (link) Off The 10BASE-T link is active.
Constant The 100BASE-T link is active.
green
Constant The 1000BASE-T link is active.
yellow
ACT (activity) Flashing Network traffic
Constant Heavy network traffic
Off No network traffic
Card settings
It is not necessary to define settings for the Ethernet adapter because it
assigns addresses and IRQs in accordance with the plug & play specification.
Installation
• Install the necessary driver for the adapter from the driver/utilities CD or
from the Wincor Nixdorf extranet/internet.

Problems Ethernet Adapter Intel PRO/1000 GT 01750107095
Problems
If problems occur, please perform the following:
• Check whether the Ethernet adapter is evenly and completely inserted in

the PCI slot.
• Check whether the Ethernet card is recognized by the operating system

and / or whether errors occurred while the drivers were loading.
You may need to install the card in a different PCI slot.
Windows XP stores a detailed log of all device installations in the file
SystemRoot\setupapi.log.
• Check whether the Ethernet adapter and the connected component are
correctly connected.
Check that the connectors are correctly inserted.
• Check the Windows 2000 / XP event log if problems occurred while loading
the drivers under the operating system.
You can view defective drivers in the System Information program under
Components//Problem Devices.
• Check the software tutorial and readme file on the CD if any problems
occur with the software.
Technical data
Parameter Features
Manufacturer Intel
Type PRO/1000 GT Desktop adapter
Transmission rate 10 / 100 / 1000 Mbps
Operating voltage 5 V DC
Current consumption 800 mA
Temperature range 0 to 55 °C in operation

Ethernet Adapter Intel PRO/1000 GT 01750107095 Pin assignment
Pin assignment
RJ45 8F
Pin Signal name

1 TX +
2 TX -
3 RX +
4 -
5 -
6 RX -
7 -
8 -

Pin assignment Ethernet Adapter Intel PRO/1000 GT 01750107095

Anti-Skimming Module
Anti-Skimming-Module 01750080047
Anti-Skimming-Module 01750108535
ASKIM is the name used for our anti-skimming module - an electronic solution
for the problem of skimmers attached to automated teller machines.
A skimmer is an illegal device that is externally attached in front of a device's
card reader slot in order to copy the customer data that is stored on the
magnetic stripe. A skimmer consists of a housing, a magnetic card read head
and a board that skims (copies) the card data, and stores it or sends it over a
wireless connection. In addition, the PIN is captured with other technical
facilities. The skimmed data is duplicated on blank cards which are then used
to withdraw cash at ATMs. Skimmers are now so advanced that users of ATMs
can hardly recognize them.

Components Anti-Skimming Module
Components
Our ASKIM consists of the anti-skimming base unit, the ASKIM sensor and the
ASKIM button (see the section "Function elements").
Component Order number
Anti-skimming base unit
Sensors:
ProCash 1500 01750079304
ProCash 2xxx 01750078467
ProCash 3100 01750079728

Anti-Skimming Module Components
Sensor (installed in the customer panel IDCU)

Components Anti-Skimming Module
Sensors installed

Anti-Skimming Module Principle of functioning
Principle of functioning
The sensor is mounted at the rear of the ATM's customer panel in the direct
vicinity of the magnetic card input slot.
The ASKIM board checks the environment of the card input slot for untypical
changes caused by certain objects that are generally part of a skimmer. An
alarm is triggered via the alarm output if such a change exceeds the alarm
threshold for 3 minutes without interruption. The alarm delay is necessary to
prevent an alarm from being triggered by changes that occur during normal
use of the ATM.
ASKIM module up to revision level 3

The alarm is stored, and can only be reset by pressing the ASKIM button.
(however this only applies to the LED / alarm next to the ASKIM button and not
to the LEDs on the board).
ASKIM module up to revision level 4

With the upgrade to revision level 4 the alarm output function can be set to
either 'saving alarm' or 'not saving alarm'.
If the ASKIM module is set to 'saving alarm' the alarm can only be reset by
pressing the ASKIM button. (however this only applies to the LED / alarm next
to the ASKIM button and not to the LEDs on the board).

Principle of functioning Anti-Skimming Module
Connection to SE III (internal inputs/outputs I)
ASKIM
Special electronics
sensor
4x
Internal in-/
outputs I
III
base unit
ASKIM
Signal cable ASKIM
ASKIM button/
status LED
distributor
power
12 V
The alarm output is connected to a spare input 2 on the special electronics

module III.
Depending on the type of application, it can put the ATM out of service, trigger
a silent alarm, switch on a camera or send a message via ProView.
For security reasons, the ASKIM board is monitored via an output (door switch
3) on the special electronics module III. This function detects if the ASKIM
board is defective or not ready, or if the cable connection to the special
electronics module is not in order.
Suppression of the alarm (see also section "Functions - Suppression of alarm
evaluation") is also controlled via this output.
When the ASKIM board, or the entire device, is switched on, calibration takes
place automatically.

Anti-Skimming Module Principle of functioning
Connection to the customer panel special

electronics (connector X9)
ASKIM
special electronics
sensor
electronics USB
Customer panel
Central special
4x
Connector
I2C port
Conn. X7
X9
ASKIM
base
unit
Signal cable
ASKIM
ASKIM button/
status LED
distributor
power
12 V
The ASKIM base unit is connected to connector X9 of the customer panel
special electronics via connector 4.
In case of an alarm, the alarm output (pin 1 of connector 4) sends a signal to
the input of connector X5 (pin 1 - ASKIM response).
The response of customer panel special electronics (connector X5, pin 3 -
ASKIM switch signal) is sent to connector 4 of the ASKIM base unit (pin 3 -
alarm enable).
Depending on the type of application, it can put the ATM out of service, trigger
a silent alarm, switch on a camera or send a message via ProView.
For security reasons, the ASKIM board is monitored via an output (pin 21 of X5
connector, response door 5) on the special electronics module. This function
detects if the ASKIM board is defective or not ready, or if the cable connection
to the special electronics module is not in order.
place automatically.

Functions Anti-Skimming Module
Functions
Suppression of alarm evaluation

The ASKIM will only work properly when the device is closed. Alarm evaluation
is therefore suppressed while a door is open. However, an alarm that has been
set will remain.
Resetting the alarm delay

The alarm delay can be reset from 3 minutes to zero for test purposes (see
section "Function testing").
Switch-on/switch-off characteristics (auto-

calibration)
place automatically in order to obtain precisely defined start parameters.
During this process it is essential to make sure that there are no foreign
objects in the vicinity of the magnetic card input slot.
Auto-calibration during operation

The module calibrates itself automatically during operation. However, these
parameters are cleared when the ASKIM board or the entire device is switched
on again.
Manual calibration
If automatic calibration cannot take place in special circumstances, this is
indicated by a steady red status LED next to the ASKIM button. In this case it
is necessary to press the ASKIM button to obtain newly defined start
parameters (see the section "Calibration").

Anti-Skimming Module Functions
Saving alarm / not saving alarm

The alarm output function can be set to 'saving alarm' or to 'not saving alarm'
in an ASKIM module with revision level 4 and higher.
With the 'saving alarm' function an alarm is saved on the ASKIM module which
can only be reset with the ASKIM button (see section "Resetting an alarm").
With the 'not saving alarm' function an alarm is not saved on the ASKIM
module. The alarm output stays set only as long as a skimming module is
attached. If the skimming module is removed, the alarm output is reset
immediately without calibration.
For information on the display of the current setting and on changing the
setting please refer to the section "Saving alarm / not saving alarm".
Resetting an alarm
An alarm that has been set is indicated by a blinking status LED next to the
ASKIM button. The alarm can only be reset via the ASKIM button.
The device has to be open in order to press the ASKIM button, and it has to be
closed immediately when this has been done since calibration takes place
after 30 seconds.
If the device is not closed within 30 seconds, the system will calibrate itself for
the environment that exists at that moment. If the device is then closed without
recalibration, a false alarm can be triggered immediately or later.
Before calibration it is essential to make sure that no skimmer or other object is
in the vicinity of the magnetic card input slot.
After calibration the status LED should be checked again to see that it is in its
normal state (LED off).
Calibration after device commissioning

Calibration is required whenever a device is commissioned in the same way as
described above (heeding the same points explained as in the section
"Resetting an alarm").

Function elements Anti-Skimming Module
Function elements
1 Status LED (red) 2 ASKIM button (calibration button)
Status messages
The current state or any malfunction of the anti-skimming module is indicated
by the status LED.
LED Meaning Remedy
Off No alarm has been No action needs to be taken
triggered
Red (blinking) An alarm has been Reset the alarm after checking
triggered the card input slot in the
customer panel
Steady red Calibration is necessary Perform calibration after
checking that there is definitely
no skimmer or other object in
the vicinity of the magnetic card
input slot.
Red Calibration started No action needs to be taken
after button is
pressed

Anti-Skimming Module LEDs on the board
LEDs on the board

There are several LEDs on the board. They are used to check the functioning
of the ASKIM.
Pos. LED State Description Remedy

(illuminated)
1,2,3 D11, Voltage Internal power supply -
D12, present
D13
green
4 D2 Ready 10 seconds after the Check whether
green power supply has been power supply has
switched on the board been switched on.
goes into measurement
mode and the 'Ready'
signal is set.

LEDs on the board Anti-Skimming Module
Pos. LED State Description Remedy

(illuminated)
5 D3 Alarm This is set when a Find out what
red threshold has been triggered the
exceeded longer than alarm.
the specified alarm It may be
delay time. The LED necessary to
goes out when the level perform
falls below the calibration by
threshold. pressing the
In contrast to the LED ASKIM button
next to the ASKIM (see the section
button this alarm is not "Manual
stored, i.e. switching. calibration").
6 D4 Dynamic This is set as soon as a Find out why the
orange alarm threshold has been threshold was
exceeded. The LED exceeded. Any
goes out when the level skimmer or other
falls below the object in the
threshold. An alarm is vicinity of the
triggered if a threshold IDCU's slot?
has been exceeded for
more than 3 minutes.
7 D5 Reserved
green

Anti-Skimming Module Resetting an alarm
Resetting an alarm
• Open the device (see the Operating Manual for the device).
Use an object such as a ballpoint pen
to press the ASKIM button for approx.
2 seconds.
When you release the button the
status LED will be lit until the
calibration is completed.
• Close the device within the next 30 seconds (see the Operating Manual for
the device). Then leave the device closed for at least 45 seconds.
• As soon as the alarm is reset, the status LED goes off.
Saving alarm / not saving alarm

i The function to set the alarm output 'saving alarm' or 'not saving
alarm' is only available on an ASKIM module with at least revision
level 4.
At the time of shipping the anti-skimming module is set to 'saving

alarm'.

Saving alarm / not saving alarm Anti-Skimming Module
Display of current setting

The selected setting 'saving alarm' or 'not saving alarm' can be queried with
the ASKIM button and is displayed via the status LED.
• Switch the power supply of the ASKIM module off.

to press the ASKIM button.
Keep the ASKIM button pressed.
• Switch the power supply of the ASKIM module on again.
• Keep the ASKIM button pressed approximately another 10 seconds after

the power supply is switched on until the status LED lights up.
• Release the ASKIM button and observe the status LED.

Display of status LED Current setting
LED is on for 3 seconds 'Saving alarm'
LED blinks 3 times 'Not saving alarm'
Switching the setting
• Switch the power supply of the ASKIM module off.

Anti-Skimming Module Saving alarm / not saving alarm

to press the ASKIM button.
Keep the ASKIM button pressed.
• Switch the power supply of the ASKIM module on again.
• Keep the ASKIM button pressed approximately another 10 seconds after

the power supply is switched on.
i The status LED is now on for approximately 3 seconds or it blinks 3

times.
• Keep the ASKIM button pressed for at least another second.
• Now release the ASKIM button.

The current setting is now indicated via the status LED.
Display of status LED Current setting
LED is on for 3 seconds 'Saving alarm'
LED blinks 3 times 'Not saving alarm'

Calibration Anti-Skimming Module
Calibration
to press the ASKIM button for approx.
2 seconds.
• Close the device within the next 30 seconds (see the Operating Manual for
the device). Then leave the device closed for at least 45 seconds.
The device performs calibration.
• After calibration check that the status LED is in its normal state (= off).

Anti-Skimming Module Connections
Connections
1 ASKIM sensor
2 Connector 3, power supply connection
(ASKIM/Touch power cable)
3 Connector 8, Alarm output / enable
(ASKIM signal cable)
4 Connector 2, ASKIM button / status LED
(ASKIM signal cable)
5 Connector 1, USB port
(for service purposes only)

Pin assignment Anti-Skimming Module
Pin assignment
Connector 1, USB port
USB 4-pin, F
4 3
Pin Assignment
1 +5V
2 D-
3 D+
4 GND
Connector 2, ASKIM button / status LED

Type of connector:
JST PH 5-pin, M
1
Pin Assignment
1 + 3.3 V
2 not relevant
3 Status LED
4 ASKIM button
5 GND

Anti-Skimming Module Pin assignment
Connector 3, power supply connection

Type of connector:
JST PH 3-pin, M
1
Pin Assignment
1 + 12 V (switched)
2 n.c.
3 GND
Connector 4, alarm output / enable

Type of connector:
JST PH 4-pin, M
1
Pin Assignment
1 Alarm output (Open Collector)
2 GND alarm output (must be connected with GND)
3 Alarm-Enable
4 GND

Function testing Anti-Skimming Module
Function testing
i Bridging of the door contacts leads to incorrect functioning of the anti-
skimming module.
The functioning of the anti-skimming unit can be checked with the help of the
LEDs on the anti-skimming base unit and the test tool KDIAG for special
electronics modules.
Test programs
The KDIAG for special electronics modules is used for testing. The following
KDIAG version statuses (minimum status or higher) are preconditions for the
test:
Special electronics module III
− KDSE1304 for DOS

− SEL1304D for WIN32 German
− SEL1304E for WIN32 English
Special electronics module USB
− CSE1303D for WIN32 German

− CSE1303E for WIN32 English

Anti-Skimming Module Function testing
Test procedure
To reduce the testing time the anti-skimming module can be placed in test
mode. The time prior to the 'alarm' is reset from 3 minutes to 0.
• Switch on the power supply of the device when the ASKIM button is
pressed.
• Request the signal 'alarm' in the KDIAG for special electronics modules via
the 'anti-skimming' checkpoint.
The test sequence is menu-driven.
• At first hold a metal object (e.g. a screw M4x6 or similar) in front of the right
and then in front of the left side of the IDCU slot. The orange LED 'dynamic
alarm' and subsequently the red LED 'alarm' have to illuminate at the base
unit anti-skimming. When not in test mode, the red LED 'alarm' illuminates
after 3 minutes, presuming that the test object remains in front of the card
reader slot for more than 3 minutes.
Switch off the test mode after a successful test by rebooting the system.

Function testing Anti-Skimming Module

Card Reader CHD V2x
Card reader Part number
Standard with V.24 connection 01750049626
Standard with V.24 connection 01750105986
ACT version with V.24 connection 01750076277
ACT version with V.24 connection 01750105987
Standard with USB connection 01750076411
Standard with USB connection 01750105988
ACT version with USB connection 01750078148
ACT version with USB connection 01750105989

Device views Card Reader CHD V2x
The card reader can process magnetic cards as well as chip cards. The
firmware can be loaded, if necessary, via the serial interface or via the USB
interface. The card reader also features a I/O port which can be used, for
example, to control LEDs (stand-alone version) or to connect an external
pushbutton.
By pressing the pushbutton, which can be connected externally, cards that
have been left inside the device can be removed.
The card reader comes ready for use of a Security Access Module (SAM). The
device has an internal card socket that holds the SAM ID-000 format chip card.
The SAM module can be used to implement encryption and decryption
standards by means of a crypto processor.
The selection of the ID-000 chip card is customer-specific and depends on the
possibilities of the application software used.
The ACT version also has a feature that arrests an ID card if the system
software detects a certain type of manipulation. The ID card arrest is triggered
by the software. The card can only be released again manually.
After removal of the arrested ID card, the system can only be operated with
card reader CHD V2x, but the card arrest function is no longer guaranteed.
Card reader CHD V2x must therefore be replaced after ID card arrest.
The device can handle the following cards:

Magnetic cards: ISO 7810 and ISO 7811-1 to 5 (R / W)
ISO 7811-6 HiCo (R)
Chip cards: ISO 7816-1 to 3 (protocols T = 0, T = 1)

EMV 96 (3.1.1) / EMV 2000 (4.x)
ZKA
French cards
(Cartes Bancaires): GIE-CB, B0’, B1’
Card transport: 20 cm/s ± 10% for MM operations

30 cm/s other movements

Card Reader CHD V2x Device views
Device views
Overall view
Standard
1 Retaining bracket for MM sensor

2 Wheel for transporting card manually
3 Socket for SAM module
4 Card insertion slot

ACT version
1 Retaining bracket for MM sensor

2 Wheel for transporting card manually
3 Socket for SAM module
4 Lever to release an arrested ID card
5 Card insertion slot

Front view
1 Shutter
2 Lever for moving the shutter manually

Rear view
V.24 version
1 I/O port
2 V.24 data interface
3 Power supply

USB version
1 USB data interface

2 I/O port
3 Power supply

Device version used Card Reader CHD V2x
Device version used

WN part number Manufacturer’s Tracks Chip Comment
name card
01750049626 V2XF-11JL-W01 T1 R/W Yes Standard version
01750105986 T2 R/W V.24 connection
T3 R/W
01750076277 V2XF-11JI-W31 T1 R/W Yes ACT version
01750105987 T2 R/W V.24 connection
T3 R/W
01750076411 V2XU-11JL-W51 T1 R/W Yes Standard version
01750105988 T2 R/W USB connection
T3 R/W
01750078148 V2XU-11JI-W81 T1 R/W Yes ACT version with
01750105989 T2 R/W USB connection
T3 R/W
The firmware modules are to be found on the CD 'Firmware/Driver/Utilities'

(part number 01750038200) which is shipped with all devices. The current
versions are also provided in the intranet / extranet
Download behavior depends on the parameter settings of the firmware loader
in the various operating systems.
Name of corresponding firmware files:
V2X_B00.bin Basic module magnetic card
V2X_C00.bin Basic module chip card
for standard applications
V2X_C05.bin Chip card module EMV
V2X_C06.bin Chip card module ZKA
V2X_C08.bin Moneo cards France
for optional
V2X_S00.bin Basic module SAM
SAM applications

Card Reader CHD V2x Device version used
All versions are prepared for the inclusion of MM-/CIM86 sensors. The sensors
are screwed on. Due to a symmetric arrangement of the card insertion slot the
card reader can be installed in standard position or turned around by 180°. As
in former devices, functions such as detection of the card width, magnetic track
detection and shutter in the card transport route are also available.
To ensure that in case of a power failure the current function is terminated
properly, a capacitor can be built in the system as an option. The reaction to
power failures, however, can also be determined by the application.
The card reader has an internal memory for statistical data. This data can be
saved to a log file with KDIAG. The name of the log file is freely selectable.
Any errors that have occurred are also saved. The errors can be read out with
KDIAG.

Position of components Card Reader CHD V2x
Position of components
SW1 SW3 S1 MM SW4 S3 S4
SH SL3 S2 SL2
SW2 SL1 M1 Head
Abbreviation Meaning
S1 - S4 Sensors for card position
SW1 Sensor for pre-recognition of magnetic track
SW2 Sensor for card width
SW3 Sensor to detect position of shutter blade
SW4 Sensor to detect IC contact completely down
SH Shutter
SL1 Solenoid which opens the shutter blade
SL2 Solenoid which pulls IC contact down
SL3 Magnet to trigger card arrest
(ACT version only)
M1 Motor
MM MM / CIM sensor
Head Magnetic head

Card Reader CHD V2x Pin assignment
Pin assignment
I/O Port
Version I (up to rev. 1B)
Molex 53780, 14-pin
Pin Assignment Function

1 GND
2 Port 0 Output
3 Port 1 Output
4 Port 2 Output
5 Port 3 Output
6 Port 4 Output
7 Port 5 Output
8 Port 6 Output
9 Port 7 Output
10 Port 0 Input
11 Port 1 Input
12 Port 2 Input
13 Port 3 Input
14 +5V

Pin assignment Card Reader CHD V2x
Version II (as of rev. 1C)
JST PHD 14-pin, F
Pin Assignment Function

1 GND
2 Port 0 Output
3 Port 1 Output
4 Port 2 Output
5 Port 3 Output
6 Port 4 Output
7 Port 5 Output
8 Port 6 Output
9 Port 7 Output
10 Port 0 Input
11 Port 1 Input
12 Port 2 Input
13 Port 3 Input
14 +5V

Card Reader CHD V2x Pin assignment
V.24
D-SUB 9F, DELC-J9SAF-20L9 (JAE
Japan) or equivalent
Pin Assignment IN/OUT Function

1 NC - Free
2 RXD IN Receive Data
3 TXD OUT Transmit Data
4 DTR OUT Data Terminal Ready
5 GND -
6 NC - Free
7 NC - Free
8 CTS IN Clear To Send
9 Used internally - Used

Pin assignment Card Reader CHD V2x
USB
USB 4-pin
3 4
Pin Assignment
1 +5V
2 D-
3 D+
4 GND
Power supply
5046-04A (Molex Japan)
Pin Assignment
1 Supply voltage (+ 24 V)
2 Ground (GND)
3 Minus external capacitor (XGND)
4 Auxiliary voltage from external capacitor (X24 V)

Card Reader CHD V2x Technical data
Technical data
Operating voltage 24 V
Current consumption max. 2.0 A (during operation)
500 mA (standby)
Temperature range 5 to 55 °C in operation
Interface V.24 or USB

Line speed 1200 bps, 2400 bps, 4800 bps, 9600 bps,
19200 bps, 38400 bps (factory setting)
(automatic detection*)
Data bits 8
Parity even
Stop bits 1
Number of chip card 1

k t for SAM
ID-000
Dimensions (H x W x L) 95 x 108 x 214.2 mm

Weight 2.0 kg
* Automatic baud rate recognition is only active after switch-on.

Testing Card Reader CHD V2x
Testing
The function is tested using KDIAG.
Make sure that you have the right versions of the test program.
Test with test card 01750066226: as of version 1.3 / 03
Device version USB (Standard)*: as of version 1.3 / 04
Device version ACT as of version 1.3 / 05
* USB devices can only be tested on Windows with KDIAG W32 and I/O
driver USBIO 2.0.
A KDIAG test module for this component is available in the intranet / extranet.

Card Reader CHD V2x Removing a jammed card
Removing a jammed card

i The following description of how to remove a jammed card only
applies to an ACT card reader.
• Press lever (1) as far as possible in the direction shown by the arrow.
• Then press lever (2) as far as possible in the direction shown by the arrow.
• Move the ID card by turning the manual card transport knob (3) so that it
can be removed from the card slot.
• Remove the ID card (4).
i If an ID card jams, card reader CHD V2x must be replaced (see

chapter "Removal/Installation of Components").

Maintenance and service Card Reader CHD V2x
Maintenance and service
Maintenance
Maintenance should be performed after 6 months of operation. Preventive
maintenance (on-call) should be performed on the occasion of fault clearance
on the system.
• Remove any foreign objects from the card reader.
• Clean sensors S1 - S4 using the sensor cleaning card or compressed air

spray.
• Check the sensors using KDIAG. Sensor values must be at > 2.5 V.
• Clean the transport rollers, magnetic read heads and chip contacts using
the universal pre-saturated cleaning card; repeat, if necessary.

Card Reader CHD V2x Maintenance and service
Cleaning and test utilities

The following cards should be used for maintenance and service purposes:
Test utilities
WN-Hybrid test card: 01750066226

(replaces type 01750000093 but
requires KDIAG test module from
version 1.3 / 03)
Cleaning utilities
Cleaning tool for security sensor: 01750012317

Sensor cleaning card: in preparation
Cleaning card universal for Hybrid
reader: 01750016388
Cleaning card CHD Austria
(pre-saturated cleaning card): 01750057227
Spare parts
Capacitor: 6221306535

Maintenance and service Card Reader CHD V2x

Card Reject Module
Version Number Part number
of cards
Card reject module with short transport path 100 01750029082
Card reject module with short transport path 100 01750109600
Card reject module with long transport path 100 01750033689
General description
An ID card that is to be retained is transported to the card reject module to
prevent unauthorized access to the card. However, the application first checks
the card counter to determine that the reject cassette is not full.
A photosensor detects if an ID card is transported to the card reject module's
transport belt.
The photosensor's signal starts the motor, the transport belts start moving to
transport the ID card into the reject cassette.
The motor stops automatically after running for about 8 seconds.

Views Card Reject Module
Views
Card reject module with short transport path
1 Reject cassette 4 Photosensor

2 Key lock 5 Transport belts
3 Motor

Card Reject Module Views
Card reject module with long transport path for

100 cards
4 5 6
1 Reject cassette 4 Cover

2 Key lock 5 Photosensor
3 Motor 6 Transport belts

Views Card Reject Module
Card reject module with long transport path for

200 cards
4 5 6
1 Reject cassette 4 Cover

2 Key lock 5 Photosensor
3 Motor 6 Transport belts

Card Reject Module Function elements
Function elements
1 2 3 4 5
10 9 8 7 6
1 ID card 6 Free-wheel transport roller

2 Photosensor 7 Transport belts (two)
(transmitter & receiver) 8 Transport wedge
3 Motor 9 Deviating prism
4 Drive belt 10 Deflecting roller
5 Reject cassette

How to test the card reject module Card Reject Module
How to test the card reject module
Photosensor
• Cover the photosensor. The motor starts running immediately and stops
automatically after about 8 seconds.
Motor
• Cover the photosensor. The motor starts running immediately and stops
automatically after about 8 seconds.
• Cover the photosensor to start the motor. Keep the photosensor covered
until the motor stops automatically after about 8 seconds.
Now uncover the photosensor. The motor re-starts and stops automatically
after about 8 seconds.

Card Reject Module Troubleshooting
Troubleshooting
Problem What to check
ID cards are not – Check if the reject cassette is full.

transported to the If necessary, invoke the application via the SOP
reject cassette pushbutton and check the status of the card reader.
The 2-digit card reader display cannot provide
meaningful information on the quantity of cards
retained for a card reject module with a volume of 200
cards.
When cards are removed, the counter must be reset
via the application.
– Check if the photosensor between card reader and
card reject module is soiled.
– Check if foreign objects or ID cards are blocking the
transport path.
– Check if the motor is defective.

Pin assignment Card Reject Module
Pin assignment
Type of connector:
Pin Assignment
1 + 24 V
2 GND
Technical data
Motor
Rated voltage 24 V
Load current 310 mA
Load speed 108 1/min ± 10%
Load torque 20 Ncm
Idle current < 60 mA
Idling speed 160 1/min ± 10%
Transmission ratio 30.8 : 1
Temperature range - 30 °C to 60 °C

Hybrid DIP Reader
Hybrid DIP reader 01750041226
Hybrid DIP reader 01750106938
Functions
Reading of tracks 1, 2 and 3 of the magnetic stripe
Reading and writing during chip processing

System connection Hybrid DIP Reader
Magnetic stripe
The card tracks can only be evaluated while the card is manually inserted or
pulled out. The application software determines if reading takes place when
the card is inserted or pulled out or in both instances.
Chip processing
When chip processing is activated, the card is locked inside the module by a
pin to prevent that the card is removed during processing.
LED
In the front of the card insertion there is an LED panel.
When power is switched on, the LED blinks green until the card reader
initializes (activation of the software) – if it does not, a hardware error has
occurred.
Mounting position
The DIP hybrid card reader can be mounted horizontally or vertically.
If it is mounted horizontally, the DIP hybrid card reader must always be
installed with the magnetic track of the ID card facing downwards. This
ensures that foreign objects (coins, for example) can fall directly through the
insertion slot into the device.
System connection
The hybrid reader is connected to the system via the V.24 interface (RS232
C).
1 Optional connection for emergency capacitor

2 V.24 interface (RS232 C) and power supply

Hybrid DIP Reader Pin assignment
Pin assignment
Optional connection for emergency capacitor
Pin Signal name Function

1 + 12 V Voltage Vcc
2 - Ground
V.24 interface (RS 232 C)
Pin Signal name IN/OUT* Function

1 + 12 V IN Voltage Vcc
2 GND - Ground
3 TXD OUT Transmitted data
4 RXD IN Received data
5 RTS OUT Control signal
6 CTS IN Control signal
7 N.C. - No Connection
8 SG - Signal Ground
9 N.C. - No Connection
10 FG. - Frame Ground
* IN = input signal
OUT = output signal

Block diagram Hybrid DIP Reader
Block diagram
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
1 Locking pin 5 End sensor

2 Read/write magnetic head 6 Chip contact station
3 Front sensor 7 Slide
4 ID card

Hybrid DIP Reader Function elements
Function elements
Rear view
1 Connector for optional emergency capacitor

2 Socket for optional SAM plug-in (plug-in in ID-000 format)
(SAM = Security Access Module)
3 V.24 connector and power supply

Function elements Hybrid DIP Reader
Top view
1 Recess for removing foreign objects

2 Chip contact station
3 Card slide for end sensor activation and chip card contact

Hybrid DIP Reader Function elements
Side view
1 Front sensor

Technical data Hybrid DIP Reader
Technical data
Approved magnetic cards according to ISO / IEC 7810, 7811, 7813
Approved IC card ISO / IEC 7816 / 1-3
EMV 96 Ver 3.1.1
(EMV = Europay, Mastercard, Visa)
Memory Card Read / Write SLE 4432, SLE 4442
Weight 170 g
Speed of card movement 10 cm/s to 100 cm/s
DC power supply + 12 V + 10 %
Current consumption:
Standby ≤ 150 mA
Lifting magnet attracted ≤ 400 mA
(card locked)
Communication mode ≤ 700 mA for 2 ms
Climatic requirements Temperature Humidity

(relative humidity)
Operation + 5 °C to + 45 °C 10 % to 95 %
Storage - 20 °C to + 70 °C 10 % to 95 %

Hybrid DIP Reader Maintenance and service

Cleaning and test utilities
The following cards should be used for maintenance and service purposes:
Test utilities
Hybrid test card 01750000093

WN hybrid test card (new version) 01750066226
i If the new version of the hybrid test card is used, the KDIAG test
program must be updated.
Cleaning utilities
Cleaning card for hybrid card readers 01750016388

Maintenance and service Hybrid DIP Reader

Softkeys
Description
1 User side of softkeys

2 Rear side of softkey

Description Softkeys
WN part number Description for monitor Comment

size
01750057215 Softkey set 12.1" Barcl. 12.1" Customer-specific
NDC C H.K.-GPO version
01750059611 Softkey set 12.1" Std. C 12.1"
Brai. H.K. GPO
01750059634 Softkey set 12.1" DDC C 12.1" Customer-specific
Brai. H.K. GPO version
01750059753 Softkey set 12.1" Std. C 12.1"
H.K. GPO
01750059754 Softkey set 12.1" DDC C 12.1"
H.K. GPO
01750059755 Softkey set 12.1" NDC C 12.1"
Std. H.K. GPO
01750059756 Softkey set 12.1" NDC C 12.1"
Std. Brai.H.K.GPO
01750047155 Softkey set Span Monte 12.1" Customer-specific
NDC C Brai.12.1" version
01750074503 Softkeyset 12.1” NDC_C 12.1"
64.5 - 33
The softkeys are used for menu-driven inputs on screen, and are located on
the right and left of the monitor. The softkey dimensions depend on the monitor
used. The position of the keys and the distance between them depend on the
emulation or the software which runs on the system. In the course of time
three standards have been established: WN Standard, NDC and DDC. All
three versions are available with Braille as an option.
Spare softkeys are delivered in pairs and the softkeys should always be
replaced in pairs, too. In the case of older versions the softkeys can be
ordered separately for the left and for the right side. Make sure then that the
softkeys for both sides are ordered and delivered.

Softkeys Pin assignment
Pin assignment
Berg connector
Pin Description
1 Y0
2 Y1
3 Y2
4 Y3
5 X

Pin assignment Softkeys

EPP V5
Supplier: Thales e-Transactions GmbH
1 PIN pad
2 EPP module on the rear side of the PIN pad
The EPP module is available in many versions.

There is a large and constantly growing variety of versions as it is possible to
choose the material (plastic or stainless steel) of the base module, the keys
and keyboard labeling (language or customer requirements).
It is therefore impossible to list the part numbers.

Description EPP V5
Description
The EPP module contains the following functional elements:
− Keyboard with numeric pad (0 to 9 and two special keys) for entering the
PIN and 4 function keys,
− keyboard logic including extensive security circuit components for software
protection and the protection of the loadable cryptographic keys used in
case of tampering with the housing and the electronics,
− security module for secure encryption and decryption of the transmitted
information,
− socket for optional SAM modules.
The keys for entering the PIN, the keyboard logic and the security module are
accommodated in a tamperproof housing. A built-in battery prevents the loss of
the stored keys and data after the system is switched off.
In addition to the serial V.24 (RS232) port the EPP module also features a
USB port. The USB port is located behind the service cover.
The EPP V5 has a multitasking operating system which allows to distinguish
between the basic FW and additional security modules.
The basic FW controls communication at the interface and enables reading out
the error statistics. Depending on which security functions are desired the
security modules and cryptographic keys are loaded.

EPP V5 Description
1 Reset button 4 Battery label

2 Screws for housing cover 5 Housing cover
3 Service cover 6 V.24 (RS232) connector

Description EPP V5
Service cover open
1 Socket 1 for SAM module 6 USB port

2 Socket 2 for SAM module 7 Configuration notes
3 Opening 1 for USB cable V.24 (RS232) / USB
4 Jumper 8 Socket 4 for SAM module
V.24 (RS232) / USB 9 Socket 3 for SAM module
5 Opening 2 for USB cable

EPP V5 Description
Port configuration (V.24 / USB)

The port to be used is selected with a jumper beneath the sliding cover.
i The manufacturer configures the EPP module for connection to the

V.24 port. If the USB port is required, the jumper has to be inserted in
a different position in accordance with the information given on the
board (see the "Service cover open" illustration).
The operating mode may only to be changed in a switched off state,
i.e. when the cable has been detached.
Only one cable may be connected.
Simultaneous operation of the two ports (V.24 and USB) is not

permitted and can lead to electrical defects.
V.24 mode
The basic software automatically sets the baud rate to 38,400 bits/s or 19,200
bits/s.
The EPP module is supplied with power via the connector of the V.24 port (see
the "Pin assignment" section).
USB mode
The basic CSC W32 software supports the USB port from version 2.0/40 on.
In USB mode, the EPP module is supplied with power via the USB port.

Description EPP V5
If the cable opening (1) is used to

connect the cable, the cable must be
prevented from being pulled out with a
cable tie (2) on the inside.
Reset button
The EPP module features a Reset button accessible from outside which
enables you to delete all security-relevant information. If the Reset button is
pressed, all cryptographic keys and the FW security modules are reset in the
EPP module.
The EPP module will no longer work after the Reset button has been
pressed and has to be returned for repair.
Pressing the button
Insert a long pointed object through

the opening (1) of the housing cover
and press the button for three seconds
at least.

EPP V5 Smartcard interfaces
i When a system is disassembled the stored cryptographic keys should

be deleted for security reasons. This responsibility lies with the party
operating the system.
If no software solution is available, this can also be accomplished via
the external Reset button. The engineer should do this only upon
consulting with the customer.
Smartcard interfaces
To integrate additional functions (such as extra keys for ID card procedures),
the EPP module features four sockets for SAM modules on smartcards in ID-
000 format.
Inserting a smartcard
Push the metal lock in the direction of

the arrow and raise the cover.
Insert the card in the cover with the

straight edge at the front so that the
contacts are facing down.
Close and lock the cover.

Replacing the EPP in the event of an error EPP V5
Replacing the EPP in the event of an error

• Check general functioning.
• Check that the loaded keys and associated firmware modules are valid.
• Check the error memory.
The EPP V5 has an error memory. This memory is used to store error
codes triggered by the security sensors. The error codes can be shown in
plain text with a suitable test program (such as KDIAG).
• Detach the defective EPP module, remove any customer-specific

smartcards from the defective EPP module, and insert the smartcards in
the new EPP module. Pay attention to the card positions.
• Before installation, check the position of the jumper (V.24 / USB) and, if
necessary, adjust it to the system's interfacing.
• After replacing the unit, arrange for initialization and reloading of the keys.
This is done by application programs.

EPP V5 Pin assignment
Pin assignment
V.24 port
D-SUB 9M
Pin Name
1 + 10 V to + 30 V
2 RXD
3 TXD
4 -------
5 GND
6 -------
7 -------
8 -------
9 -------
USB port
USB 4-pin
3 4
Pin Name Remarks

1 Vcc +5V
2 - Data 3.3 V difference
3 + Data 3.3 V difference
4 Ground

Maintenance work EPP V5
Maintenance work
The EPP module can be tested and settings can be made by means of the
KDIAG test program.
If during this test the EPP module finds that the battery voltage drops below a
defined threshold value a message is displayed automatically.
The basic operating system can also query the battery status depending on
the registry entry CSCEDM: EPP_REQUEST_BATTERY generating a warning
in the error log file: EDM-FRM Battery Empty.
In this case replace the EPP as a preventive measure.
Battery check
i Battery life is at least 5 years.

The date of the battery change is noted on the rear of the EPP module
(see the following illustration).
The date of manufacture (1) of the

EPP module, or the date on which the
battery was inserted by the
manufacturer, is stated on the
manufacturer's nameplate.
The 'Date of Battery Change' label (2)

shows when the battery was last
replaced.
If battery life has expired perform a test with the KDIAG test program.
Replacing the battery

For battery replacement the EPP V5 must be sent to the repair center in
charge.

MM / CIM 86
General description
The MM code (MM = modulated feature) is printed on the front side of the ec
card. It is invisible, but can be read by the MM sensor. It is used to encode
certain data of the magnetic track. This data code is stored in field 20 of
magnetic track 3 when the card is manufactured.
After the ec card is inserted in the ATM, the data is encoded again in the MM
system and the result is compared with the stored code.
The MM / CIM 86 module can be tested with the test program KDIAG or, in
individual cases, with PDIAG.
All 11 test cards are requested successively.
Test card Remark
T 1, T 2 Check internal module parameter.
T3 Looks for external high-frequency spurious signals.
T4 Looks for external low-frequency spurious and noise signals.
T 5, T 6 Check the card transport speed.
T7 Checks the distance between sensor and ec card.
T 8, T 9 Checks the horizontal position of the sensor.
T 10 Checks the sensor’s sensitivity.
T 11 Helps to identify reflections in the card transport.
i Test cards must be provided by the customer.
The result of the individual tests are displayed via KDIAG or PDIAG.

MM / CIM 86

12.1" DVI High Bright Box
1 12.1" DVI High Bright Box (Standard version) 01750061135

2 12.1" DVI High Bright Box (Special version) 01750081436
2 12.1" DVI High Bright Box (Special version) 01750107937
This 12.1" High Bright LCD Box is an option that can be ordered for systems
that are installed in locations exposed to very bright sunlight.
The box contains a TFT LCD color module and features an autoscaling
interface board for VGA, SVGA and XGA resolutions.
The image features are set automatically. Where necessary, the contrast and
brightness can be set via the graphics driver.
The LCD box is equipped with a fan unit for cooling purposes.
The backlight can be switched on or off by the user software via the special
electronics module in the device. If there is no connection to the special
electronics module, the backlight is always switched on.

Important safety precautions 12.1" DVI High Bright Box

− If the LCD panel breaks and fluid seeps out, avoid coming
into contact with the fluid and do not inhale the vapors.
If fluid gets into the mouth or eyes, immediately wash your eyes
or mouth with water.
Wash any areas of skin or clothing which have come into contact
with this fluid with alcohol and carefully rinse them with water
afterwards.
− Always switch off the power supply when connecting or
disconnecting cables.
− To clean the monitor screen, only wipe it off with a soft cloth.
Before cleaning the screen, it may be advisable to breathe on the
screen or to slightly dampen the cloth with cleaning spirit.
− The monitor screen is very sensitive and must be protected
against scratches.
− Avoid any mechanical pressure in order not to break the glass.

12.1" DVI High Bright Box Connections
Connections
Standard version
1 DVI-I connection (integrated analog and digital interface)

2 Power supply connection (+ 12 V) and backlight on / off (special
electronics module)
3 Power supply connection for backlight (+ 24 V)
Before exchanging the monitor, be sure to turn off the monitor and the
computer at the power switches.

Connections 12.1" DVI High Bright Box
Special version
1 DVI-I connection (integrated analog and digital interface)

2 Power supply connection (+ 12 V) and backlight on / off
(special electronics module)
3 Power supply connection for backlight (+ 24 V)

12.1" DVI High Bright Box Connecting cables
Connecting cables
Signal Part number
DVI-D cable 2.3 m 01750058006
DVI-D cable 3.2 m 01750058007
DVI-D cable 5.2 m 01750058008
Circuit diagram
Connection to digital interface (DVI-D connection) of system unit (PC)
+24 V
12.1" TFT High Bright LCD-Box

System unit (PC)
Fan box
VGA
Motherboard DVI-D cable
DVI-D DVI-I
+12V
Backlight on / off

Pin assignment 12.1" DVI High Bright Box
Pin assignment
DVI-I connection
DVI-I (24 + 5) F
9 C5
17 24 C3 C4
Pin Signal Comment

1 T.M.D.S DATA 2-
2 T.M.D.S DATA 2+
3 T.M.D.S DATA 2/4 SHIELD
4 T.M.D.S DATA 4-
5 T.M.D.S DATA 4+
6 DDC CLOCK
7 DDC DATA
8 ANALOG VERT. SYNC
9 T.M.D.S DATA 1-
10 T.M.D.S DATA 1+
12 T.M.D.S DATA 3-
13 T.M.D.S DATA 3+
14 + 5 V POWER
15 GND
16 HOT PLUG DETECT
17 T.M.D.S DATA 0-
18 T.M.D.S DATA 0+
20 T.M.D.S DATA 5-
21 T.M.D.S DATA 5+

12.1" DVI High Bright Box Pin assignment
Pin Signal Comment

22 T.M.D.S CLOCK SHIELD
23 T.M.D.S CLOCK+
24 T.M.D.S CLOCK-
C1 ANALOG RED
C2 ANALOG GREEN
C3 ANALOG BLUE
C4 ANALOG HORZ SYNC
C5 ANALOG GROUND
Voltage connection and backlight on / off
Pin Signal Remarks

1 GND PC
2 GND Special electronics module
3 + 12 V PC
4 LCD illumination Signal from special electronics module
Connector: internal inputs / outputs II

Technical data 12.1" DVI High Bright Box
Power supply connection for backlight

Type of connector:
Pin Signal Remarks

1 + 24 V
2 GND
Technical data
General
Dimensions: Standard version Special version
Width: 308 mm 308 mm
Height: 214 mm 214 mm
Depth: 63 mm 82 mm
Weight of monitor: 2.1 kg 2.36 kg
Operation:
Temperature: 0 to + 50 °C 0 to + 50 °C
Humidity: 10 to 90 % r.h. 10 to 90 % r.h.
Storage:
Temperature: - 20 to + 60 °C - 20 to + 60 °C
Humidity: 10 to 90 % r.h. 10 to 90 % r.h.

12.1" DVI High Bright Box Technical data
LCD
Screen diagonal: 310 mm (12.1")
Active area: 246 x 184.5 mm (horizontal x vertical)
Pixel: 800 x 600 (native resolution)

Pixel size: 0.3075 mm x 0.3075 mm
Resolution:
VGA: 640 x 480 pixel
SVGA: 800 x 600 pixel
XGA: 1024 x 768 pixel
Number of colors: 262,144 colors

Brightness: 1200 cd/m² (typical)
Contrast ratio: > 250 : 1 (typical)
Response time 25 ms (typical)
Screen surface: Anti-reflection layer

Technical data 12.1" DVI High Bright Box

12.1" LCD Box DVI
12.1" LCD Box DVI 01750092357
12.1" LCD Box DVI 01750107720
The digitally controllable LCD box with DVI-D interface features an autoscaling
The backlight can be switched off.
As an option, the fan box 01750065621 can be mounted on the LCD box.

Connectors 12.1" LCD Box DVI
Connectors
i The connectors are located at the rear of the LCD box.

2 DVI-I connector

12.1" LCD Box DVI Important safety precautions

– If the LCD panel breaks and fluid seeps out, avoid coming into
contact with the fluid and do not inhale the vapors.
If fluid gets into the mouth or eyes, immediately wash your eyes or
mouth with water.
afterwards.
– Always switch off the power supply when connecting or

– The polarization filter screen is very sensitive and must be

protected against scratches.
– To clean the display screen, only wipe it off with a soft cloth.
screen or to slightly dampen it with screen or window cleaner.
– Avoid any mechanical pressure in order not to break the glass.

Structure and functions 12.1" LCD Box DVI
Structure and functions

The LCD box consists of the following components:
− Metal casing
− TFT LCD module with integrated backlight
− Inverter board for the power supply of the backlight
− Interface board to convert the TMDS signals from the PC to the
RGB signals for the LCD component

12.1" LCD Box DVI Circuit diagram
Circuit diagram
+24 V
12.1" TFT High Bright LCD Box

System unit (PC)
Fan box
VGA
DVI-D DVI-I
+12V
Backlight on / off
DVI-D cable
Length Part number

2.3 m 01750058006
3.2 m 01750058007
5.2 m 01750058008

Pin assignment 12.1" LCD Box DVI
Pin assignment
DVI-I connection
DVI-I (24 + 5) F
9 C5
17 24 C3 C4
Pin Signal Active Comment

4 T.M.D.S DATA 4- n. c.
5 T.M.D.S DATA 4+ n. c.
6 DDC CLOCK Yes
7 DDC DATA Yes
8 ANALOG VERT. SYNC n. c.
14 + 5 V POWER Yes
15 GND Yes

12.1" LCD Box DVI Pin assignment

C1 ANALOG RED Yes
C2 ANALOG GREEN Yes
C3 ANALOG BLUE Yes
C4 ANALOG HORZ SYNC Yes
C5 ANALOG GROUND Yes
Pin Signal Remarks

1 GND PC
3 + 12 V PC
4 LCD illumination Signal from
5 VDC BL ON/OFF Special electronics module III (V.24)
Pin 9 (LCD light control)
or
(USB)
Connector X6, LCD light on/off,
Pin1 (switching signal)

Technical data 12.1" LCD Box DVI
Technical data
General
Dimensions:
Width: 326 mm
Height: 224 mm
Depth: 38 mm
Weight: 1900 g
Operation:
Temperature: 0 to + 50 °C
Humidity: 10 to 90 % r.h.
Storage:
Temperature: - 20 to + 60 °C
LCD
Screen diagonal: 31 cm (12.1")
Resolution:
VGA: 640 X 480
SVGA: 800 x 600
XGA: 1024 x 768

15" LCD Monitor
15" LCD Monitor 01750078980
15" LCD Monitor 01750107936
This 15" color monitor can be operated at the analog interface (VGA port) as
well as at the digital interface (DVI-D port) on the system unit (PC).

Important safety precautions 15" LCD Monitor

− If the LCD panel breaks and fluid seeps out, avoid coming
into contact with the fluid and do not inhale the vapors.
If fluid gets into the mouth or eyes, immediately wash your eyes
or mouth with water.
afterwards.
− To clean the monitor screen, only wipe it off with a soft cloth.
− The monitor screen is very sensitive and must be protected
against scratches.

15" LCD Monitor Connections
Connections
The following illustration shows all connections which are accessible from the
monitor's rear side.
1 + 12 V DC connection and ON / OFF switching of backlight (+ 5 V

reserved for applications in cash dispensers).
2 Connection for monitor power supply unit (12 V DC) (jack plug)
3 VGA connection (analog interface)
4 DVI-D connection (digital interface)
5 Connection for external control panel (OSD panel)

Monitor accessories 15" LCD Monitor
Monitor accessories
Signal Remarks Part number
Monitor power supply unit not included in delivery 01750081432
Monitor control panel not included in delivery 01750069628
DVI-D cable 2.3 m not included in delivery 01750058006
Power supply unit for monitor 4-pin Mini-Fit

(01750081432)
1 Green LED (voltage available)

2 Rubber plug
3 + 12 V Molex connector

15" LCD Monitor Monitor accessories
Monitor control panel (OSD panel 01750069628)

If the monitor is addressed via an analog connection, the OSD panel is
required to set the geometry, phase and clock, for example.

Setting the monitor 15" LCD Monitor
Setting the monitor

Analog interface (VGA connection)
When connecting the monitor to the analog interface, the OSD panel
01750069628 is required to set the geometry, phase and frequency (clock).
The other display parameters are factory preset, but can also be adjusted
either via the OSD panel or via the graphics card drivers.
Consult the operating manual for details on operating the device.
Digital interface (DVI-D connection)

If you operate the monitor at the digital interface, the system unit (PC) adjusts
automatically to the monitor.
The other display parameters are factory preset, but can also be adjusted
either via an optional OSD panel (01750069628) or via the graphics card
drivers.
Consult the operating manual for details on operating the device.

15" LCD Monitor Circuit diagram
Circuit diagram
Connection to digital interface (DVI-D connection) of system unit (PC)
Monitor power SE
supply unit
(01750081432)
System unit (PC) + 12 V 15" LCD monitor
Monitor power supply unit / SE
Monitor power supply unit
VGA VGA
Motherboard
DVI-D cable
DVI-D DVI-D
OSD
OSD panel
Connection to analog interface (VGA connection) of system unit (PC)
Monitor power SE
supply unit
(01750081432)
System unit (PC) + 12 V 15" LCD monitor
Monitor power supply unit / SE
Monitor power supply unit
VGA
VGA cable VGA
Motherboard
DVI-D DVI-D
OSD
OSD panel

Graphics modes 15" LCD Monitor
Graphics modes
The monitor features 17 preset modes for optimal size and display centering
listed in the table below.
The resolution can be set via the graphics driver, if necessary.
Mode Resolution Frequency Input signal
Horizontal Vertical A Analog
kHz Hz D Digital
NEC PC98 640 x 400 24.83 56.42 A
MAC 13" Mode 640 x 480 35.00 66.67 A/D
MAC 16" Mode 832 x 624 49.73 74.55 A/D
MAC 17" Mode 1024 x 768 60.24 75.02 A/D
VGA 640 x 350 31.47 70.09 A
640 x 400 31.47 70.09 A
640 x 480 31.47 59.94 A/D
720 x 400 31.47 70.09 A/D
VESA 640 x 480 37.86 72.81 A/D
640 x 480 37.50 75.00 A/D
800 x 600 35.16 56.25 A/D
800 x 600 48.08 72.19 A/D
800 x 600 46.88 75.00 A/D
1024 x 768 56.48 70.07 A/D
1024 x 768 60.02 75.03 A/D
SVGA 800 x 600 37.88 60.32 A/D
XGA 1024 x 768 48.36 60.00 A/D

15" LCD Monitor Pin assignment
Pin assignment
DVI-D connection
DVI-D (24 + 1) F
17 24 C5

6 DDC CLOCK Yes
7 DDC DATA Yes
8 ANALOG VERT. SYNC n. c.
14 + 5 V POWER Yes
15 GND Yes

Pin assignment 15" LCD Monitor

C5 n. c.
VGA connection
6 D-SUB, 15/09 F
10
15 11
Pin Signal
1 Red Video
2 Green Video
3 Blue Video
4
5 Digital Ground
6 Red Ground
7 Green Ground
8 Blue Ground
9 DDC_Vcc
10 Digital Ground
11
12 DDC_Data
13 Horizontal synchronization
14 Vertical synchronization
15 DDC_CI

15" LCD Monitor Pin assignment
OSD panel connection
D-SUB, 9F
Pin Signal
1
(minus)
2
(plus)
3 (down)
4 (up)
5 GND
6 LED
7 -
8 -
9 Power (ON/OFF) *1)
*1) If the monitor is supplied with voltage, it is always switched on irrespective

of the status of pin 9.

Technical data 15" LCD Monitor
Connector for monitor power supply unit

(01750081432) / special electronics
(only for use in cash dispensers)
Pin Signal
1 GND
2 GND
3 + 12 V
4 Backlight on / off (5 V = on)
Technical data
General
General
Dimensions: 372 x 285 x 37.5 mm (W x H x D)
Weight: approx. 2.5 kg
Power supply: 12 V DC ± 5 %
Current consumption: max. 40 W
Ambient temperature
(operation): 0 °C to + 40 °C max.
Temperature range
(storage): - 20 °C to + 60 °C max.
Relative humidity: 10 - 90 % / non-condensing (≤ 40 °C)

15" LCD Monitor Technical data
LCD
Diagonal: 380 mm (15")
Active area: 304.1 x 228.1 mm (horizontal x vertical)
Viewing angle: horizontal: ± 80° min., vertical: ± 80° min.
Pixel: 1024 x 768 (horizontal x vertical) (50 Hz - 75 Hz)
Pixel size: 0.297 x 0.297 mm (horizontal x vertical)
Pixel arrangement: R, G, B in vertical orientation
Defective pixel: N ≤ 8,
min. distance between defective dots is ≥ 5 mm
Resolution:
VGA: 640 x 480 pixel
SVGA: 800 x 600 pixel
XGA: 1024 x 768 pixel
Response time: 25 ms
Brightness: 250 cd/m2 typ.
Contrast ratio: 500 : 1
Backlight: 4 lamp CCFL

Input signal (VGA): RGB – video analog 0.7 Vss
Completely synchronized / TTL positive /
negative
H. frequency: 30 – 65 kHz
V. frequency: 50 – 75 Hz
Input signal (digital): DVI-D
Number of colors: 262 k
OSD language: German, English, French, Spanish, Italian,
Japanese

Technical data 15" LCD Monitor
Power supply unit
Power supply voltage: 100 V – 240 V (± 10%)
Mains frequency: 50 Hz – 60 Hz (± 5%)
Output voltage: + 12 V (± 5%)
Output current: ≤ 3.33 A (max. 40 W)
Pin assignment
Pin Signal
1 GND
2
3 + 12 V
4

15" LCD Monitor Troubleshooting
Troubleshooting
Error Items to check General /
analog
interface
only
No picture – Check brightness and contrast Analog
settings in the OSD menu.
– Check that the monitor connecting General
plug is correctly inserted in the PC
output.
– Check that the graphics card is firmly General
in place.
– Make sure the power switch of the General
device is in the ON position.
– Make sure the power connector is General
connected properly to the PC outlet.
– Check if the selected graphics mode Analog
matches the graphics card or the
device used.
– Check if the signal clock of the system Analog
unit (PC) corresponds to the
specifications of the monitor.
– Verify that connector pins are not General
bent.
The picture is – Check that the monitor connecting General
unstable or plug is correctly inserted in the PC
blurred or seems output.
to be shifting. – Check if the signal clock of the system Analog
unit (PC) corresponds to the
specifications of the monitor.
– Check if the monitor can work with the Analog
graphics mode of the graphics card.

Troubleshooting 15" LCD Monitor
Error Items to check General /

analog
interface
only
The display is not – Adjust the vertical and horizontal Analog
centered position or activate the menu item
'Auto Setup'.
Too large or too – Adjust the display size or activate Analog
small display size menu item 'Auto Setup'.
– Check if the monitor can work with the Analog
graphics mode of the graphics card.
i If the same display remains on the screen for a period of time, this
may result in shadowing. This is neither a function distortion, nor a
defective monitor.
If the power supply is switched off and the device not used for a while,
the screen will return to normal. However, we do recommend the use
of a dark switch.
Bright dots (permanently lit pixels) or black dots (unlit pixels) on the
screen of an LCD monitor are quite normal. This does not indicate any
kind of incorrect functioning or any fault in the monitor.

15" LCD Box DVI
15" LCD Box DVI 01750084538
15" LCD Box DVI 01750107721
The LCD box with digital and analog control and DVI-I interface has an
Autoscaling Interface Board for VGA, SVGA and XGA resolutions. It can be
operated at the digital interface (DVI-D port) and - via a DVI-I/VGA adapter
cable - at the analog interface (VGA port) of the system unit (PC).
The image features are also set automatically under analog control. Where
necessary, the contrast and brightness can be set via the graphics driver. An
OSD panel is not required.

Connections 15" LCD Box DVI
Connections

2 DVI-I connector

15" LCD Box DVI Important safety precautions

− If the LCD panel breaks and fluid seeps out, avoid coming into
If fluid gets into the mouth or eyes, immediately wash your eyes or mouth
with water.
Wash any areas of skin or clothing which have come into contact with this
fluid with alcohol and carefully rinse them with water afterwards.
− Always switch off the power supply when connecting or disconnecting
cables.
− The polarization filter screen is very sensitive and must be protected
against scratches.
− To clean the display screen, only wipe it off with a soft cloth.
− Before cleaning the screen, it may be advisable to breathe on the screen or
to slightly dampen the cloth with cleaning spirit.

− Metal casing
− TFT LCD module with integrated backlight.
− Inverter board for the power supply of the backlight
RGB signals for the LCD component

Structure and functions 15" LCD Box DVI
DVI interface board and inverter board
1 Inverter board
2 Interface board connecting cable - inverter board
3 LCD panel connection
4 Ground connection
5 DVI – LVDS autoscaling interface board
6 Backlight connection

15" LCD Box DVI Structure and functions
LCD panel
1 Backlight cable (connected at inverter board)

2 Ground cable (connected at DVI interface board)
3 DVI interface connection

Circuit diagram 15" LCD Box DVI
Circuit diagram
Connection to DVI interface
Circuit diagram Pentium IV Embedded PC
Pentium IV Embedded PC TFT Flat Panel LCD (15")
VGA
DVI-D DVI-I
DVI interface board
autoscaling
+12V
Inverter for
backlight
Backlight on / off
Circuit diagram Pentium III Embedded PC / Beetle PC
Pentium III Embedded PC / TFT Flat Panel LCD (15")

Beetle PC
VGA
DVI-D DVI-I
DVI interface board
autoscaling
Inverter for
backlight
Backlight on / off
Central power supply unit / (special electronics module)
+12V
monitor power supply

15" LCD Box DVI Circuit diagram
Connection to analog interface (VGA)
Circuit diagram Pentium IV Embedded PC
Pentium IV Embedded PC TFT Flat Panel LCD (15")

VGA VGA / DVI
cable adapter
VGA
Motherboard
DVI-D DVI-I
DVI interface board
autoscaling
+12V
Inverter for
backlight
Backlight on / off
Circuit diagram Pentium III Embedded PC / Beetle PC
Pentium III Embedded PC / TFT Flat Panel LCD (15")

Beetle PC VGA VGA / DVI
cable adapter
VGA
Motherboard
DVI-D DVI-I
DVI interface board
autoscaling
Inverter for
backlight
Backlight on / off
Central power supply unit / (special electronics module)
+12V
monitor power supply

Connecting cables 15" LCD Box DVI
Connecting cables
DVI-D cable

DVI-D cable
2.3 m not included in delivery 01750058006
Connection to analog interface (VGA connection) of system unit

VGA cable
DVI-I/VGA adapter cable


15" LCD Box DVI Pin assignment
Pin assignment
DVI-I connection
DVI-I (24 + 5) F
9 C5
17 24 C3 C4
Pin Signal Comment

1 T.M.D.S DATA 2-
2 T.M.D.S DATA 2+
4 T.M.D.S DATA 4-
5 T.M.D.S DATA 4+
6 DDC CLOCK
7 DDC DATA
8 ANALOG VERT. SYNC
9 T.M.D.S DATA 1-
10 T.M.D.S DATA 1+
12 T.M.D.S DATA 3-
13 T.M.D.S DATA 3+
14 + 5 V POWER
15 GND
16 HOT PLUG DETECT
17 T.M.D.S DATA 0-
18 T.M.D.S DATA 0+
20 T.M.D.S DATA 5-
21 T.M.D.S DATA 5+

Pin assignment 15" LCD Box DVI
Pin Signal Comment

22 T.M.D.S CLOCK SHIELD
23 T.M.D.S CLOCK+
24 T.M.D.S CLOCK-
C1 ANALOG RED
C2 ANALOG GREEN
C3 ANALOG BLUE
C4 ANALOG HORZ SYNC
C5 ANALOG GROUND
Pin Signal Remarks

1 GND PC
3 + 12 V PC

15" LCD Box DVI Technical data
Technical data
General
Dimensions:
Width: 372 mm
Height: 274 mm
Depth: 41 mm
Weight: 2920 g
Operation:
Storage:
Electrical data:
Power supply: 12 V DC
Current consumption: 1.7 A (typical)

Technical data 15" LCD Box DVI
LCD
Screen diagonal: 15"
Resolution:
VGA: 640 x 480
SVGA: 800 x 600
XGA: 1024 x 768

15" LCD Box DVI 01750060091
The digitally controllable LCD box with DVI-D interface features an autoscaling

Connections 15" LCD Box DVI 01750060091
Connections

2 DVI-D connector

15" LCD Box DVI 01750060091 Important safety precautions

− If the LCD panel breaks and fluid seeps out, avoid coming into
If fluid gets into the mouth or eyes, immediately wash your eyes or
mouth with water.
afterwards.
− The polarization filter screen is very sensitive and must be
protected against scratches.
− To clean the display screen, only wipe it off with a soft cloth.

− Metal casing
− TFT LCD module with integrated backlight.
− Inverter board for the power supply of the backlight.
bit RGB signals for the LCD component.

Structure and functions 15" LCD Box DVI 01750060091
DVI interface board and inverter board
1 Inverter board
2 Connecting cable between DVI interface board and inverter board
3 DVI interface board autoscaling
4 LCD panel (ODD) connection
5 LCD panel (EVEN) connection

15" LCD Box DVI 01750060091 Structure and functions
LCD panel
1 Inverter board connector

2 Backlight
3 DVI interface board connectors (EVEN and ODD)
A The connectors of the connecting cable (3) for the DVI interface board
(EVEN and ODD) differ from those for the LCD panel (A) as follows:
EVEN = 30-pin connector
ODD = 25-pin connector

Circuit diagram 15" LCD Box DVI 01750060091
Circuit diagram
PC TFT flat panel LCD (15")
VGA
DVI-D DVI-D
DVI interface board
autoscaling
+12V
Inverter for
backlight
Backlight on/off
(special electronics)
DVI-D cable
Length Part number

2.3 m 01750058006
3.2 m 01750058007
5.2 m 01750058008

15" LCD Box DVI 01750060091 Pin assignment
Pin assignment
DVI-D connection
DVI-D (24 + 1) F
17 24 C5

4 T.M.D.S DATA 4- N.C.
5 T.M.D.S DATA 4+ N.C.
6 DDC CLOCK Yes
7 DDC DATA Yes
8 ANALOG VERT. SYNC N.C.
14 + 5 V POWER Yes
15 GND Yes

Pin assignment 15" LCD Box DVI 01750060091

C5 N.C.
Pin Signal Comment

1 GND PC
3 + 12 V PC

15" LCD Box DVI 01750060091 Technical data
Technical data
General
Dimensions:
Width: 372 mm
Height: 274 mm
Depth: 41 mm
Weight: 2920 g
Operation:
Storage:
LCD
Screen diagonal: 15“
Resolution:
VGA: 640 X 480
SVGA: 800 x 600
XGA: 1024 x 768

Technical data 15" LCD Box DVI 01750060091

Touchscreen for LCD Monitor (USB)
Part number:
01750106261 Touchscreen 14.8" without LCF for 12.1" LCD monitor
01750106264 Touchscreen 14.8" with LCF for 12.1" LCD monitor
01750106267 Touchscreen 15" without LCF
01750106268 Touchscreen 15" with LCF
01750109609 Touch controller, WN, USB, 0.3 m, type B
01750028418 Touchware CD
The touchscreen must have a ground connection with the chassis by

i means of the extending green wire on the connector. If it doesn't the
ground connection must be retrofitted.
Structure
The touch sensor is included in the protective screen.
The touchscreen monitor consists of the standard LCD, the touch pane
covering it and the touch controller with USB interface. Voltage is supplied via
the USB port on the touch controller.

Operation Touchscreen for LCD Monitor (USB)
Operation
The touch system employs the analogue-capacitive technology; it consists of a
glass plate with a fused-on transparent conductive thin film coating. An
additional glass coating protects the sensor. Electrodes printed along the
edges uniformly distribute a low-voltage field over the conductive layer.
When touching the touchscreen surface with the finger, the capacitive coupling
with the electric field causes a brief electrical current flow to the point of
contact. The electrical current from each point of contact is proportional to the
distance of the finger to the edges. The controller measures this ratio, on the
basis of which it determines the point of contact and signals its position via the
interface to the PC.

Touchscreen for LCD Monitor (USB) LED indicator on touch controller
LED indicator on touch controller

The touch controller has an LED indicator which enables a visual check of the
ready status and operability.
1 2
1 Touch controller 2 LED Touch controller
The LED is lit as soon as the touch controller is provided with voltage. After
receiving a valid command, the LED display becomes weaker. When the
sensor is touched, the LED lights up brightly. The LED blinks if the power-on
self-test reveals a problem.
Error Flashing frequency within 10 seconds

RAM error 1
ROM error 2
A / D error 3
EEPROM error 4
Analog error 5
If these errors occur, the touch controller is defective and must be replaced.

Pin assignment Touchscreen for LCD Monitor (USB)
Pin assignment
Touch controller cable
USB 4-pin
3 4
Pin Assignment
1 +5V
2 D-
3 D+
4 GND

Touchscreen for LCD Monitor (USB) Technical data
Technical data
Touchscreen
General information
Technology: Analog capacitive
Resolution: 1024 touch points per axis within the calibrated
field
Speed: Max. 115 touches per second
Active touch area: Exact coordinates from 0.1" distance from the
electrodes on the edges
Light transmission: 85 - 95 % at 550 mm
Sensor thickness: 0.125" (± 0.01)
Touchscreen thickness: 8 mm
Reliability
FCC certification: Class A

Technical data Touchscreen for LCD Monitor (USB)

Receipt Printer TP07/NP07
This chapter describes the following model of the thermal receipt printer TP07
and the matrix receipt printer NP07:
Part number Description
01750063915 Thermal receipt printer TP07
01750110039 Paper width: 76.2 mm, 82.5 mm (- 1 mm)
Outer receipt roll diameter:
max. 180 mm / 260 mm
01750057987 Matrix receipt printer NP07
01750110042 Paper width: 76.2 mm, 82.5 mm (- 1 mm)
Outer receipt roll diameter:
max. 180 mm / 260 mm
The thermal [NP07] receipt printer TP07 [NP07] is a modular built-in printer. It
consists of a thermal printing unit [matrix printing unit], integrated cutter and
the presenter (output transport) for variable receipt length. The paper path is
controlled by several paper sensors.
The following description contains no information on the normal operation of
the printer. You can find this information in the operating manual of the cash-
out system.

Connecting the printer Receipt Printer TP07/NP07
Connecting the printer

Connect the printer only when the system is disconnected from the
power supply.
Power supply
The printer is operated with 24 V DC. The 5 V voltage for the logic is
generated internally.
Data interface
USB connector type B

Receipt Printer TP07/NP07 Views of thermal printer TP07
Views of thermal printer TP07
Overall view
1 Presenter 5 Paper drive

2 Presenter rocking bar * 6 Paper roll
3 Cutter 7 Display (LED)
4 Thermal printing unit 8 Keys
* The presenter rocking bar has to be installed if the thermal print side is
on the inside of the paper roll (see the section "Setting the printer to the
paper type (only TP07)").

Views of thermal printer TP07 Receipt Printer TP07/NP07
Detail views
1 Lever to lift up the thermal array

2 Paper entry

1 Notch for 180 mm paper roll (A) 6 40 mm core diameter (A3) with
2 Adjustable weekend sensor 180 mm paper roll diameter
3 Notch for 260 mm paper roll (B) 7 18 mm core diameter (B1) with
4 18 mm core diameter (A1) with 260 mm paper roll diameter
180 mm paper roll diameter 8 25 mm core diameter (B2) with
260 mm paper roll diameter

Control panel
1 LINE FEED key

2 TEST key
3 POWER LED (green)
4 End of paper LED (yellow)
5 ERROR LED (red)

Ports
1 24 V DC power supply
2 Interface USB port, type B connector

Position of sensors
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
1 Paper-low sensor 4 Paper-out sensor

(adjustable) 5 Top of form (ToF) sensor
2 Control mark sensor on the 6 Thermal sensor of thermal array
rear (adjustable) 7 Cutter
3 Control mark sensor on the 8 Presenter output sensor
thermal print side (adjustable)

Receipt Printer TP07/NP07 Views of matrix printer NP07
Views of matrix printer NP07
Overall view
2 8
5 7
1 Printer control panel / 5 Cutter

printer controller 6 Presenter
2 Paper guide 7 Paper-low sensor adjustment
3 Control mark sensor 8 Paper roll holder
4 Matrix printing unit

Views of matrix printer NP07 Receipt Printer TP07/NP07
Detail views
1 Notch for 180 mm paper roll (A) 6 40 mm core diameter (A3) with
2 Adjustable weekend sensor 180 mm paper roll diameter
3 Notch for 260 mm paper roll (B) 7 18 mm core diameter (B1) with
260 mm paper roll diameter

Control panel
1 LINE FEED key

2 TEST key
3 POWER LED (green)
4 End of paper LED (yellow)
5 ERROR LED (red)

Views of matrix printer NP07 Receipt Printer TP07/NP07
Ports
1 24 V DC power supply
2 Interface USB port, type B connector

Position of sensors
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
1 Paper-low sensor 4 Carrier home position

(adjustable) 5 Thermal sensor (print head)
2 Control mark sensor on the 6 Top of form (ToF) sensor
print side (adjustable) 7 Cutter
3 Paper-out sensor 8 Presenter output sensor

Paper path monitoring Receipt Printer TP07/NP07
Paper path monitoring

Weekend sensor (PWE) Photosensor for weekend supply detection. The
photosensor is located on the paper roll holder.
Paper out (PE) The photosensor detects that the paper supply is
completely used up. It is used for automatic paper
feed. The photosensor is located on the paper
feed.
Mark detection (MK) Photosensor for mark control. The photosensor is
located on the right edge by default and can be
adjusted if necessary.
Top of Form (ToF) The photosensor controls the paper feed to the
sensor cutter and to the first print position. The
photosensor is located on the paper feed.
Cutter This switch controls the paper path through the
cutter.
Presenter output (PrA) The photosensor is used to control the paper path
through the presenter. The photosensor is placed
at the presenter exit.

Receipt Printer TP07/NP07 Functions
Functions
When the power is turned on, the firmware is started. The keys that are
pressed at power-on define the start conditions for the firmware. The
permanent parameters are loaded and the relevant settings made.
The firmware is not operable if an error is found during the test of external
storage or during initialization of the emulation. In this case, the firmware is
halted and it is no longer possible to communicate via the interface.
Power-on procedure
After the power is turned on, the printer is initialized. The following functions
are executed during the initialization:
− Processor initialization
− Memory test
− Define start conditions,
− Load values from parameter memory
− Execute mechanical reset (not in test mode),
− Establish ready state (not in test mode).

Status indicators Receipt Printer TP07/NP07
Status indicators
The status of the receipt printer is displayed by 3 LEDs. The statuses of the
individual LEDs are identified by the following abbreviations:
Abbreviation Status
0 LED is off
1 LED is on
x LED can be on or off
bl LED blinking
bl f LED blinking fast
Indicators at power-on
Green Yellow Red Status
bl bl bl Test mode (selection level)
Indicators when online

If test mode is not activated and error handling inactive, the display information
for normal operating state is built cyclically and output to the display.
1 x 0 Data set ready
x 0 x Paper is loaded
x bl x End of paper
x bl f x Sensor calibration
x 1 x Paper low
x x 1 Offline
x x bl Error (see section "ERROR LED blinking pattern")

Receipt Printer TP07/NP07 Functions of keys
Functions of keys
Normal operation
Pressing individual keys when the printer is in normal operational mode will
give priority to the execution of certain functions.
Keys pressed Function
None None
TEST Prints test printout
FEED Paper feed by 1/6". If the key is pressed for longer than
2 seconds, the paper is fed continuously until the key
combination is changed.
Do not press the FEED key during normal operation.
The key functions are triggered via a spontaneous functions 'job channel in the
device controller' and are executed with higher priority than the functions from
the emulation. For this reason, you should not hamper or corrupt emulation
functions during operations by executing key functions.

Functions of keys Receipt Printer TP07/NP07
Internal test
Internal test with paper

After the 'internal test with paper' has been selected (see section "Calling and
exiting the 'internal test with paper'") the selection mode is active. By pressing
the keys the 'internal test with paper' can be controlled.
Pressed key Function
TEST The TEST key is used to start the 'internal test with paper',
to start the test levels and to complete them.
FEED The FEED key is used to select the individual test levels
during the 'internal test with paper'.
TEST+FEED None
Internal test without paper

After the 'internal test without paper' has been selected (see section "Calling
and exiting the 'internal test without paper'") the selection mode is active. By
pressing the keys the 'internal test without paper' can be controlled.
TEST The TEST key is used to start the 'internal test without
paper', to start the test levels and to complete them.
during the 'internal test without paper'.
TEST+FEED None

Receipt Printer TP07/NP07 Internal test
Internal test
Calling and exiting the 'internal test with paper'

The print controller provides a test program divided into different test levels.
This program allows you to check the main printer functions.
• Press the TEST key and release it.
• Press the TEST key again and keep the TEST key pressed until the test
printout is output.
• The keys are blinking and you can select a test with the FEED key (see
section "Indicators for the selected test level").
• Start the test with the TEST key.
• Press the TEST key to exit the test level. The printer returns to the
selection level (all LEDs blinking).
• Exit the internal test by pressing the TEST key in selection level.
When entering the internal test, the controller disables the USB port. After
completion of the internal test the printer is initialized, the interfaces are
released and the message ‘Power failure’ is issued.

Internal test Receipt Printer TP07/NP07
Test printout
Printer NP07 Printer TP07

Calling and exiting the 'internal test without

paper'
This program makes it possible to check the most important printer functions
that are possible without paper.
• Press the TEST key.
• Select a test using the FEED key (see section "Indicators for the selected
test level") and start the test by pressing the TEST key.

Indicators for the selected test level

In the selection mode (LEDs are blinking), the LEDs show the selected test
level in binary code when the FEED key is pressed. The LEDs have the
following rating:
LED Significance
Red 4
Yellow 2
Green 1
Binary display of the test level
Red Yellow Green Test level Description

0 0 1 1 Paper sensors
0 1 0 2 Printer test
0 1 1 3 Statistical information
1 0 0 4 Set E parameters to default values
1 0 1 5 Mark test or cutter / presenter test
1 1 0 6 Carrier test (NP07 only)
1 1 1 7 Calibrating EEPROM sensor values
Explanation:
0 = Off
1 = ON

Description of the test programs
Test level 1 (paper sensor test)

At level 1, the two paper sensors 'Paper out' and 'Paper low' are displayed on
activation.
This test level can only be selected when the printer is undergoing an internal
test with paper or an internal test without paper. The green LED is lit.
The order of actuation is not specified. The yellow LED lights up to indicate a
sensor status change.
If the paper has been removed at least once from the paper sensor ‘Paper
out,’ the printer automatically performs a reset when the test level is exited.
Test level 2 (printer test)

At level 2, the printer test is executed. This test level can only be selected
when the printer is undergoing an internal test with paper. The printer test
requires that paper be present in the printer. If the paper is not sufficient for the
printer test, the printer automatically performs a reset.
The printer prints all character sets in Font A and Font B, such as PC437,
Katakana, PC850, PC860, PC863, PC865, WPC1252, PC866, PC852, PC858,
Space page.
Test level 3 (statistical information)

Statistical information is printed out in level 3. This test level can only be
selected when the printer is undergoing an internal test with paper. Paper must
be present in the printer for printing out statistical data. If the paper is not
sufficient for the printout, the printer automatically performs a reset.
The printout consists of three blocks of information. The first block shows the
current statistical values of the printer controller, the second shows specific
firmware (FW) information, and the third block is printed out as a form
(date/name) and can be filled out by service personnel.
Statistical values of the printer controller
i The statistical values of the printer controller can be set via the KDIAG
program when components are replaced.

Abbreviation Description
EEP. Indicates whether or not the EEPROM checksum is in order
TDOT. Shows the total number of printed dots
DOT. Shows the number of dots printed with the current thermal
array
HEAD Shows the number of thermal array changes
TLFS. Shows the total number of line feeds *
LFS. Shows the number of line feeds executed with the current
line feed motor *
LFCH. Shows the number of line feed motor changes
TCUT. Shows the total number of paper cuts
CUT. Shows the number of paper cuts executed with the current
cutter
CUTC. Shows the number of cutter changes
TRET. Shows the total number of retracts
RET. Shows the number of retracts with the current retract unit
(optional)
RETC. Shows the number of changed retract units
TPRE. Shows the total number of receipts output
PRE. Shows the number of receipts output with the current printer
unit
PREC. Shows the number of presenter changes
* Be sure that all line feeds are counted.

If the printer receives a cut command (GS V 0), it pulls the paper into
the cutter and transports it back to the first print position. This
corresponds to 20 additional line feeds.

TCAM. Shows the total number of carrier movements *
CAM. Shows the number of carrier movements executed with the
current carrier unit *
CAMC. Shows the number of changed carrier units *
POC. Shows the total number of power-on cycles
POT. Shows the number of operating hours
UPD. Shows the number of EEPROM updates
PCB. Indicates the revision level
SNO. Indicates the serial number
DAT. Indicates the production date
REV. Indicates the revision number
* only relevant for matrix printer
Firmware (FW) information
VERS. Indicates the FW version
DAT. Indicates the release date of the FW
Form
DATE Date of services (handwritten)
NAME Name of technician (handwritten)

Test printout of statistical data

Test level 4 (reset EEPROM parameters to default values)

In level 4 you can set the default values for the storage settings and for the
user configuration.
test with paper or an internal test without paper. A software reset is then
performed.
• To set the default values, press the TEST key when the red LED is
blinking.
If you do not want to reset the EEPROM parameters, press the FEED key
to return to the 'internal test with paper' or the 'internal test without paper'.
You can print out the current EEPROM parameters via the internal test with
paper (see section "Internal test with paper"). You can find the EEPROM
parameters under the header 'Memory Switches'.
Default values
Storage setting
Auto Line Feed disabled
Black mark sensor disabled
Endurance Test disabled
User configuration
Paper width 80.0 mm
Paper is not at start position after power on present paper
Print density LIGHT [-6 ... 0 ... +6] DARK

Test level 5 mark test or cutter / presenter test

In level 5 you can perform an uninterrupted test of the mark control or cutter /
presenter test. This test level can only be selected when the printer is
undergoing an internal test with paper.
If mark detection is enabled, the mark control test is activated. If it is not
enable, the cutter / presenter test is executed. The mark control of cutter /
presenter test requires that paper be present in the printer.
If the paper is not sufficient for the test, the printer automatically performs a
reset.
Mark control
The printer prints a horizontal line at the control mark and then performs a form
feed. The next mark is looked for, the paper is then transported to the cutter,
cut off and output via the presenter. The paper is retracted to the 1st print
position (ToF). The printer then performs the test continuously.
The test can be aborted by pressing the TEST key.
The operating state of the photosensors are indicated by LEDs.
LED Function
Green Presenter output
Yellow Top of form (ToF) sensor
Red Paper-out sensor

Cutter / presenter test

The printer prints a horizontal line in the first line of the receipt, then the paper
is advanced approx. 100 mm (receipt length), cut and output. Then the paper
on the receipt roll is advanced to its first print position. The printer then
performs the test continuously.
The operating state of the photosensors are indicated by LEDs.
LED Function
Green Presenter output
Yellow Top of form (ToF) sensor
Red Paper-out sensor
Test printout of mark control and cutter / presenter test

Test level 6 (carrier test) (only NP07)

Level 6 is not used in the TP06, whereas a carrier test is executed in case of
the NP06. The carrier is continuously moved forwards and then backwards
again.
The carrier home position is indicated by a green lit LED.
LED Function
Green Carrier home position
Test level 7 (set EEPROM sensor values to factory

default)
In level 7 you can reset all EEPROM sensor values to the factory default. The
status register of the sensors is deleted. This test level can only be selected
when the printer is undergoing an 'internal test with paper' or an 'internal test
without paper'.
• To reset the EEPROM sensor values, press the TEST key when the red
LED is blinking.
If you do not want to reset the EEPROM sensor values, press the FEED
key to return to the 'internal test with paper' or the 'internal test without
paper'.
The result is output in a test printout in the section 'EEPROM sensor values'
(see also section "Calling and exiting the 'internal test with paper'").
All sensors and their default settings are output (see table below):
Sensor Sensor value Calibration status
PAPER_END : XX CAL
PRESENTER_OUT : XX CAL
PAPER_NEAR_END : XX CAL
MARK_SENSOR : 0 -
TOP_OF_FORM : XX CAL
In addition to the sensor designation, the sensor value (XX) and the calibration
status is printed out. If the sensor has been calibrated, this is indicated by the
letters 'CAL' (CALIBRATED = calibrated) in the calibration status. If the sensor

Receipt Printer TP07/NP07 Paper control
value shows a zero (0) and the calibration status shows '-', the respective
sensor has not been calibrated.
If a fault occurs during calibration, the sensor value shows '-' and the
calibration status 'ERR'.
Paper control
How paper control is performed

The device control can move the paper in two ways:
1. A paper feed is performed by a certain number of motor steps. Paper feeds
are called, for example, from within the emulation by line feeds.
2. Paper positioning is carried out to move to special positions in the printer
(cutting position, print position, receipt output in the presenter). The device
control positions the paper dependent on the status of the paper sensors.
Paper positioning is started, for example, by commands (form feed, eject,
feed-in) from the emulation to the device control. Only the device control
knows the exact positions.
In the printer, the PE and ToF photosensors are used for positioning. The PrA
photosensor is used in the presenter. Paper feeding is carried out exclusively
by the stepper motor for transport in the printer. When the paper reaches the
presenter, the stepper motor in the presenter is driven in addition. When the
paper is ejected after a cut, only the stepper motor in the presenter is driven.
The minimum paper length which is cut off at feeding in and the minimum
distance of the marks on the paper has to be large enough as to ensure
secure paper feeding in the printer at all times.

Paper control Receipt Printer TP07/NP07
Replenishing the paper supply

Feed the paper by hand into the paper channel of the printing unit. The printer
pulls the paper in automatically and outputs the paper via the presenter.
For correct paper feed or paper transport the front edge of the paper has to be
cut with scissors to get a right-angled sharp edge.
Feed the leading edge of the paper into the paper guides.
Once the paper has been properly inserted, pulled in and output, the following
text is automatically printed at the beginning of the paper roll:
If you can read this text,
Autoloading is successful
Remaining paper supply

Once 'paper-out' is recognized, there is still a remaining quantity of paper
available for printing, namely 15 lines at 1/6 inch each.
If 'paper torn' is detected, no more printouts can be executed. The yellow LED
blinks and reports 'paper out'.
Mark detection
The marks on the paper are detected with enabled mark control and enabled
mark detection during forward paper feeding. When mark detection is enabled,
the photosensor MK is activated for mark monitoring. Synchronization on a
mark takes place when the rear mark edge is detected. If no mark is detected,
error message 'Mark detection error' is issued. The marks can be located on
the left or the right or on both sides at the same height.

Receipt Printer TP07/NP07 Setting the printer to the paper type (only TP07)
Setting the printer to the paper type (only

TP07)
The following table shows when the presenter rocking bar has to be installed
and when not (also see the section "Views of thermal printer TP07", figure
"Complete device", item 2).
Thermal layer on the inner Thermal layer on the outer
surface of the paper roll surface of the paper roll
Presenter yes no
rocking bar
installed
Installation is described in the following section.
Installing the presenter rocking bar
'OPEN' is shown on the latching

mechanism. Press the area marked
'OPEN' down in the direction of the
arrow (1).
Slightly raise the presenter in the
direction of the arrow (2) and lift it out
of the printer.

Setting the printer to the paper type (only TP07) Receipt Printer TP07/NP07
Push the opening (1) on the right arm

of the presenter rocking bar over the
bolt (2) on the presenter.
Carefully move the left arm outward in

the direction of the arrow (1) until you
can push the opening (2) in the arm
over the left-hand bolt of the
presenter.
Make sure that the bolt (3) on the right
does not slide out of the mounting.

Receipt Printer TP07/NP07 Setting the printer to the paper type (only TP07)
Push the shaft mountings (1) and (3)

4 3 2 1 over the corresponding shafts (2) and
(4) in the direction of the arrow.
Lower the presenter in the direction of

the arrow (1).
'CLOSE' is shown on the latching
mechanism.
Press the area marked 'CLOSE' down
in the direction of the arrow (2) until
the latching mechanism audibly locks
into place.

Reset at power-on Receipt Printer TP07/NP07
Reset at power-on
This paper initialization is performed at power-on. The paper initialization sets
the paper in the printer to first print position.
Initialization without printer on 1st print position

There are two options for printer reset without paper to the 1st print position:
− If there is no document at the 1st print position when the printer is switched
on and Memory Switch 7-5 is set to OFF, the printer outputs the document
via the presenter.
− If there is no document at the 1st print position when the printer is switched
on and Memory Switch 7-5 is set to ON, the printer switches to offline
status. In addition, the error message 'Operation following power-on error'
is issued (see section "Recoverable errors").
Sensor calibration
To prevent sensor faults caused by wear and tolerances, the printer has a
sensor calibration feature. The calibration results are stored in EEPROM to be
able to use them after a power failure.
All beam interruption and reflective sensors are calibrated.
This happens automatically when a new receipt roll is inserted.
During calibration, the weekend (PWE), paper-out (PE), top of form (ToF) and
presenter exit (PrA) sensors must not detect any paper.
• Remove the paper roll (see chapter "Receipt Printer TP07", or "Receipt
Printer NP07", section "Changing the paper roll" in the operating manual).
After these sensors have been calibrated, the printer waits for paper.
• Insert a paper roll (see chapter "Receipt Printer TP07", or "Receipt Printer
NP07", section "Changing the paper roll" in the operating manual).

Receipt Printer TP07/NP07 Sensor calibration
After the paper has been inserted, the weekend (PWE) and mark detection
(MK) sensors are calibrated.
During calibration, the yellow LED blinks quickly.
If calibration results in a value between '1' and '254', the value is accepted. If
calibration results in '0' or '255' there is an error.
Function of the beam interruption and reflective sensors
Beam interruption sensors:

The light source emits light and a
photosensor detects it if it is not
blocked by the paper. For calibration
purposes, the light intensity of the
source '0' is increased until the
receiver detects the light.
There must be no paper in the printer.
Reflective sensors:
The light source emits light and a
photosensor detects it if it is reflected
by the paper. For calibration purposes,
the light intensity of the source '0' is
increased until the receiver detects the
light.
There must be paper in the area of the
sensor.

Sensor calibration Receipt Printer TP07/NP07
Calibration of the mark sensor

If the mark control is activated, the mark sensor is also calibrated.
The mark sensor must detect the black
markings. To this end, the light
intensity is increased until the reflected
light is detected in the white area and
in the black area.
If during booting a '0' is found in EEPROM for mark detection, the printer
searches for a mark, transporting the paper in steps of 2.5 mm each.
Once the printer has found the first mark, it searches for the second mark. If
after 20 steps it has found no second mark, it aborts the process. It also issues
the error message 'Mark detection error' (see section "Recoverable errors").
If the paper roll is changed while the mark sensor is calibrated, the mark
sensor is calibrated again in a second procedure. The paper is pulled in up to
the first mark and is then transported backwards. The printer then transports
the paper forward in steps of 2.5 mm each until the next mark is detected.
An average value is calculated from the detected sensor voltage (DAC) for the
black area and the white area. This average is the new value for the sensor
voltage in the area of mark detection.
Setting sensor values to default

In level 7 you can initialize or set all EEPROM sensor values to factory default
(see section "Test level 7 (setting EEPROM sensor values to factory default)").
The status register of the sensors is deleted. The printer is reset and begins
with initial calibration.
Calibrating the ToF sensor

With the help of the KDIAG program, you can determine the print position on
paper with marks.

Receipt Printer TP07/NP07 Mark control
Mark control
i When replacing sub-components, the control mark sensor has to be
calibrated using KDIAG.
Switching on the mark control

Mark control can be switched on using KDIAG.
Disabling mark control

Mark control can be disabled using KDIAG and via test level 4 (see section
"Test level 4 (reset EEPROM parameters to default values)").

Mark control Receipt Printer TP07/NP07
Positioning the control mark sensor
i The control mark sensor needs to be positioned in such a way that it

can detect the control marks on the paper rolls that are being used.
For this purpose, the thermal receipt printer TP07 has two control mark
sensors each on the thermal print side and/or on the rear side of the
printer (see chapter "Receipt Printer TP07", section "Control mark
sensor position" in the operating manual).
The matrix printer NP07 has three control mark sensor positions on
the print side (see chapter "Receipt Printer NP07", section "Control
mark sensor position" in the operating manual).
• Remove the paper roll (see chapter "Receipt Printer TP07" or "Receipt


thermal print side (only TP07)
The control mark sensor can be positioned either on the right or left,
depending on the position of the control marks on the thermal print side.
The following example shows how to move the control mark sensor from the
right to the left.
Press the two catches in the direction
shown by the arrow (1) and remove
the control mark sensor from its
mounting in the direction shown (2).
Mount the control mark sensor in the
left position (3).


print side (only NP07)
The control mark sensor can be located on the right, in the middle or on the
left, depending on the position of the control marks on the print side.
right to the left.
3 shown by the arrow (1) and remove
4 mounting in the direction shown (2).
required position (3) or (4).


rear (only TP07)
The control mark sensor can be positioned either on the right or left,
depending on the position of the control marks on the rear.
right to the left.
3 Press the two catches in the direction
left position (3).

Changing the position of the control mark sensor

between the thermal print side and the rear (only TP07)
General
The control mark sensor can be positioned either on the thermal print side or
on the rear, depending on the position of the control marks on the paper roll.
Use a suitable tool to bend the metal
bracket (1) to a vertical position and
remove the spacer plate (2) from its
mounting as shown by the arrow.
Changing from the thermal print side to the rear

the control mark sensor (2) from its
mounting.

On the rear side there are two holders

(1) and (2) for the control mark sensor.
i Lead the connecting cable

through the cutout (3).
When inserting the distance
plate make sure that the
connecting cable is not
damaged.
Reinstall it by following the same steps
in reverse order.
Changing from the rear to the thermal print side

Remove the cable from the cutout (3).


mounting (1) or (2).
Mount the spacer plate (1) in the

mountings (2) to (4).
3
2

General
Bend the metal bracket (1) back into

its original position with the aid of a
suitable tool.
• Insert a paper roll (see chapter "Receipt Printer TP07", or "Receipt Printer
NP07", section "Changing the paper roll" in the operating manual).

Paper out Receipt Printer TP07/NP07
Paper out
Physical paper out

If no paper is detected at the BoF/PE sensor any longer during cyclical
monitoring, 'paper out' is defined and the status is reported internally. This
internal message is also sent when paper is removed manually.
Paper out during printing

If the device control unit detects 'paper out' or 'no paper' at the PE sensor
when printing starts, an error has occurred.
The print function is aborted and an error handling procedure for paper out is
activated.
The error handling procedure indicates the error on the indicator panel
(analogous with paper feed error).
Paper-out detection
The status of the PE photosensor is reported to the host as 'paper out'
message.
Paper-low detection
The status of the PWE photosensor is reported to the host as paper low status.
The message is used to determine the last print jobs. The message does not
have any influence on the operation of the paper control.

Receipt Printer TP07/NP07 Error handling
Error handling
Error indicators
Errors are indicated at the beginning of error handling.
Off Off Blinking Paper jam while cutting
Off Off Blinking Carrier error (only NP07)
Off Off Blinking Paper jam before cutting
Off Off Blinking Control mark detection error
Off Off Blinking Paper jam after cutting – in presenter
Off Off Blinking TOF position not found
Off Off Blinking Operation after power-on error
Off Off Blinking Timeout for StartOfJob
Off Off Blinking Print head too hot
Off Off Blinking Voltage too high
Off Off Blinking Low voltage error
Off Off Blinking Device error
ERROR LED blinking pattern
Recoverable errors
This pattern is called the 'positive' blinking pattern.
In case of the positive blinking pattern, you must count how often the ERROR-
LED is switched on.

Error handling Receipt Printer TP07/NP07
Error Description ERROR LED blinking pattern

Paper jam The automatic 1
during cutter does not
cutting work because it approx. 5 sec
does not leave
or does not
reach the home
position.
Carrier The carrier does 2
error (only not leave or
NP07) reach its home approx. 5 sec
position.
Paper jam A paper jam is 3
prior to detected
cutting between print approx. 5 sec
starting position
and ToF sensor.
Control The printer does 4
mark not find the black
detection mark. approx. 5 sec
error
Paper jam After the paper 5
after is cut, a paper
cutting – jam is detected approx. 5 sec
in in the printer's
presenter presenter
(receipt output).
LED is off
LED is on


Paper jam After the paper 6
after is cut, a paper is
cutting – detected in the approx. 5 sec
in retractor printer's
retractor.
LED is off
LED is on

The following errors can be recovered by removing and inserting the paper roll.
TOF After cutting the 7
position printer doesn’t
not found find the TOF approx. 5 sec
position.
Operation After switch-on 8
after the paper is not
power-on in the print start approx. 5 sec
error position. This
error is enabled
by memory
switch 7-4.
Timeout StartOfJob ∞
for timeout
StartOfJob occurred approx. 5 sec
because no
EndOfJob was
received within
the specified
time.
LED is off
LED is on

Unrecoverable errors
This pattern is called the 'negative' blinking pattern.
In case of the negative blinking pattern you must count how often the ERROR-
LED is switched off.
Tempera- Abnormal print 1
ture error head
temperature approx. 5 sec
(NP07) or
thermal array
temperature
(TP07).
High The power 3
voltage supply voltage is
error extremely high. approx. 5 sec
Low The power 4
voltage supply voltage is
error extremely low. approx. 5 sec
Printer The loaded 5
error printer driver
does not approx. 5 sec
correspond to
the firmware
LED is off
LED is on

Troubleshooting
i Troubleshooting is described for receipt printer TP07. The procedure is

the same for receipt printer NP07.
Paper jam
Cut off the paper at the paper support.
Remove the paper roll with the paper
roll holder up and out of the printer (1).
Remove the rest of the paper by
turning the wheel in the direction of the
arrow (2).
Presenter
'OPEN' is shown on the latching

mechanism. Press the green area
marked 'OPEN' (1) down in the
direction of the arrow. Slightly raise
the presenter in the direction of the
arrow (2) and lift it out of the printer.
Remove any remaining paper.

Thermal layer on the inner surface of the paper roll (only TP07)
If paper is used with the thermal print

side on the inside of the paper roll, you
may have to remove any scraps of
paper from underneath the presenter
rocking bar.
Press the shaft of the presenter
rocking bar (1) down in the direction of
the arrow and lift out any scraps of
paper (2).
Cutter
When the cutter is in its home position you can see a red plastic mark at
position (1).
Check whether the cutter is in home
position. If not, turn the knurled wheel
(2) until you can see the red plastic
mark (1) on the upper side of the
cutter.

Thermal printing unit (only TP07)
Press the release lever (1) in the

direction shown by the arrow and
swing the thermal printing unit (2)
upwards.
Remove any remaining paper.
Matrix printing unit (only NP07)
• Remove the ribbon cartridge from the printing unit (see chapter "Receipt
• Cut the remaining paper off at the paper guide, and remove the paper from
the printing unit.
• Insert the ribbon cartridge in printing unit.
Mark control detection error
• Check whether the paper roll is inserted correctly or a paper roll without
control marks is inserted.

Cutter
When the cutter is in its home position you can see a red plastic mark at
position (1).
Check whether the cutter is in home
position. If not, turn the knurled wheel
(2) until you can see the red plastic
mark (1) on the upper side of the
cutter.
Temperature error in the print head or thermal array
• Replace the print head or the thermal array (see the section
"Removing/installing the components"). If the error is still indicated, replace
the printer (see the chapter "Removal/Installation of Components").
High voltage / low voltage error
• Check the power lines and the power supply and replace them if necessary
(see chapter "Removal/Installation of Components").
• If the error condition persists, replace the printer (see chapter

"Removal/Installation of Components").

Printer error
• Load the following six files in the printer via KDIAG.

– NP07.BIN – TP07.BIN
– NP07.FNT – TP07.FNT
– NP07.FRM – TP07.FRM
– NP07.LVF – TP07.LVF
– NP07.PUT – TP07.PUT
– NP07.SSV – TP07.SSV

Receipt Printer TP07/NP07 Controller
Controller
The central control of the printer is handled by a 16-bit microcontroller. To
comply with the required range of functions, the following function blocks are
integrated in the controller:
Memory
− 1 MByte flash memory with boot sector for firmware and character
generators
− 4 MBit SRAM
− 256 Byte NVRAM
EPLD (programmable logic)
− Contains memory addressing

− I/O decoding
Interfaces
− USB
Power control
− Power driver for the paper feed unit stepper motor

− Power driver for thermal head
Sensors
Photosensor for
− Weekend and paper-out sensor
− Mark detection
− Presenter output
− Top of form (ToF) sensor

Pin assignment Receipt Printer TP07/NP07
Pin assignment
24 V connector
Type of connector:
AMP Modu 2-pin M
Pin Description
1 24 V
2 Ground
Data connector
USB type B, 4-pin M
3 4
Pin Description
1 VCC (+ 5 V)
2 - DATA
3 + DATA
4 GND

Receipt Printer TP07/NP07 Maintenance and service

• After each paper change, remove paper scraps, paper dust and foreign
objects, e.g. with a brush.
• Check the thermal array or the print head for signs of wear.
Maintenance counter
When printer parts such as the thermal array or the print head are replaced,
the maintenance counter must be reset.
It is reset using the program KDIAG.

Maintenance and service Receipt Printer TP07/NP07
Remedying poor print quality
Matrix printer NP07

A print image that is poor or too light may be caused by a dirty printing area or
a worn print head.
The print head can be very hot if the printer has been printing for a
longer period of time right beforehand. Wait until the print head has
cooled off and the danger of causing a burn no longer exists.
i The ribbon cartridge and the print head are consumables which the
customer has to order separately (see also chapter "Journal Printer
NP07", section "Consumables" in the operating manual).
• Remove paper scraps, paper dust and foreign objects from the printing
area using tweezers, a brush or a vacuum cleaner.
If that does not improve the print image, replace the print head (see section
"Print head").

Receipt Printer TP07/NP07 Maintenance and service
Thermal printer TP07

Poor print quality can be caused by a dirty thermal array.
The thermal array can be very hot if the printer was used for a longer
period immediately beforehand. Wait until it has cooled off and the
danger of causing a burn no longer exists.
i The thermal array is a consumable which the customer has to order

separately (see also chapter "Journal Printer TP07", section
"Consumables" in the operating manual).
• Remove paper scraps, paper dust and foreign objects from the thermal
array.
Use a soft, lint-free cloth moistened with pure isopropyl alcohol (e.g.
ISOPADS).
Do not close the printer until the alcohol has completely evaporated.

Technical data Receipt Printer TP07/NP07
Technical data
Electrical characteristics
Supply voltage: 24 V ± 10 %
Power consumption:
Printing: max. 120 W
Standby: max. 5 W
Connector: AMP Modu 2-pin M
Interface to the host

The interface is a USB port.
Room classification
Operating temperature: 0 °C ... + 50 °C
Storage temperature: - 10 °C ... + 70 °C
Humidity:
Operation: 5 % ... 95 %
Storage: 5 % ... 98 %

Receipt Printer TP07/NP07 Technical data
Print head
Matrix printing unit NP07

Print method: Impact serial
9 pins
Vertical pin distance: 0.353 mm
Pin diameter: 0.3 mm
Max. pin frequency: 1500 Hz
Resolution:
Horizontal: 158 dpi
Vertical: 72 dpi
Thermal printing unit TP07

Print method: Thermal
Print speed: 150 mm/s
Resolution:
Horizontal: 203 dpi
Vertical: 203 dpi
Ribbon cartridge
Cartridge: Continuous ribbon
Ribbon cartridge: Nylon ribbon
Width: 11 - 0.3 mm
Color: purple (black optional)
Service life:
Color: black 2,000,000 characters
Color: purple 6,000,000 characters

Technical data Receipt Printer TP07/NP07
Paper feed unit

Paper feed: Stepper motor
Carrier drive: Stepper motor (only NP07)
Feed keys: 1
Print functions
Print width: NP07: 63.84 mm
TP07: 80 mm at 640 dots
Character matrix:
Font A (W x H): NP07: 9 x (9 + 3 spacing)
Font B (W x H): 7 x (9 + 2 spacing)
Font A (W x H): TP07: 12 x 24 + 2 spacing
Font B (W x H): 8 x 17 + 2 spacing
Character size:
Font A (W x H): NP07: 1.92 x 3.17 mm
Font B (W x H): 1.44 x 3.17 mm
Font A (W x H): TP07: 1.75 x 3.0 mm
Font B (W x H): 1.25 x 2.1 mm
Number of characters:
Font A: NP07: 22 cpl at 8.84 cpi
24 cpl at 9.95 cpi
32 cpl at 13.26 cpi
Font B: 40 cpl at 15.91 cpi
44 cpl at 17.64 cpi
Font A: TP07: 28 cpl at 10.2 cpi
36 cpl at 12.7 cpi
41 cpl at 14.5 cpi
57 cpl at 20.3 cpi
Character set: IBM character set II
with 13 country-specific character sets
PC850 (multilingual)

Receipt Printer TP07/NP07 Technical data
PC852 (Latin 2)
PC858 (Latin 2, Euro Sign)
PC860 (Portuguese)
PC863 (Canadian French)
PC865 (Nordic)
PC866 (Cyrillic)
WPC1252 (Windows)
Kathakana
Country-specific character
sets: Download of user-defined characters possible
Font attributes: Normal type
Bold type
Height and width (up to 8 times)
Underlined
Rotated print (90°)
Mirroring
Inverted
Dimensions and weights

For a printer with For a printer with
180 mm receipt roll 260 mm receipt roll
without receipt roll without receipt roll
Depth: 434.5 mm 529 mm
Width: 141.5 mm 141.5 mm
Weight:
NP07: approx. 3.8 kg approx. 3.8 kg
TP07: approx. 3.4 kg approx. 3.4 kg

Paper specifications Receipt Printer TP07/NP07
Paper specifications
Matrix printer NP07

Paper quality: Z 100
Paper type: paper on rolls
Paper color: white
Paper weight: approx. 55 to 90 g/m2 ± 4 %
Paper thickness: approx. 0.06 - 0.1 mm
Paper smoothness: min. 20 Bekk sec.

Paper quality: OJI KF50 – HDA or equivalent
Paper type: thermal paper rolls (thermal layer on the
outside and inside)
Paper color: white
Paper weight: approx. 55 to 80 g/m2

Receipt Printer TP07/NP07 Paper specifications
Receipt roll dimensions

Paper width: NP07: 76.2 mm , 82.5 mm (- 1 mm)
TP07: 80 mm (- 1 mm) (3.15 inches)
Outer receipt roll diameter: max. 180 mm / 260 mm
A receipt roll with an outer diameter of
260 mm cannot be used in all
configurations.
End of paper: not glued to roll sleeve
Inside diameter of roll sleeve: 18 mm, 25 mm or 40 mm (+ 1 mm) *
Wall thickness of roll sleeve: 3 mm (± 0.3 mm)
Roll sleeve material: cardboard / plastic
* When ordering the paper rolls you have to specify one value.
Control mark print

Opacity: ≥ 85 % according to DIN 53 146
PCS value control mark: ≥ 70 % according to DIN 66 236
Position: left or right or both on the same level
Reflection factor Ro: ≥ 70 % according to DIN 53 145 part 1
Control mark dimensions

Mark height: 5 mm ± 0.1 mm
Mark width: 8 mm ± 0.1 mm
Mark color: black, uncolored black
Black mark distance: min. 70 mm, max. 210 mm

Paper specifications Receipt Printer TP07/NP07
Front thermal print side (TP07) and/or print side (NP07)
min. 70 mm, max. 210 mm
8
5
1 Feeding direction
Rear side (only TP07)
18
1 Feeding direction

Receipt Printer TP07/NP07 Paper specifications
Preprinted receipts
The receipts can be preprinted on the front side (TP07 and NP07) and on the
back side (TP07) in the gray area (see illustration).
In case of preprinting outside the specified area the PCS value must be lower
than 40%.
Front thermal print side (TP07) and/or print side (NP07)
8.5
8.5
1 Feeding direction Pre-printing
Rear side (only TP07)
18
1 Feeding direction Pre-printing

Removing / installing the components Receipt Printer TP07/NP07
Removing / installing the components
Print head
• Turn off the power by unplugging the power supply connector (see section
"Connections", item 1).
• Remove the ribbon cartridge (see chapter "Receipt Printer NP07", section
"Replacing the ribbon cartridge" in the operating manual).
Press the respective retaining clip in
the direction of the arrows (1) and (2)
as far as possible. Pull the print head
(3) slightly out of its mounting until you
can detach the cable from the old print
head. Connect the cable to the new
3 print head, and carefully place the new
print head in its mounting.

Receipt Printer TP07/NP07 Removing / installing the components
Fix the print head (1) in its mounting

by pressing the respective retaining
clip in the direction of the arrows (2)
and (3) as far as possible.
Insert the ribbon cartridge.
1 Reinstall it by following the same steps

in reverse order.
Thermal array
• Remove the printer (see chapter "Removal/Installation of Components")

and place it on a level surface.
Loosen the screws (1) to (2) on the left
and the corresponding screws on the
right. Remove the printing unit (3)
upwards and set it down.

Removing / installing the components Receipt Printer TP07/NP07
Remove the ribbon cable (1) from the

printing unit in the direction of the
arrow.
Loosen the screws (1) and (2). Press

the green lever in the direction of the
arrow (3) and swing the thermal
printing unit up. Loosen the screws
until ...
... you can remove the thermal array

(1) from the printing unit grasping it on
the sides (2) and (3).
i Always hold the thermal array on


in reverse order.

Journal Printer TP06/NP06
This chapter describes the following model of the thermal journal printer TP06
and the matrix journal printer NP06:
Part number Description
01750057142 Thermal journal printer TP06
01750110043 Paper width: 76.2 mm (- 1 mm) (3 inches)
Outer journal roll diameter:
max. 80 mm / 110 mm
01750064218 Matrix journal printer NP06
01750110044 Paper width: 76.2 mm (- 1 mm) (3 inches)
max. 80 mm / 105 mm
The thermal [matrix] journal printer TP06 [NP06] is a modular roll printer. It
consists of a thermal printing unit [matrix printing unit], a control unit, a paper
holder and a winder. The individual modules are assembled on a mounting
plate which contains the controller. The controller incorporates an interface
socket, the plug for the power supply, control elements and status displays.
The following description contains no information on the normal operation of
the printer. You can find this information in the operating manual of the cash-
out system.

Connecting the printer Journal Printer TP06/NP06
Connecting the printer

Connect the printer only when the system is disconnected from the
power supply.
Power supply
The printer is operated with 24 V DC. The 5 V voltage for the logic is
generated internally.
Data interface

Journal Printer TP06/NP06 Views of thermal printer TP06
Views of thermal printer TP06
Overall view
1 4
1 Thermal printing unit 4 Paper roll compartment

2 Printer control panel 5 Take-up reel
3 Weekend sensor

Views of thermal printer TP06 Journal Printer TP06/NP06
1 Safety string of paper roll shaft

Journal Printer TP06/NP06 Views of thermal printer TP06
Control panel and connectors
1
2
3
7
4
6
1 LINE FEED key 5 ERROR LED (red)

2 TEST key 6 24 V DC power supply
3 POWER LED (green) 7 Interface USB port, type B
4 End of paper LED (yellow) connector

Views of thermal printer TP06 Journal Printer TP06/NP06
Position of sensors
5 4 3 2 1
1 Paper-low sensor (not 3 Paper-out sensor

adjustable) 4 Top of form (ToF) sensor
2 Paper motion sensor 5 Thermal sensor of thermal array

Journal Printer TP06/NP06 Views of matrix printer NP06
Views of matrix printer NP06
Overall view
6
1
5
2
4
1 Print head 5 Paper-low sensor

2 Ribbon cartridge 6 Paper roll compartment
3 Printer control panel 7 Take-up reel
4 Printing unit release lever

Views of matrix printer NP06 Journal Printer TP06/NP06
1 Safety string of paper roll shaft

Journal Printer TP06/NP06 Views of matrix printer NP06
Control panel and connectors
1
2
3
7
4
6
1 LINE FEED key 5 ERROR LED (red)

2 TEST key 6 24 V DC power supply
3 POWER LED (green) 7 Interface USB port, type B
4 End of paper LED (yellow) connector

Views of matrix printer NP06 Journal Printer TP06/NP06
Position of sensors
6 5 4 3 2 1
1 Paper-low sensor (not 4 Top of form (ToF) sensor

adjustable) 5 Thermal sensor of print head
2 Paper motion sensor 6 Carrier home position
3 Paper-out sensor

Journal Printer TP06/NP06 Functions
Functions
When the power is turned on, the firmware is started. The keys that are
pressed at power-on define the start conditions for the firmware. The
permanent parameters are loaded and the relevant settings made.
The firmware is not operable if an error is found during the test of external
storage or during initialization of the emulation. In this case, the firmware is
halted and it is no longer possible to communicate via the interface.
Power-on procedure
After the power is turned on, the printer is initialized. The following functions
are executed during the initialization:
− Processor initialization
− Memory test
− Define start conditions,
− Load values from parameter memory
− Execute mechanical reset (not in test mode),
− Establish ready state (not in test mode).

Status indicators Journal Printer TP06/NP06
Status indicators
The journal printer status is indicated by three LEDs. The statuses of the
individual LEDs are identified by the following abbreviations:
Abbreviation Status
0 LED is off
1 LED is on
x LED can be on or off
bl LED blinking
Indicators at power-on
bl bl bl Test mode (selection level)
Indicators when online

If test mode is not activated and error handling inactive, the display information
for normal operating state is built cyclically and output to the display.
1 x 0 Data set ready
x bl x End of paper
x 1 x Paper low
x x 1 Offline
x x bl Error (see section "ERROR LED blinking pattern")

Journal Printer TP06/NP06 Functions of keys
Functions of keys
Normal operation
Pressing individual keys when the printer is in normal operational mode will
give priority to the execution of certain functions.
Keys pressed Function
None None
TEST Prints test printout
FEED Paper feed by 1/6". If the key is pressed for longer than
2 seconds, the paper is fed continuously until the key
combination is changed.
Do not press the FEED key during normal operation.
The key functions are triggered via a spontaneous functions 'job channel in the
device controller' and are executed with higher priority than the functions from
the emulation. For this reason, you should not hamper or corrupt emulation
functions during operations by executing key functions.

Functions of keys Journal Printer TP06/NP06
Internal test
Internal test with paper

After the 'internal test with paper' has been selected (see section "Calling and
exiting the 'internal test with paper'") the selection mode is active. By pressing
the keys the 'internal test with paper' can be controlled.
TEST The TEST key is used to start the 'internal test with paper',
to start the test levels and to complete them.
during the 'internal test with paper'.
TEST+FEED None
Internal test without paper

After the 'internal test without paper' has been selected (see section "Calling
and exiting the 'internal test without paper'") the selection mode is active. By
pressing the keys the 'internal test without paper' can be controlled.
TEST The TEST key is used to start the 'internal test without
paper', to start the test levels and to complete them.
during the 'internal test without paper'.
TEST+FEED None

Journal Printer TP06/NP06 Internal test
Internal test
Calling and exiting the 'internal test with paper'

This program allows you to check the main printer functions.
• Press the TEST key and release it.
• Press the TEST key again and keep the TEST key pressed until the test
printout is output.
• The keys are blinking and you can select a test with the FEED key (see
section "Indicators for the selected test level").
• Start the test with the TEST key.

Internal test Journal Printer TP06/NP06
Test printout

Calling and exiting the 'internal test without

paper'
This program makes it possible to check the most important printer functions
that are possible without paper.
• Press the TEST key.
• Select a test using the FEED key (see section "Indicators for the selected
test level") and start the test by pressing the TEST key.

Displaying the selected test level

In the selection mode (LEDs are blinking), the LEDs show the selected test
level in binary code when the FEED key is pressed. The LEDs have the
following rating:
LED Significance
Red 4
Yellow 2
Green 1
Binary display of the test level
Red Yellow Green Test level Description

0 0 1 1 Paper sensors
0 1 0 2 Printer test
0 1 1 3 Statistical information
1 0 0 4 Set EEPROM parameters to default
values
1 0 1 5 Take-up reel test
1 1 0 6 Carrier test (NP06 only)
1 1 1 7 Calibrating EEPROM sensor values
Explanation:
0 = Off
1 = ON

Description of the test programs
Test level 1 (paper sensor test)

At level 1, the two paper sensors 'Paper out' and 'Paper low' are displayed on
activation.
test with paper or an internal test without paper. The green LED is lit.
The order of actuation is not specified. The yellow LED lights up to indicate a
sensor status change.
If the paper has been removed at least once from the paper sensor ‘Paper
out,’ the printer automatically performs a reset when the test level is exited.
Test level 2 (printer test)

At level 2, the printer test is executed. This test level can only be selected
when the printer is undergoing an internal test with paper. The printer test
requires that paper be present in the printer. If the paper is not sufficient for the
printer test, the printer automatically performs a reset.
The printer prints all character sets in Font A and Font B, such as PC437,
Katakana, PC850, PC860, PC863, PC865, WPC1252, PC866, PC852, PC858,
Space page.
Test level 3 (statistical information)

Statistical information is printed out in level 3. This test level can only be
selected when the printer is undergoing an internal test with paper. The printer
test requires that paper be present in the printer. If the paper is not sufficient
for the printer test, the printer automatically performs a reset.
The printout consists of three blocks of information. The first block shows the
current statistical values of the printer controller, the second shows specific
firmware (FW) information, and the third block is printed out as a form
(date/name) and can be filled out by service personnel.

Statistical values of the printer controller
i The statistical values of the printer controller can be set via the KDIAG
program when components are replaced.
EEP. Indicates whether or not the EEPROM checksum is in order
TDOT. Shows the total number of printed dots
DOT. Shows the number of dots printed with the current thermal
array
HEAD Shows the number of thermal array changes
TLFS. Shows the total number of line feeds **
LFS. Shows the number of line feeds executed with the current
line feed motor **
LFCH. Shows the number of line feed motor changes
TCUT. Shows the total number of paper cuts *
CUT. Shows the number of paper cuts executed with the current
cutter *
CUTC. Shows the number of cutter changes *
TRET. Shows the total number of retracts *
RET. Shows the number of retracts with the current retract unit
(optional) *
RETC. Shows the number of changed retract units *
TPRE. Shows the total number of receipts output *
PRE. Shows the number of receipts output with the current printer
unit *
PREC. Shows the number of presenter changes *
* not relevant for journal printer

** Be sure that all line feeds are counted.
If the printer receives a cut command (GS V 0), it pulls the paper into
the cutter and transports it back to the first print position. This
corresponds to 20 additional line feeds.

TCAM. Shows the total number of carrier movements *
CAM. Shows the number of carrier movements executed with the
current carrier unit *
CAMC. Shows the number of changed carrier units *
POC. Shows the total number of power-on cycles
POT. Shows the number of operating hours
UPD. Shows the number of EEPROM updates
PCB. Indicates the revision level
SNO. Indicates the serial number
DAT. Indicates the production date
REV. Indicates the revision number
* only relevant for matrix printer
Firmware (FW) information
VERS Indicates the FW version
DAT Indicates the release date of the FW
Form
DATE Date of services (handwritten)
NAME Name of technician (handwritten)

Test printout of statistical data

Test level 4 (reset EEPROM parameters to default values)

In level 4 you can set the default values for the storage settings and for the
user configuration.
test with paper or an internal test without paper. A software reset is then
performed.
• To set the default values, press the TEST key when the red LED is
blinking.
If you do not want to reset the EEPROM parameters, press the FEED key
to return to the 'internal test with paper' or the 'internal test without paper'.
You can print out the current EEPROM parameters via the internal test with
paper (see section "Internal test with paper"). You can find the EEPROM
parameters under the header 'Memory Switches'.
Default values
Storage setting
Auto Line Feed disabled
Endurance Test disabled
User configuration
Paper width 76.2 mm
Print density LIGHT [-6 ... 0 ... +6] DARK
Test level 5 (test of the take-up reel)

In level 5 you can perform an uninterrupted test of the paper take-up reel.
Paper must be present in the printer for the reel test. If the paper is not
sufficient for the reel test, the printer automatically performs a reset.

Test level 6 (carrier test (NP06 only))

Level 6 is not used in the TP06, whereas a carrier test is executed in case of
the NP06. The carrier is continuously moved forwards and then backwards
again.
The carrier home position is indicated by a green lit LED.
LED Function
Green Carrier home position
Test level 7 (set EEPROM sensor values to factory

default)
In level 7 you can reset all EEPROM sensor values to the factory default. The
status register of the sensors is deleted. This test level can only be selected
when the printer is undergoing an 'internal test with paper' or an 'internal test
without paper'.
• To reset the EEPROM sensor values, press the TEST key when the red
LED is blinking.
If you do not want to reset the EEPROM sensor values, press the FEED
key to return to the 'internal test with paper' or the 'internal test without
paper'.
The result is output in a test printout in the section 'EEPROM sensor values'
(see also section "Calling and exiting the 'internal test with paper'").
All sensors and their default settings are output (see table below):
Sensor Sensor value Calibration status
PAPER_END : XX CAL
PRESENTER_OUT : XX CAL
PAPER_NEAR_END : XX CAL
MARK_SENSOR : 0 -
TOP_OF_FORM : XX CAL
In addition to the sensor designation, the sensor value (XX) and the calibration
status is printed out. If the sensor has been calibrated, this is indicated by the

Journal Printer TP06/NP06 Paper control
letters 'CAL' (CALIBRATED = calibrated) in the calibration status. If the sensor

value shows a zero (0) and the calibration status shows '-', the respective
sensor has not been calibrated.
If a fault occurs during calibration, the sensor value shows '-' and the
calibration status 'ERR'.
Paper control
Paper is fed in a forward direction only. Backwards is not possible.
Loading paper
Feed the paper by hand into the paper channel of the printing unit. The printer
pulls the paper in automatically and outputs the paper via the presenter.
For correct paper feed or paper transport the front edge of the paper has to be
cut with scissors to get a right-angled sharp edge.
Feed the leading edge of the paper into the paper guides.
Once the paper has been properly inserted, pulled in and output, the following
text is automatically printed at the beginning of the paper roll:
If you can read this text,
Autoloading is successful
Remaining paper supply

Once 'paper-out' is recognized, there is still a remaining quantity of paper
available for printing, namely 15 lines at 1/6 inch each.
If 'paper torn' is detected, no more printouts can be executed. The yellow LED
blinks and reports 'paper out'.

Error handling Journal Printer TP06/NP06
Error handling
Error indicators
Error indicators are issued at the beginning of error handling.
Off Off Blinking Carrier error (NP06 only)
Off Off Blinking TOF position not found
Off Off Blinking Timeout for StartOfJob
Off Off Blinking Print head too hot
Off Off Blinking Voltage too high
Off Off Blinking Low voltage error
Off Off Blinking Device error

Journal Printer TP06/NP06 Error handling
ERROR LED blinking pattern
Recoverable errors
The following table shows the blinking pattern of all errors, that can be
recovered by removing and inserting the paper roll.
This pattern is called the 'positive' blinking pattern.
In case of the positive blinking pattern, you must count how often the ERROR-
LED is switched on.
Carrier The carrier does 2
error not leave or
(NP06 reach its home approx. 5 sec
only) position.
ToF After cutting the 7
position printer doesn’t
not found find the TOF approx. 5 sec
position.
Operation Paper is after 8
after power on not at
switch-on the print starting approx. 5 sec
error position. This
(TP06 error is activated
only) by memory
switch 7-4.
Paper The paper motion 9
motion sensor detects
error no paper motion approx. 5 sec
LED is off
LED is on


Timeout StartOfJob ∞
for timeout
StartOfJob occurred approx. 5 sec
because no
EndOfJob was
received within
the specified
time.
LED is off
LED is on

Unrecoverable errors
The following table shows the blinking pattern of all errors, that cannot be
recovered by removing and re-inserting the paper roll.
This pattern is called the 'negative' blinking pattern.
In case of the negative blinking pattern, you must count how often the
ERROR-LED is switched off.
Temperature Abnormal print 1
error head
temperature approx. 5 sec
(NP06) or
thermal array
temperature
(TP06).
High voltage The power 3
error supply voltage
is extremely approx. 5 sec
high.
Low voltage The power 4
error supply voltage
is extremely approx. 5 sec
low.
Printer error The loaded 5
printer driver
does not approx. 5 sec
correspond
with the
firmware.
LED is off
LED is on

Troubleshooting
Temperature error in the print head or thermal array
• Replace the print head or thermal array (see the section

"Removing/installing the print head" or "Removing/installing the thermal
array"). If the error is still indicated, replace the printer (see the chapter
High voltage / low voltage error
• Check the power lines and the power supply and replace them if necessary
(see chapter "Removal/Installation of Components").
• If the error condition persists, replace the printer (see chapter

Printer error
• Load the following six files in the printer via KDIAG.

– NP06.BIN – TP06.BIN
– NP06.FNT – TP06.FNT
– NP06.FRM – TP06.FRM
– NP06.LVF – TP06.LVF
– NP06.PUT – TP06.PUT
– NP06.SSV – TP06.SSV

Paper motion error
• Check whether the take-up reel is jammed or whether there is a paper jam
(see chapter "Journal Printer NP06", section "Paper jam" or chapter
"Journal Printer TP06", section "Paper jam" in the operating manual).

Controller Journal Printer TP06/NP06
Controller
The central control of the printer is handled by a 16-bit microcontroller. To
comply with the required range of functions, the following function blocks are
integrated in the controller:
Memory
− 1 MByte flash memory with boot sector for firmware and character
generators
− 4 MBit SRAM
− 256 Byte NVRAM
EPLD (programmable logic)
− Contains memory addressing

− I/O decoding
Interfaces
− USB
Power control
− Power driver for stepper motor

− Power driver for thermal head
Sensors
Photosensor for
− weekend and paper-out sensor
− Top of form (ToF) sensor

Journal Printer TP06/NP06 Pin assignment
Pin assignment
24 V connector
Type of connector:
AMP Modu 2-pin M
Contact Description
1 24 V
2 Ground
Data connector
USB type B, 4-pin M
3 4
Contact Description
1 VCC (+ 5 V)
2 - DATA
3 + DATA
4 GND

Maintenance and service Journal Printer TP06/NP06

• After each paper change, remove paper scraps, paper dust and foreign
objects, e.g. with a brush.
• Check the thermal array or the print head for signs of wear.
Maintenance counter
When printer parts such as the thermal array or the print head are replaced,
the maintenance counter must be reset.
It is reset using the program KDIAG.
Remedying poor print quality
Matrix printer NP06

A poor or too bright print image may be caused by a worn ribbon cartridge or a
worn print head.
The print head could be hot.
Wait a few minutes for print head to cool down if it has just finished
printing.
i The ribbon cartridge and the print head are consumables which the
customer has to order separately (see also chapter "Journal Printer
NP06", section "Consumables" in the operating manual).
• If print quality is poor, first replace the ribbon cartridge (see chapter
"Journal Printer NP06", section "Replacing the ribbon cartridge" in the
operating manual).
If this does not improve print quality, replace the print head (see chapter
"Journal Printer NP06", section "Remedying poor print quality" in the
operating manual).

Journal Printer TP06/NP06 Maintenance and service

Poor print quality can be caused by a dirty thermal array.
The print head could be hot.
Wait a few minutes for print head to cool down if it has just finished
printing.
i The thermal array is a consumable which the customer has to order

separately (see also chapter "Journal Printer TP06", section
"Consumables" in the operating manual).
• Remove paper scraps, paper dust and foreign objects from the thermal
array.
Use a soft, lint-free cloth moistened with pure isopropyl alcohol (e.g.
ISOPADS).
Do not close the printer until the alcohol has completely evaporated.

Technical data Journal Printer TP06/NP06
Technical data

Power consumption:
Standby: max. 5 W

Power consumption:
Standby: max. 5 W
Interface to the host

The interface is a USB port.

Journal Printer TP06/NP06 Technical data
Room classification
Operating temperature: 0 °C ... + 50 °C
Storage temperature: - 10 °C ... + 70 °C
Humidity:
Operation: 5 % ... 95 %
Storage: 5 % ... 98 %
Print head

Print method: Impact serial
9 pins
Vertical pin distance: 0.353 mm
Pin diameter: 0.3 mm
Max. pin frequency: 1500 Hz
Resolution:
Horizontal: 158 dpi
Vertical: 72 dpi

Print method: Thermal
Print speed: 150 mm/s
Resolution:
Horizontal: 203 dpi
Vertical: 203 dpi

Ribbon cartridge
Cartridge: Continuous ribbon
Ribbon cartridge: Nylon ribbon
Width: 11 - 0.3 mm
Color: purple (black optional)
Service life:
Color: black 2,000,000 characters
Color: purple 6,000,000 characters
Paper feed unit

Paper feed: Stepper motor
Carrier drive: Stepper motor (NP06 only)
Feed keys: 1

Print function
Print width: NP06: 63.84 mm
TP06: 72 mm at 576 dots
Character matrix:
Font A (W x H): NP06: 9 x 9 + 3 spacing
Font A (W x H): TP06: 12 x 24 + 2 spacing
Character size:
Font A (W x H): NP06: 1.92 x 3.17 mm
Font B (W x H): 1.44 x 3.17 mm
Font A (W x H): TP06: 1.75 x 3.0 mm
Font B (W x H): 1.25 x 2.1 mm
Number of characters:
Font A: NP06: 22 cpl at 8.84 cpi
24 cpl at 9.95 cpi
33 cpl at 13.26 cpi
44 cpl at 17.64 cpi
Font A: TP06: 28 cpl at 10.2 cpi
36 cpl at 12.7 cpi
41 cpl at 14.5 cpi
57 cpl at 20.3 cpi
Character set: IBM character set II

with 13 country-specific character sets
PC850 (multilingual)
PC852 (Latin 2)
PC858 (Latin 2, Euro Sign)
PC860 (Portuguese)
PC863 (Canadian French)
PC865 (Nordic)

PC866 (Cyrillic)
WPC1252 (Windows)
Kathakana
Country-specific character
sets: Download of user-defined characters possible
Font attributes: Normal type
Bold type
Height and width (up to 8 times)
Underlined
Rotated print (90°)
Mirroring
Inverted

Paper specifications

Paper quality: Z 100
Paper type: paper on rolls
Paper color: white

Paper quality: OJI KF50 – HDA or equivalent
Paper type: thermal paper rolls (thermal layer on the
outside)
Paper color: white

Journal roll dimensions

Paper width: 76.2 mm (- 1 mm) (3 inch)
NP06: max. 80 mm / 105 mm
TP06: max. 80 mm / 110 mm
End of paper: not glued to roll sleeve
Inside diameter of roll sleeve: 12.5 mm + 1 mm
Wall thickness of roll sleeve: 2 mm + 1 mm
Roll sleeve material: cardboard / plastic
Initial winding of paper on the roll sleeve
1
2
max. 80 mm
1 Paper 2 Roll sleeve

Dimensions and weights

With 80 mm take-up reel With 110 mm take-up reel
Without journal roll Without journal roll
Depth: 313 mm 313 mm
Width: 134 mm 134 mm
Weight
NP06: approx. 2.8 kg approx. 2.8 kg
TP06: approx. 2.4 kg approx. 2.4 kg

Removing / installing the components Journal Printer TP06/NP06
Removing / installing the components
Print head
• Turn off the power by removing the power supply connector (see section
"Views of matrix printer", item 6 in the figure "Customer panel and
connectors").
• Remove the ribbon cartridge (see chapter "Journal Printer NP06", section
"Replacing the ribbon cartridge" in the operating manual).
Press the respective retaining clip in
the direction of the arrows (1) and (2)
as far as possible. Raise the print
head (3) slightly until you can detach
the cable from the old print head.
Connect the cable to the new print
3 head, and carefully place the new print
head in its mounting.
Fix the print head (1) in its mounting

by pressing the respective retaining
clip in the direction of the arrows (2)
and (3) as far as possible.
Insert the ribbon cartridge.
1
in reverse order.

Journal Printer TP06/NP06 Removing / installing the components
Thermal array
• Remove the printer (see chapter "Removal/Installation of Components")

and place it on a level surface.
Remove screw (1) on the left side and
the corresponding screw on the right
side. Remove the cover (2) upwards.
Remove screw (1) on the left side and

the corresponding screw on the right
side. Remove the paper cover (2)
upwards.
Lift the thermal printing unit a little (1)

and remove it in the direction of the
arrow. Put down the printing unit.

Removing / installing the components Journal Printer TP06/NP06
Remove the ribbon cable (1) from the

printing unit in the direction of the
arrow.
Loosen the screws (1) and (2). Press

the green lever in the direction of the
arrow (3) and swing the thermal
printing unit up. Loosen the screws
until ...
... you can remove the thermal array

(1) from the printing unit grasping it on
i Always hold the thermal array

on the sides (2) and (3).
Reinstall it by following the same

steps in reverse order.

Printing Cassette (TH60)
Printing Cassette (TH60) 01750092160
Printing Cassette (TH60) 01750109482
The printing cassette is an optional component of the CMD-V4 module and is

used to print documents and labels. It is part of a dual dispenser module.
TH60 is a thermal printer with an integrated paper cutter and is integrated in
the printing cassette. It is a compact unit and designed for direct printing on
thermal paper.
The TH60 printer is equipped with a 160 mm wide, 8 dot / mm thermal print
unit.
Paper feed is driven via two stepper motors.
The process is controlled by various sensors and switches.
One sensor detects the black mark located on the rear of the thermal paper.
The TH60 controller monitors the thermal head via a temperature sensor.
This description is an addition to the CMD-V4 manual.

View of printing cassette Printing Cassette (TH60)
View of printing cassette
1 24 V power supply
2 USB interface
3 Locking lever
4 Handle used to remove/insert the printing cassette

Printing Cassette (TH60) Components and controls
Components and controls
1 Thermal print unit with paper cutter

2 Paper low receiver
3 Paper roll holder
4 Paper low transmitter
5 Key panel

Pulling out the printing cassette Printing Cassette (TH60)
Pulling out the printing cassette

• Activate the product-specific software (see the chapter "Basic Operation,"
section "Calling the product-specific software" in the operating manual).
• Open the safe door (see the chapter "Basic Operation,", section "Opening /
closing the safe door (with factory setting)" or "Opening / closing the safe
door (with customized lock)" in the operating manual).
Press the green release lever down

(see arrow) and pull the printing
cassette out of the CMD-V4 by the
green handle (1).

Printing Cassette (TH60) Key panel
Key panel
1 Status LED (yellow) 4 F1 key - Paper Feed

2 Status LED (red) 5 F2 key
3 Status LED (green) 6 RESET key
Problems
If an error occurs, the status LEDs blink (yellow or red). This does not include
errors that lead to controller failure.

Problems Printing Cassette (TH60)
Messages on the status display

When an error occurs, the status LEDs blink (yellow or red), e.g. twice in rapid
succession. They then switch off for 0.5 seconds and the cycle is repeated
(see diagram "Example of blink display 2").
Example of blink display 2
0,3 s
Status of Yellow LED

This LED indicates the data communication status.
Blink rate n Reason Remedy
1 Receiving data
2 Communication
error
3 Data
communication
not complete
4 Error in the USB
interface
Status of Green LED

This LED indicates the general device status.
0 Printer is ready
2 Document in Remove document
output unit

Printing Cassette (TH60) Problems
Status of Red LED

This LED indicates the general error status in the printing cassette.
1 End of paper Insert a new paper roll (see chapter
"Printing Cassette," section "Replacing the
paper roll" in the operating manual).
2 Paper low The paper roll will soon need replacing.
3 Paper jam Remove the paper jam. (see chapter
"Printing Cassette," section "Removing a
paper jam" in the operating manual).
4 Error in cutter Check the cutter. If the error persists,
replace the printing cassette (see section
"Installing/deinstalling components").
5 Thermal head Close the thermal head (see chapter
lifted "Printing Cassette," section "Removing a
paper jam" in the operating manual).
6 Error in the Check the power supply unit or the
power supply controller. If the error persists, replace the
printing cassette (see section
7 Overheating Switch the "evice off and leave it to cool
down.
8 Memory error Replace the printing cassette (see section
9 EEPROM error Replace the printing cassette (see section

Key functions Printing Cassette (TH60)
Key functions
The following key functions are available for you to check the print unit:
− Paper feed - press F1 key
− Test printout (fonts) – press F1 key and RESET key, then release RESET
key and keep F1 pressed.
− Setup menu and printout of the setup reports – press F2 key and RESET
key, then release RESET key and keep F2 pressed.
Paper feed
• Press the paper feed key (F1 key), the printer transports paper and cuts it
off.

Printing Cassette (TH60) Key functions
Test printout
• Press the RESET and the F1 keys at the same time. Let go of the RESET
key and keep the F1 key pressed for several seconds, The printer then
outputs a test printout with the printer fonts.
i It is advisable to use normal thermal paper with a width of 150 mm for

the test printout.

Setup menu Printing Cassette (TH60)
Exiting the key functions
• Press the RESET key to exit the key functions.
Setup menu
i Only print the setup menu out on thermal paper, since it would print
beyond the margin on labels.
The status report is activated as follows.

F2 key (1)
Press the RESET and the F2 keys at

the same time. Let go of the RESET
key and keep the F2 key pressed for
several seconds.

Printing Cassette (TH60) Setup menu
• Use the F2 key to select and change the menu items.
i The settings are saved at once automatically, it is therefore not

possible to 'discard' the settings. If you make an input error, you must
call up and change the menu item once more.

Setup menu Printing Cassette (TH60)
• The F1 key takes you to the next menu item.
• The RESET key is used to exit the menu settings at any time.
Menu structure

Printing Cassette (TH60) Adjusting the paper low sensor
Adjusting the paper low sensor

• Pull the printing cassette out from the CMD-V4 module (see section
"Pulling out the printing cassette").
Release the screw (1) to the right of

the paper low sensor (2).
Move the paper low sensor upwards or
downwards.
Up = trigger later
Down = trigger sooner
Status LEDs
LEDs:
Green (1) on = OK, enough paper

available.
Yellow (2) also on = paper supply is

low.
A message will be sent to the
application.

Installing/deinstalling components Printing Cassette (TH60)
Installing/deinstalling components
Thermal head with cutter
• Pull the printing cassette from the CMD-V4 module (see section "Pulling
out the printing cassette").
• Switch the device off (see the chapter "Basic Operation," section "Switching
the device off" in the operating manual) and remove the power connector
from the socket.
Release the screw (1).
Push the paper guides towards each

other.
Remove the controller cover upwards

obliquely by the stud bolt (see arrow).

Printing Cassette (TH60) Installing/deinstalling components
Remove connectors (1) to (3).
Press the retainer lever (1) in the

direction shown by the arrow.
Raise the thermal head in the direction

shown by the arrow (2).
Press the retainer lever (1) in the

Remove the thermal head upwards.
• Replace the components in reverse sequence.

Removing the printing cassette
• Pull the printing cassette out from the CMD-V4 module (see section
"Pulling out the printing cassette").
• Switch the device off (see the chapter "Basic Operation," section "Switching
the device off" in the operating manual) and remove the power connector
from the system socket.
Remove connectors (1) and (2).
Remove the paper roll upwards (see

arrow).

Release the knurled screw (1) by

turning it several times.
Move the cable chain with the support

bracket in the direction shown by the
arrow (1)
Turn the cable chain out of the

mounting (3) in the direction shown by
the arrow (2) and remove it.
Press latches (1) and (2) as far as

possible in the direction shown by the
arrows.

Hold the telescopic runner securely

with your thumbs.
Press the printing cassette upwards

out of the mounting in the direction
shown by the arrow
and …
… hold the printing cassette securely

(1).
Pull the telescopic runner in the

direction shown by the arrow (2) away
from the printer.
Push the telescopic runner as far as

possible into its mounting in the
direction shown by the arrow (3).
Lift the printing cassette by the two

grips (1) in the direction shown by
arrow (2) and remove it in the direction
shown by arrow (3).

Inserting the printing cassette
i When inserting the new printing

cassette, make sure that you
push latches (1) and (2) as far
as possible in the direction
shown by the arrow.
• Pull the right telescopic runner out of the device completely.
Lift the printing cassette by the two

grips (1) in the direction shown by the
arrow (2) onto the existing mounting
bolt.
Position the printing cassette carefully

as shown by the arrow (3).
Push the right latches (1) as far as

arrow.

Hold the printing cassette (1) securely.
Pull the telescopic runner out as far as

arrow (2).
Push the telescopic runner onto the

locking pins in the direction shown by
the arrow (3).
Hold the telescopic runner securely

with your thumbs.
Press the printing cassette upwards

out of the mounting in the direction
shown by the arrow.
Push the left latch (1) as far as

arrow.

Turn the cable chain in the direction

shown by the arrow (1) around the
mounting (2).
Push the cable chain with the support

bracket in the direction shown by the
arrow (3)
and…
tighten the knurled screw (1) again.
Mount the paper roll again as shown

by the arrow.

Insert connectors (1) and (2) again.
• Insert the power connector in the system socket and switch the device on.
• Push the printing cassette into the CMD-V4 module until you hear it
engage.
• Close the device.

Printing Cassette (TH60) Technical data
Technical data
Power supply
Supply voltage: 24 V DC ± 10 %
Connector: AMP Mod I 2-pin.
Power input
Standby 24 V DC: approx. 0.2 A
Operating mode 24 V DC: approx. 9.0 A
Peak current 24 V DC: approx. 20 A
Print data
Printing method: Direct thermal print
Resolution: 8 dots / mm or 200 dpi

Thermal paper specifications Printing Cassette (TH60)
Thermal paper specifications

Paper width 85 mm – 160 mm ±1 mm
Paper thickness 0.08 – 0.16 mm
Paper weight 100 g/m² - 120 g/m²
Paper smoothness, front min. 300 BEKK sec.
Paper smoothness, rear max. 200 BEKK sec.
Smoothness of side walls on paper roll ±1 mm
Thermal coating on the inside
Outer diameter, paper roll < 180 mm
Inner diameter, roll core 50 + 1 mm
Roll core material Plastic or card
Roll core wall thickness min. 2 mm +1 mm
End of paper End must not be glued to roll core
Mark position Middle to rear
Mark color Black (achromatic)
Mark height min. 4 mm + 0.5 mm
Mark width min. 26 mm +0.5 mm
Clearance between marks min. 54 mm – max. 85 mm
Mark reflection >70% to DIN 53145 part 1
Mark PCS value > 70% to DIN 66 236
Opacity > 85% to DIN 53 146
Paper quality OJI KF 50-HDA

Printing Cassette (TH60) Thermal paper specifications
Rear of paper web
85 mm - 160 mm
min. 26 mm
1
4 mm
54 mm - 85 mm
2
3 2
4
1 Cutting line
2 Direction of feed
3 Rear of the paper web (mark position)
4 Inside of paper web (heat sensitive)
5 Paper roll

USB connector pin assignment Printing Cassette (TH60)
USB connector pin assignment

4-pin USB
3 4
Pin Name Input / Function

output
1 VBUS
2 D- bidirectional Data
3 D+ bidirectional Data
4 GND bidirectional
Shield Shield

Barcode Reader BR 02
Barcode Reader BR 02 01750074517
Barcode Reader BR 02 01750111110
Manufacturer: Symbol Technologies, Inc.

Type: MS-804FZY

Important safety precautions Barcode Reader BR 02
1 LED indicator 2 V.24 connection (RS-232)

Barcode Reader BR 02 Important safety precautions

− Do not look straight into the laser beam (also see the warning sign:
"Laser beam - Do not look into the beam, Laser class 2")
− Note that inside the laser the output power can amount to 1 mW.
− Using optical instruments, e.g. binoculars, microscopes and magnifying
glasses, while looking at the laser can cause considerable damage to your
eyes.
Information about the laser system

The barcode reader meets the following safety requirements:
− IEC 60825 / EN 60825 for a class 2 laser product
− US 21CFR1040 for a class 2 laser product
Description
The compact barcode reader is operated via a COM port (V.24 or
RS-232 interface) on the system unit (PC). The reader is activated by means
of the application software. .
The barcode reader integrated in our products, is always delivered with the
default settings (see section "Default settings").
The operating parameters and the barcodes to be evaluated can be changed
by control sequences or by scanning barcode sequences. For more
information please refer to the section "Programming" or the manufacturer's
"Programmer's Guide".

Description Barcode Reader BR 02
The ready status and a successful reading operation are indicated by an LED.
LED Meaning
Red LED The barcode reader is ready.
Green LED The scanned barcode was recognized.
The reader is integrated in all devices in such a way that the barcode can be
scanned if the following conditions are met (see figure).
Any text
To scan a code that is outside the admissible scanning range, fold the
document in such a way that the barcode is now in the admissible scanning
range. For further information please refer to the operating manuals of the
basic devices.

Barcode Reader BR 02 Connecting the barcode scanner
Connecting the barcode scanner

The barcode reader is connected to a COM port. Power (+ 5 V ) is supplied via
the central power supply unit by means of the V.24 cable.
Example
System unit (PC)

DSUB 9M
COM Barcode
port reader
+5V
Pin assignment
DSUB, 9-pin M
Contact Signal Type *1)

1 Trigger i Starts a scan operation
2 TXD O Data output
3 RXD i Data input
4 not used
5 GND
6 + 5.0 V + 10 % i
7 CTS i Request to send to barcode reader
8 RTS O Request to send to host
9 Beeper / I/O Starts an external beeper / Starts a
Download parameter download
*1) I = Input O = Output

Factory defaults Barcode Reader BR 02
Factory defaults
The parameters are described in greater detail in the manufacturer's
"Programmer's Guide".
Overview
Parameter Setting
Scan options
Beeper Tone High Frequency
Beeper Frequency Adjustment 2500 Hz
Laser On Time 3.0 sec
Power Mode Low Power
Trigger Mode Level
Aiming Mode Disabled
Time Out Between Same Symbol 1.0 sec
Time Out Between Different 0.0 sec
Symbols
Beep after Good Decode Enabled
Transmit “No Decode” Message Disabled
Parameter Scanning Enabled
Linear Code Type Security Level 1
Bi-directional Redundancy Disabled
Decoder selection
EAN-8 /-13 / UPC-A / -E Enabled
UPC-E1 Disabled
Bookland EAN Disabled
Decode UPC/EAN Supplementals Ignore
Decode UPC/EAN Supplemental
Redundancy 7
Transmit UPC-A Check Digit Enabled
Transmit UPC-E Check Digit Enabled
Transmit UPC-E1 Check Digit Enabled
UPC-A Preamble System Character
UPC-E Preamble System Character
UPC-E1 Preamble System Character
Convert UPC-E to A Disabled

Barcode Reader BR 02 Factory defaults
Parameter Setting
Convert UPC-E1 to A Disabled
EAN-8 Zero Extend Disabled
UPC/EAN Security Level 0
Linear UPC/EAN Decode Disabled
UPC Half Block Stitching Disabled
Code 128
Code 128 Enabled
UCC/EAN-128 Enabled
ISBT 128 Disabled
Code 39
Code 39 Enabled
Trioptic Code 39 Disabled
Convert Code 39 to Code 32 Disabled
Code 32 Prefix Disabled
Set Length(s) for Code 39 Length within Range: 02-55
Code 39 Check Digit Verification Disabled
Transmit Code 39 Check Digit Disabled
Code 39 Full ASCII Conversion Disabled
Code 93
Code 93 Disabled
Set Length(s) for Code 93 Length within Range: 04-55
Interleaved 2 of 5
Interleaved 2 of 5 Disabled
Set Length(s) for I 2 of 5 1 Discrete Length: 14
I 2 of 5 Check Digit Verification Disabled
Transmit I 2 of 5 Check Digit Disabled
Convert I 2 of 5 to EAN 13 Disabled
Discrete 2 of 5
Discrete 2 of 5 Disabled
Set Lenght(s) for D 2 of 5 1 Discrete Length: 12
Codabar
Codabar Disabled
Set Lenght for Codabar Length within Range: 05-55
CLSI Editing Disabled
NOTIS Editing Disabled

Factory defaults Barcode Reader BR 02
Parameter Setting
MSI Plessey
MSI Plessey Disabled
Set Length(s) for MSI Plessey Length within Range: 06-55
MSI Plessey Check Digits One
Transmit MSI Plessey Check Digit Disabled
MSI Plessey Check Digit Algorithm Mod 10/Mod 10
RSS
RSS-14 Disabled
RSS-Limited Disabled
RSS-Expanded Disabled
Data Options
Transmit Code ID Character None
Prefix/Suffix Values
Prefix NULL
Suffix 1 LF
Suffix 2 CR
Scan Data Transmission Format Data as is
SSI options (data interface)
Baud Rate 9600
Parity None
Check Parity Enabled
Software Handshaking Enabled
Decode Data Packet Format Unpacketed
Stop Bit Select 1
Intercharacter Delay 0
Host Serial Response Time-out 2 sec
Host Character Time-out 200 msec
Event Reporting
Decode Event Disabled
Boot Up Event Disabled
Parameter Event Disabled

Barcode Reader BR 02 Programming
Programming
The default setting of the barcode reader can be changed in two different
ways:
− The barcode reader is programmed by scanning certain barcodes.
The respective barcodes are listed in the manufacturer's "Integration
Guide".
− The parameters of the barcode reader are set via the programming
interface (Simple Serial Interface of the manufacturer) and loaded via the
V.24 interface.
For a detailed description please refer to the manufacturer's "Programmer's
Guide".
The following parameters can be programmed:

− Barcode reader function parameters
− Communications parameters
− Decoding parameters

Problems Barcode Reader BR 02
Problems
Problem Cause / troubleshooting
The barcode reader BR02 is The glass of the barcode reader BR02 is
switched on but the barcode is dirty.
not scanned.
• Clean the screen with a wet soft cloth.
The LED is red.
The selected barcode is not enabled in teh
default setting or not implemented in the
application software.
The presented barcode does not match the
specification.
The barcode is longer than 115 mm
(see chapter "Description").
The barcode is damaged.
Test
Functioning of the barcode reader can be tested with the KDIAG test program
SE 923 version 1.3/03. For this test, the customer-specific data should be
used.
Only use documents for this test with barcodes on them which are approved
by the customer.

Barcode Reader BR 02 Technical data
Technical data
Parameter Values
Input voltage + 5 V DC ± 10 %
Rated current
consumption:
Operation 150 mA ± 30 mA
Idle 110 mA ± 10 mA
Stand-by 20 mA ± 5 mA
Interface V.24 (RS-232)
Optical characteristics
Parameter Values
Light source Visible laser light (650 nm)
Laser power 0.9 mW ± 0.1 mW
Print contrast min. 25 % (dark/light reflectance)
Effect of light from an
external source
Sunlight 8.000 ft. candles (86.112 lux)
Artificial light 450 ft. candles (4.844 lux)
Optical resolution 0.005 inch (min. bar width)
Scan rate 50 (± 6) scans/sec
Physical characteristics
Parameter Values
Weight 0.047 kg
Dimensions (W x L x H) 49 x 59 x 26 mm

Technical data Barcode Reader BR 02
Ambient conditions
Parameter Values
Operating temperature 0 to + 40 °C
Storage temperature - 40 to + 70 °C
Humidity 0 to 95 % (non-condensing)
Safety standards
Laser safety – IEC 60825 / EN 60825 Class 2
– US 21CFR 1040 Class 2
– CDRH Class II
Decoding
(see section "Factory defaults")
Parameter Values
Barcode types EAN / UPC / Code 128, EAN 128, Code 39,
Code 93, Codabar, Interleaved 2/5, Discrete
2/5 und MSI Plessey

Cash Media Dispenser (CMD-V4)
There is a separate service manual available for the cash media dispenser
(CMD-V4). The manual can be ordered from our printing partner. It is also
available in the intranet.
Order number of English edition: 01750060162

Cash Media Dispenser (CMD-V4)

Ink Staining System
The cash media dispenser (CMD-V4) can be equipped with two different ink
staining systems.
If an ink staining system is installed read the respective service manual which
is supplied with the device:
− Ink staining system SQS: 01750094340
− Ink staining system Villiger: 01750094337

Ink Staining System

CMD V4 Shutter 01750053690 / -56960
Shutter CMD V4 horizontal RL 01750053690
Shutter CMD V4 horizontal FL 01750056960

Structure CMD V4 Shutter 01750053690 / -56960
Structure
The shutter locks the cash output tray of the cash media dispenser (CMD-V4).
It includes the following assemblies:
− Shutter
− Drive mechanism with DC current motor, gear and locking mechanism
− 1 photosensor for providing a cash bundle for output
− 1 photosensor for monitoring removal of cash
− Interface board with the two hybrid photosensors for controlling the shutter
The two versions (frontload and rearload) only differ in the so-called ramp in
the cash path and in the position of photosensors PS 27 and PS 28.

CMD V4 Shutter 01750053690 / -56960 Structure
Rear view of rearload version
Rear view of frontload version
1 Ramp 3 Prism for photosensor PS 28

2 Prism for photosensor PS 27

Structure CMD V4 Shutter 01750053690 / -56960
i The rest of the shutter's structure is shown using the rearload version
by way of example. The structure of the shutter in the frontload version
is basically the same.
1 Electronic board 6 Gear cover

2 Connector 7 Prism for photosensor PS 27
3 Motor connection (-) 8 Prism for photosensor PS 28
4 Motor connection (+) 9 Shutter
5 DC current motor

CMD V4 Shutter 01750053690 / -56960 Structure
1 Moving and locking mechanism 5 Motor connection (-)

(left) 6 Motor connection (+)
2 Switching flap for DPS 11 7 Hybrid photosensor DPS 10
3 Switching flap for DPS 10 8 Hybrid photosensor DPS 11
4 Drive shaft for shutter

Function CMD V4 Shutter 01750053690 / -56960
Function
The shutter is controlled via the firmware of the CMD-V4 controller and is
initiated by the application software.
Control data
CMD V4 Control cable
Shutter
controller
Voltage
The firmware evaluates the signals from photosensors PS 27 and PS 28 as

well as from hybrid sensors DPS 10 and DPS 11, and controls the motor.
Photosensor Function
PS 27 Monitoring removal of cash
PS 28 Stop position of the cash output gripper
DPS 10 / DPS 11 Position of the shutter's drive shaft
i The names for the photosensor and the electronic signal vary (see the
table in section "Pin assignment").
The motor-driven shaft has a driving cam on the left and on the right side.
They are constructed in such a way that the shutter is locked by the catches
on the shutter bearings when the shutter is closed.
Shutter and drive mechanism are not directly connected.
When the driving cams turn, the shutter is forced open.
The shutter closes when the driving cams are turned backwards by the driving
shaft. However, the shutter follows this movement only by spring force.
The shutter can only be locked when it is completely closed.
This construction excludes the risk of injury for the user.

CMD V4 Shutter 01750053690 / -56960 Function
Cash removal
If the application sends an order to dispense cash, the shutter is first opened
completely via the firmware. After the banknotes have been transported into
the position where they can be removed, the shutter is partly closed depending
on the thickness of the banknote bundle. The thickness of the bundle is
detected by the thickness measuring unit in the CMD-V4. The value that is
identified is used to control the drive motor for a limited time.
When the cash has been removed the shutter is first opened completely via
the firmware and the drive belts in the transport clamp are briefly moved
backward. Then the shutter is closed completely and locked unless this is
prevented by external influences.
Error code 28
If the shutter does not close within approx. 1 second, the firmware turns the
motor off, generates an error code (error code 28 displayed on the CMD-V4
controller) and reports the error to the application.
Error code 29 (protection against tampering)

Error code 29 is displayed if photosensor PS 27 is covered when the shutter is
closed. The firmware tries to close the shutter anyway. The motor is turned off
if that does not succeed within approx. 1 second.

Function CMD V4 Shutter 01750053690 / -56960
Meaning of hybrid photosensors

DPS 10 DPS 11 Meaning
Open Covered Shutter is completely open (OPEN position)
Covered Covered Shutter is open
(position between OPEN and CASH REMOVAL)
Covered Open Shutter is in the locking phase.
Open Open Shutter is closed and locked
(CLOSED position)
Signal level at the connector:

Open = 1 (H) = + 12 V
Covered = 0 (L) = 0 V

CMD V4 Shutter 01750053690 / -56960 Pin assignment
Pin assignment
JST PHD 12M
Pin Name Comment

1 not connected
2 not connected
3 + 12 V
4 GND
5 Motor (+) Motor connection (+)
6 Motor (-) Motor connection (-)
7 DPS 10
8 DPS 11
9 PS 27
10 PS 28
11 Transmitting current PS 27
and PS 28
12 not connected
Firmware name Electronic signal

PS 27 LS 26
PS 28 LS 29
Maintenance
The shutter does not require maintenance under normal operating conditions.

Technical data CMD V4 Shutter 01750053690 / -56960
Technical data
Dimension:
Height: 128 mm
Width: 304 mm
Depth: 67 mm
Weight: 820 g

Audio Changeover Switch
01750042748
The electronic changeover switch enables the connection of an additional
headphone.
If there is no headphone connected, instructions etc. are displayed on the
monitor via the application and the loudspeakers are turned on. At the same
time the application monitors the gameport (PIN 2: PORTBIT = Low Level).
If a headphone is connected to the headphone jack, the loudspeakers are
turned off via a relay and the headphone output is enabled. At the same time
PORTBIT (PIN 2) is switched to VCC (High Level) and the signal is evaluated
by the application which then issues voice instructions through the headphone.
If the headphone is removed, the PORTBIT is reset. With a delay of 3 seconds
switchover is made to the loudspeakers.
In some system units (PCs), revision level 0 may cause problems.

i In this case, replace the audio changeover switch rev. level 0 with an
audio changeover switch with rev. level 1 or higher.

Circuit diagram Audio Changeover Switch 01750042748
1 Headphone connection 3 System unit connection

2 Loudspeaker connection
Circuit diagram
The number of loudspeakers at / in the customer panel is device-
i dependent.
Loudspeakers at / in
the customer panel
L R
Line Out
(Speaker Out)
Audio PC
Head- Headphone changeover switch Gameport
phone jack

Audio Changeover Switch 01750042748 Pin assignment
Pin assignment
System unit connection
5 x 2-pin JST-PH 90° connector
Pin Description Meaning

1 Potentiometer A X Connection to gameport PIN 3
2 +5V Connection to gameport PIN 1
3 Potentiometer A Y Connection to gameport PIN 6
4 NC
5 PORTBIT (Key A1) Connection to gameport PIN 2
6 NC
7 GND Connection to gameport PIN 4
8 Audio ground
9 AUDIO_LE Connection to PC audio output
Headphone / left loudspeaker
10 AUDIO_RI Connection to PC audio output
Headphone / right loudspeaker

Pin assignment Audio Changeover Switch 01750042748
Loudspeaker connection
Type of connector:
1

1 SPEAKER_LE Loudspeaker left
2 Audio ground
3 SPEAKER_RI Loudspeaker right
4 Audio ground
Headphone jack
Type of connector:
1

1 HEAD_LE Left headphone
2 HEAD_RI Right headphone
3 Audio ground

Audio Changeover Switch with
Volume Key 01750059867
The electronic changeover switch allows an additional headphone to be
connected, with volume control via a key.
If there is no headphone connected, instructions etc. are displayed on the
monitor via the application and the loudspeakers are turned on. At the same
time the application monitors the gameport (PIN 2: PORTBIT = Low Level).
If a headphone is connected to the headphone jack, the loudspeakers are
turned off via a relay and the headphone output is enabled. At the same time
PORTBIT (PIN 2) is switched to VCC (High Level) and the signal is evaluated
by the application which then issues voice instructions through the headphone.
If the headphone is removed, the PORTBIT is reset. With a delay of 3 seconds
switchover is made to the loudspeakers.
The volume of the headphone connection can be set to four levels via a key.
Pressing the key increases the volume by one level. Once the key has been
pressed four times, you return to the initial volume.
If the headphone is removed, the volume is reset to the lowest level.
The volume of the headphone connection can be aligned with environmental
conditions on the potentiometer of the audio changeover switch. Turning the
potentiometer to the left reduces the volume, turning it to the right increases it.
The value that is set on the potentiometer is only transferred after the
headphone has been disconnected.

Circuit diagram Audio Changeover Switch with Volume Key 01750059867
1 Key connection 4 System unit connection

2 Headphone connection 5 Potentiometer
3 Loudspeaker connection

Audio Changeover Switch with Volume Key 01750059867 Circuit diagram
Circuit diagram
The number of loudspeakers at / in the customer panel is device-
i dependent.
Loudspeakers at / in
the customer panel
L R
Line Out
(Speaker Out)
Headphone
PC
jack Audio
Head- Gameport
changeover switch
phone
Key

Pin assignment Audio Changeover Switch with Volume Key 01750059867
Pin assignment
System unit connection
5 x 2-pin JST-PHD 90° connector

1 Potentiometer A X Connection to gameport PIN 3
2 +5V Connection to gameport PIN 1
3 Potentiometer A Y Connection to gameport PIN 6
4 NC
5 PORTBIT (Key A1) Connection to gameport PIN 2
6 NC
7 GND Connection to gameport PIN 4
8 Audio ground
9 AUDIO_LE Connection to PC audio output
Headphone / left loudspeaker
10 AUDIO_RI Connection to PC audio output
Headphone / right loudspeaker

Audio Changeover Switch with Volume Key 01750059867 Pin assignment
Loudspeaker connection
Type of connector:
1

1 SPEAKER_LE Loudspeaker left
2 Audio ground
3 SPEAKER_RI Loudspeaker right
4 Audio ground
Headphone jack
Type of connector:
1

1 HEAD_LE Left headphone
2 HEAD_RI Right headphone
3 Audio ground

Pin assignment Audio Changeover Switch with Volume Key 01750059867
Key connection
Type of connector:
1

1 Key Signal
2 Key GND

Portrait Camera (Maku)
Part number Camera version
01750048416 Portrait camera for PAL standard
01750050429 Portrait camera for NTSC standard
01750050790 Portrait camera for PAL standard with wide angle lens
01750050792 Portrait camera for NTSC standard with wide angle lens
Delivery package
The delivery package includes the black-and-white portrait camera and an
adapter cable.
Portrait camera
1 Video output connector 2 Power supply connector

Instructions for replacement Portrait Camera (Maku)
Adapter cable
1 System cable connection 2 Camera connection
Instructions for replacement

Before installing the portrait camera,
remove the protective cap (1).

Portrait Camera (Maku) Technical data
Technical data
Parameter Specification
Manufacturer MAKU
Type 1/3" Interline Transfer CCD
Lens (standard) 3.6 mm / max. horizontal opening angle 75°
Lens (wide angle) 2.5 mm / max. horizontal opening angle 100°
CCD chip Interline type 1/3 Inch
Picture elements 520 x 492 (EIA), 500 x 580 (CCIR)
Synchronization Internal
Horizontal resolution 420 lines
Photosensitivity > 0.04 lux (at focal distance F 2.0)
Signal-to-noise ratio > 48 dB
Gamma correction > 0.45
Output signal 1 Vss, 75 Ohm
Power consumption max. 150 mA
Electronic iris up to 1/100.000 s
Input voltage DC 12 V +/- 10 %
Operating temperature
range - 10° to + 50°
Weight 100 g
Dimensions (W x H x D) 50 x 43 x 35 mm
Connection:
Video BNC female connector
Voltage Molex-Minifit Jr., 2-pin connector
Cable lengths free from
fixture point (cable ties):
Video cable 250 mm
Power cable 900 mm (incl. adapter cable)

Pin assignment Portrait Camera (Maku)
Pin assignment
Power supply
Type of connector:
Molex-Mini-Fit Jr. 2-pin, F
Pin Assignment
1 GND
2 + 12 V

Portrait Camera (Color)
Part number Camera version
01750063352 Portrait camera for PAL standard
01750063376 Portrait camera for NTSC standard
01750063389 Portrait camera for PAL standard with wide angle lens
01750063390 Portrait camera for NTSC standard with wide angle lens
Delivery package
The delivery package includes the portrait camera and an adapter cable.
Portrait camera
1 Video output connector 2 Power supply connector

Instructions for replacement Portrait Camera (Color)
Adapter cable
1 System cable connection 2 Camera connection
Instructions for replacement

Before installing the portrait camera,
remove the protective cap (1).

Portrait Camera (Color) Technical data
Technical data
Manufacturer MAKU
Type 1/3" Interline Transfer CCD
Lens (standard) 3.6 mm / max. horizontal opening angle 75°
Lens (wide angle) 2.5 mm / max. horizontal opening angle 100°
CCD chip Interline type 1/3 Inch
Pixels (H x V) 512 x 582 (PAL)
512 x 492 (NTSC)
Horizontal resolution 340 lines (PAL)
380 lines (NTSC)
Photosensitivity 2.0 lux (at focal distance F 2.0)
Signal-to-noise ratio 48 dB
Gamma correction > 0.45
Counter-light compensation Yes
Power consumption 250 mA
Electronic iris up to 1/100.000 s
Input voltage DC 12 V +/- 10 %
Operating temperature range 0° to + 50°
Weight 100 g
Connection:
Voltage Molex Mini-Fit Jr., 2-pin connector

Pin assignment Portrait Camera (Color)
Pin assignment
Power supply
Type of connector:
Molex Mini-Fit Jr. 2-pin, F
Pin Assignment
1 GND
2 + 12 V

Cash Slot Camera
Kamera-Variante Part number
Maku cash slot camera (for PAL standard) 01750085502
Maku cash slot camera (for PAL standard) 01750109332
Maku cash slot camera NTSC (for NTSC standard) 01750085503
Maku cash slot camera NTSC (for NTSC standard) 01750109333
Ordering spare parts

The delivery package includes the cash slot camera and a cable. The cable
can also be ordered separately.
01750085501 Cable for MAKU cash slot camera module

Pin assignment Cash Slot Camera
Pin assignment
1 5 V voltage supply 3 Video output

2 Camera connection
5 V voltage supply
Type of connector:
Molex Micro-Fit 3,0
2-pin, F
Pin Assignment
1 +5V
2 GND

Cash Slot Camera Technical data
Technical data
Manufacturer MAKU
Type 1/4" Interline CCD
Lens 3.6 mm / F 2.0 max. horizontal opening angle
48.75°
Pixels (H x V) 500 x 582 (PAL)
510 x 492 (NTSC)
Horizontal resolution 330 lines
Photosensitivity < 0.5 lux (at focal distance F 2.0)
Signal-to-noise ratio > 48 dB
Auto gain control On
Electronic iris 1/50 ~ 1/100,000 sec.
Automatic white balance On
Input voltage DC 5 V +/- 5 %%
Power consumption < 0.8 W
Weight 4.7 g
Connector:
Voltage Molex Microfit 3.0

Technical data Cash Slot Camera

Relay Panel for External Features USB
01750083012
Description
This relay panel for external features is a stand-alone Low Speed USB
component which - in combination with the application software - enables the
following functions :
− Control of the self-service system by means of up to 4 external signal
devices (inputs 1 - 4).
− Control of up to four external pieces of equipment via the self-service
system (relays 1 - 4)
− Connection of a remote status indicator (RSI)
Power is supplied via the USB cable.
Operation of the remote status indicator, however, requires an additional 24 V
connection.

Replacement Relay Panel for External Features USB 01750083012
In a self-service system two relay panels for external features may be used.
The second relay panel for external features is addressed via a coding
connector (short-circuit bridge) which is polled by the firmware.
Technical data
Description of connectors
10
1 Connector X2, relay 1 6 Connector X5, inputs 3 and 4

2 Connector X3, relay 3 7 Connector X4, RSI
3 Connector X5, inputs 1 and 2 8 Connector X6, 24V
4 Connector X2, relay 2 9 Connector X1, USB
5 Connector X3, relay 4 10 Coding connector for the
second relay panel for external
features

Relay Panel for External Features USB 01750083012 Replacement
Connector X1
Connectors X2 and X3
These two connectors serve to connect external actuators (e.g. a door opener)
which are controlled by the application software via the relay. The relays are
addressed via the microcontroller.
Connector X4
This 4-pin connector is reserved for connection of the remote status indicator
(RSI).
Connector X5
Via this connector up to four customer inputs (sensors or contacts such as
door switches, photosensors) can be polled by the microcontroller and
evaluated by the application software.
Connector X6
24V supply for RSI operation
Coding connector
Addresses the second relay panel for external features in the system by
means of a short-circuit bridge.
How the connector pins are used is shown in the following terminal
i diagram and pin assignments.

Terminal diagram
Relay 1 Relay 3
1 2
1 3 1 3 1 4
X2 X3 X5 X4
4 6 4 6 5 8 1 4
Relay 2 3 4 Remote Status

Relay 4
Inputs Indicator
Sample connection of customer feedback

Example for input 2
Contact bridged =
feedback is generated
1 4
X5

Pin assignment
X1, USB input
USB 4-pin (type B)
4 3
Contact Name Comment

1 5V
2 D-
3 D+
4 GND
X2, customer relays 1 and 2
1
3
4
6

1 Relay 1 Default: contact open
2 Relay 1 Default: contact closed
3 Relay 1 Input contact

X3, customer relays 3 and 4
1 .
3
4
6

X4, RSI connection
1 .
4

1 Red LED
2 Yellow LED
3 Green LED
4 GND

X5, customer inputs
1
4
5
8

1 Input 1
2 GND
3 Input 2
4 GND
5 Input 3
6 GND
7 Input 4
8 GND
Connector X6, voltage supply
Type of connector:

1 24V switched
2 GND load

Coding connector
Type of connector:
Jumper strip 2M
This connector is used for the short-circuit bridge to code the second relay
panel for external features.
Replacement
Please note that in case of a relay panel replacement the coding
i connector (for the second relay panel in the system) must be detached
from the defective component and attached to the new one.
Technical data
USB data transfer rate: 1.5 Mbit/sec
Relay switching contacts: 24V / 1A load capacity

RSI interface: 24 V / 20 mA load capacity
Voltage supply: +5 V
+24 V only for RSI operation
Length: 210 mm
Width: 37 mm
Height without terminal
strips: 38 mm
Height with terminal strips: 50 mm
Weight: 0.240 kg
Weight with terminal strips: 0.270 kg

Remote Status Indicator
Part number Version
01750047663 Remote status indicator - standard
01750069332 Remote status indicator - audio
Remote status indicator - standard Remote status indicator - audio
Description
This display can be installed physically separate from the system. It serves to
inform the operator of the current status of the system. In contrast to the
remote status indicator - standard, the remote status indicator - audio also
features an acoustic signal generator. In the case of display (red) (see section
"Indicators and controls"), an additional continuous tone is generated. It can be
deactivated via the Audio Reset key. However, the optical display is still output.

Indicators and controls Remote Status Indicator
Indicators and controls

Remote status indicator - standard Remote status indicator - audio
1
2
3
1
2 4
3
5
Pos. Indicator / Meaning Action

Function
1 Red SERVICE REQUIRED Follow the instructions on
the system's operator panel
or monitor.
2 Yellow SUPPLIES REQUIRED Follow the instructions on
the system's operator panel
or monitor.
3 Green IN SERVICE
(system is in service)
4 Acoustic Continuous tone for See pos. 1
signal 'SERVICE REQUIRED'
generator
5 'Audio Turns off continuous
Reset' key tone.

Remote Status Indicator Pin assignment
Pin assignment
Remote status indicator - standard
Pin Description
1 Service display 'red' (pin 11 on the relay panel for external features)
2 Service display 'yellow' (pin 12 on the relay panel for external features)
3 Service display 'green' (pin 13 on the relay for external features)
4 GND (pin 14 on the relay panel for external features)

Pin assignment Remote Status Indicator
Remote status indicator - audio
Pin Description
1 Service display 'red' (pin 11 on the relay panel for external features)
2 Service display 'yellow' (pin 12 on the relay panel for external features)
3 Service display 'green' (pin 13 on the relay panel for external features)
4 GND (pin 14 on the relay panel for external features)

Operator Panel USB
Operator Panel USB 01750076793
Operator Panel USB 01750109076
Introduction

Introduction Operator Panel USB
This component allows the operator of the self-service system or the service
technician to perform various operations and indicates the operating status.
Compared to the functionality of the V.24 versions used up to now the

following functions have been added:
− Integration of the external control unit for the central USB special
electronics
− Additional shift key to enter letters and special characters via the keypad
− Additional key to switch between several logical application levels (e.g.
SOP and ProPxD)
The labeling of the keys and indicators can be customized using the supplied
sets of labels.
The contrast of the LCD can be set by means of the application software.
Connection to the I²C bus of the central USB special electronics is only needed
for the functions of the external control unit.
i The ic port connector to the central USB special electronics may only
be attached or detached while there is no connection to the power
supply. Improper handling can cause irreparable damage to the
component.
The +5V operating voltage is supplied via the central USB special electronics.

Operator Panel USB Introduction
Switching on
As soon as the supply voltage is applied via USB, the operator panel switches
on automatically and performs a power-on routine with an internal test.
At power-on the booter checks if valid firmware is available. If that is the case,
the firmware is started. The firmware performs a self-test at power-on (main
memory, USB port, LCD and keyboard).
The result of the self-test is shown on a start display for approximately five
seconds. Then the graphics display is deleted.
If an error occurred during the internal test, the red service LED is lit, provided
that it is not disabled by the application software.
i Replace the operator panel if the error keeps occurring after the unit
has been switched on repeatedly.
Operation settings
The operation settings are made via the application software.

Description of keys and indicators Operator Panel USB
Description of keys and indicators
1 8
2 9
3 10
4 11
5 A B C D E F 12
1 2 3
13
14
4 5 6 15
7 8 9 16
17
6 0
18
19
1 Function key 5 11 Function key 4

2 Function key 6 12 Keys for hexadecimal codes
3 Function key 7 13 ON/OFF key for ZSE USB
4 Function key 8 (central USB special electronics)
5 Service key 14 Status indicators for ZSE USB
6 Shift key 'a b c' 15 Speaker key for ZSE USB
7 Display 16 LCD Light key for ZSE USB
8 Function key 1 17 SOP key for ZSE USB
9 Function key 2 18 Status indicators
10 Function key 3 19 Standard entry keys

Operator Panel USB Description of keys and indicators
Keys and indicators for operator panel functions
Function keys F1 through F8

The functions of these keys depend on the application.
Service key
This key is used to toggle between different logical application levels during
the running application.
'a b c' key

This shift key for entering letters and special characters is not supported by all
applications. First press this key before entering letters and special characters.
The enter mode is maintained until the key is pressed again.
Keys A through F
Use these keys to enter hexadecimal codes.
Standard entry keys

This keys serve to enter letters, digits and special characters. The keys in the
right column of this keypad (e.g. the Confirm key) are used for entry control.
Status indicators
Customer yellow LED
Cash yellow LED
Paper red LED
Service red LED
Operation green LED

Description of keys and indicators Operator Panel USB
Keys and indicators for functions of the external

control unit
ON / OFF key
If the central USB special electronics is in standby mode (red STANDBY LED
on, green ON LED off), pressing this key tells the system that you want to
switch it on. Switching on then takes place according to the application
software settings.
Pressing this key causes the green ON LED to flash in confirmation and to
indicate the restart phase which takes about ten seconds. At the end of the
restart phase, the system is switched on and the green ON LED shines
continuously.
Pressing this key in operating mode is interpreted as a request to switch to
standby mode, and the green LED flashes in confirmation. If this switchover
takes place according to the application software settings, the red STANDBY
LED shines continuously.
Speaker key
This key is used to adjust the volume of the system loudspeaker in eight steps.
The volume is increased by one step whenever this key is pressed. When the
highest volume is reached, the next keystroke will return the volume to the
lowest level. The last setting is automatically saved.
LCD Light key

This key is used to switch the LCD backlight on and off. Enabling of this
function is indicated by the yellow LCD LIGHT LED, and the backlight is
switched on permanently and cannot be switched off by a software request.

Operator Panel USB Description of keys and indicators
SOP key
Pressing this key tells the system that you want to switch on the application
program's SOP mode.
The yellow SOP LED lights up briefly to confirm that this key has been
pressed. SOP mode itself is called according to the application program's
settings.
Status indicators
STANDBY red LED
ON green LED
LCD LIGHT yellow LED
SOP yellow LED
Indicators for UPS operation

The operating state of a UPS is indicated by the following yellow LEDs.
UPS WORKING The power supply has failed and the UPS is active.
CAPACITY EMPTY The UPS' storage capacity is no longer adequate.

Replacing the label strips Operator Panel USB
Replacing the label strips

Labeling of the function keys F1 through F4, F5 through F8 and of the keys
and indicators which are located to the right of the standard entry keys can be
customized with the supplied label strips.
Perform the following steps to change the strips:
i To avoid damage to the logic by static, discharge the static by touching

a grounded surface.
• Release the connector lock and unplug the connector from the operator
panel.
Replacing label strips in the upper section of the operator panel
On the rear side of the operator panel

remove screw (1) at the top and
remove the cover (2).
Replace the label strip on the right

side (1) and/or on the left.

Operator Panel USB Replacing the label strips
Replacing label strips in the lower section of the operator panel
On the rear side of the operator panel

remove screws (1) and (2) at the
bottom and remove the cover (3).
Replace the labeling strip (1).
• Reassemble in reverse order of removal.

Technical specifications Operator Panel USB
Pin assignment
USB port
USB 4-pin (type B)
4 3
Pin Name Comment

1 5V
2 D-
3 D+
4 GND

Operator Panel USB Technical specifications
I²C bus
Type of connector:
RJ45 8F
Pin Name Comment

1 5V switched Not connected
2 5V standby For the integrated external control unit
function
3 GND
4
5
6 I²C data
7 GND
8 I²C clock

Technical specifications Operator Panel USB
Technical data
LCD
LCD resolution: 240 x 128 pixel

LCD size: 108 x 58 mm
Backlight: can be switched on via the
application program
Contrast: can be set via the application
program
Data interface
System connection: USB 1.1 full speed

Integrated external control unit: I²C bus
Power supply
Integrated external control unit: + 5 V via USB port

Connection of external control unit: + 5 V standby from SE
Length: 240 mm
Width: 170 mm
Height: 29 mm
Weight: 0.76 kg

Plug-in Media Entry Indicators
Structure
The media entry indicators comprise a plastic frame, the LED board and the
optical indicator.
1 Plastic frame 3 LED board

2 Optical indicator

Pin assignment Plug-in Media Entry Indicators
The LED board includes the connector and an IC with the LED, which is the
light source for the optical indicator.
1 Connector
2 IC with LED
Pin assignment
Type of connector:
1 Dubox 3-pin, M
Pin Description
1 Source
2 Not used
3 GND

Thermostat 0284502000
The thermostat has an electronics module which eliminates the need to adjust
the thermostat. It measures the temperature and controls the heating elements
by means of the sensors connected to it.
The DC voltages required for the electronic module are created in the
thermostat itself.
Switching points of heating control

Heating on Temperature ≤ 8 °C
Heating off Temperature ≥ 12 °C
Response threshold of safety
temperature monitor in the
heating element Temperature ≥ 130 °C
Supply voltage 120 / 230 V (selector switch)
Fuse for heating cable T 8 A, Ø 6.35 mm x 31.75 mm
Fuse for electronics module T 40 mA, Ø 6.35 mm x 31.75 mm

Ready indication Thermostat 0284502000
1 Connection for power supply

2 Connection for both heating elements by means of a Y cable
3 LED (green and red)
4 Connector for temperature sensor
5 Function key
Ready indication
green LED: ready
red LED: Cable for heating element is carrying voltage

Thermostat 0284502000 Pin assignment of thermostat (4 pins)
Pin assignment of thermostat (4 pins)
Pin Assignment
1 12 V (connection for temperature sensor)
2 n.c.
3 Temperature sensor input
4 GND
Temperature sensor
The temperature sensor is located underneath the customer panel.
Maintenance
The function of the heating unit can also be checked if the temperature is
above 8 °C. For this purpose press the key integrated in the electronic control.
While it is pressed, it is checked whether a sensor is connected and whether
the power supply is switched through to the heating elements. If the sensor is
not connected, the heat is not turned on even if the key is pressed.
Pressing the test button turns on the heat automatically for five minutes.

Maintenance Thermostat 0284502000

Smart UPS 750
Type Part number Description
120 V 01750085298 UPS for 120 V power supply systems
230 V 01750085297 UPS for 230 V power supply systems
01750109003
I
st
Te
Smart UPS 750 prevents power failures, voltage drops and under- and
overvoltages reaching the connected devices.
It filters out minor voltage fluctuations and protects the connected devices by
disconnecting the power input cable internally and then providing an
uninterrupted power supply via an internal battery until the external power
supply is reliable again.

Controls Smart UPS 750
Controls
Front
1
2
9
I
st 3
Te
4
5
10
6
7
8
Indicators Button
1 Row of LEDs 'Battery charge / line voltage' 9 ON / TEST
2 'Overload' LED 10 OFF
3 'Battery operation' LED
4 'Voltage reduction' LED
5 'Replace battery' LED
6 'Online' LED
7 Row of LEDs 'Device load'
8 'Voltage boost' LED

Smart UPS 750 Controls
Rear
APC Smart-UPS 750 (230 V)
1
2
3
1 USB port 5 Power output

2 V.24 / status display 6 Fuse
3 TVSS earth 7 Power supply
4 Add-on slot 8 Battery connection

Controls Smart UPS 750
APC Smart-UPS 750 (120 V)
1
2
3
4
1 USB port 6 Power output

2 V.24 / status display 7 Fuse
3 'Faulty house wiring' LED 8 Power cable
4 TVSS earth 9 Battery connection
5 Add-on slot
* see section "LEDs and acoustic signals"

Smart UPS 750 Safety precautions
Safety precautions
− Before installing the V.24 cable unplug the UPS. Reconnect the power
connector only after all signal connections have been restored.
− The UPS is equipped with an internal energy source (battery). You should
therefore note that, with a UPS switched on, power output is still active
even if the device is not connected to the power supply.
− Press the OFF button for at least one second to interrupt the power supply
of the UPS so that the connected devices are turned off. Remove the UPS
power plug and disconnect the plugs of the devices connected to it at the
rear of the UPS.
Before removing the UPS, first detach the battery connection on the
rear of the device and press the ON / TEST button to discharge the
capacitors inside the UPS.

Switching on Smart UPS 750
Switching on
Press the ON / TEST button.
The UPS issues an acoustic signal

I
st
and carries out a self-test, while the
Te
connected devices are immediately
supplied with power (see section "Self-
test").
Switching off
Press the OFF button to switch the
output power of the UPS off.
I
st
Te
i The UPS is switched on (the internal processor is running) when the

power cable is connected and line voltage is available. Even after the
UPS has been switched off, it maintains the battery charge and
responds to commands from the PC.

Smart UPS 750 Self-test
Self-test
I
Test
I
st
Te
The self-test can be used to test the UPS operation and the battery charge
level.
If the UPS is connected to a safety socket, a self-test is carried out

automatically when the ON / TEST button is pressed.
The UPS issues a beep, and the 'Online' LED blinks.
If you want to perform a self-test manually, keep the ON / TEST button

pressed for a few seconds.

Settings via the software Smart UPS 750
i As a default, the UPS carries out a self-test whenever it is switched on

and every 14 days (to be set via the software).
During the self-test the UPS supplies the connected devices with
battery power for a short period of time (the 'Battery operation' LED
shines). If the UPS passes the self-test, it switches back to line power.
The 'Battery operation' LED goes off, and the 'Online' LED goes on.
If the UPS does not pass the self-test, it switches to line power
immediately, and the LED indicating that the 'Replace battery' LED
lights up. This does not affect the connected devices. Charge the
battery over night and repeat the self-test. If the 'Replace battery' LED
still lights up after the battery has been charged, the battery must be
replaced.
See section "Malfunctions" this chapter. How to replace the UPS is

described in the chapter "Removal/Installation of Components".
Settings via the software

Use the PowerChute software to make various configuration settings.
You can set the voltage threshold (standard setting 'high'), for example, and
set the time when a warning signal should indicate a low battery charge
(standard setting: 2 minutes).

Smart UPS 750 LEDs and acoustic signals
LEDs and acoustic signals

LED Indicator Meaning Audible
alarm
'Online' Permanent The connected devices are
light supplied with line voltage.
Blinking The self-test is performed. Beep
Off The UPS runs on battery or
it must be switched on.
'Voltage Permanent The UPS compensates for
increase' light low voltage (no power-fail
mode).
'Voltage Permanent The UPS compensates for
reduction' light excess voltage (no power-
fail mode).
'Overload' Permanent Load of > 700 VA / 500 W Continuous
light tone
'Battery Permanent The connected devices are Four beeps
operation' light supplied with power from the every 30 sec.
battery.
'Replace Permanent End of battery life. Short beeps
battery' light of 1 minute,
repeated
every five
hours.
Blinking Battery is not connected. A short beep
sounds every
two seconds.

LEDs and acoustic signals Smart UPS 750

alarm
Row of LEDs Permanent Device load >
'Device load' light
84% 67% 50% 33% 16%
Row of LEDs Permanent Battery charge

'Battery light
charge / line
voltage'
96% 72% 48% 24% 0%

Bottom LED blinking:
2 minutes operating time left.
Hold the ON / TEST button pressed for a few
seconds.

Smart UPS 750 LEDs and acoustic signals

alarm
Permanent Line voltage >
light
* 266V 248V 229V 210V 191V

** 133V 124V 114V 105V 96V
'Faulty Permanent The UPS is connected to an
housing light improperly wired power
wiring' on the source.
rear of the Please inform the electrical
device engineer.
(only 120 V
version)
All LEDs Continuously The UPS is switched off via
alternating the software.
Permanent Internal UPS problem. Continuous
light tone
Rows of LEDs Blinking The room temperature is not
'Battery within the specified values.
charge / line
voltage' and
'Device load'
* 230 V version
** 120 V version

Malfunctions Smart UPS 750
Malfunctions
i For detailed operating and maintenance instructions refer to the
enclosed separate UPS device description.
Problem Possible cause Remedy

The UPS The ON/TEST button Press the ON/TEST button to
cannot be has not been pressed. switch the UPS and the connected
switched on. devices on.
The UPS is not Check that the power cable is
connected. properly connected on both sides.
The UPS fuse has Disconnect connected components
jumped out. from the UPS and examine for line
faults. Eliminate the error,
reconnect the components and
press the automatic switch back in
on the automatic circuit breaker at
the rear of the UPS.
Very low or no line Check the power supply with the
voltage. voltmeter.
The battery is not Check whether the battery
connected properly. connection is properly attached on
the rear of the device.
The UPS Internal UPS problem. Do not use the UPS. Disconnect
cannot be the UPS from line power, detach
switched off. the battery connection on the rear
of the device and press the ON /
TEST button to discharge the
capacitors inside the UPS.
Replace the UPS.

Smart UPS 750 Malfunctions

The UPS runs Very high, low or Plug the UPS in a different socket
on battery distorted line voltage. or connect it to a different electric
although line circuit. Fuel-driven generators of
voltage is moderate quality can lead to
available. voltage distortion.
Check the input voltage via the row
of LEDs 'Battery charge / line
voltage' (see section "LEDs and
acoustic signals").
Reduce the voltage threshold of
the UPS, if necessary, using the
PowerChute software.
The UPS fuse has Disconnect connected components
jumped out. from the UPS and examine for line
faults. Eliminate the error,
reconnect the components and
press the automatic switch back in
on the automatic circuit breaker at
the rear of the UPS.
The UPS does The battery is weak Charge the battery. The battery of
not offer the due to a recent line the UPS must be charged after a
expected power failure or has longer power failure. Batteries get
lifetime in only a short lifetime weak faster if they are operated
battery mode. left. often or at increased temperatures.
If the battery has reached almost
the end of its life, it should be
replaced even if the 'Replace
battery' LED has not yet come on.
The UPS beeps Normal UPS None.
occasionally. operation.
The 'Overload' The UPS is The connected devices exceed the
LED shines and overloaded. specified maximum load.
a continuous Disconnect devices from the UPS
tone sounds. which are not needed to eliminate
the overload.
The UPS supplies current as long
as it is switched on and the fuse
has not jumped out. If line power
fails battery operation will not start.

Malfunctions Smart UPS 750

The LEDs on The UPS was not None.
the front of the switched off manually The UPS starts up automatically
device blink but via the software. as soon as input voltage is
one after the restored.
other.
The left, right or Internal UPS problem. Do not use the UPS, turn it off
center section The UPS has immediately, detach the battery
of the LEDs is switched off. connection on the rear of the
blinking. device. Have the UPS repaired.
The 'Replace The UPS is turned off None.
battery' LED and the battery is The UPS returns automatically to
shines and the exhausted due to an normal operation as soon as
'Online' LED is extended power power is restored and the battery
off. failure. is charged sufficiently.
The 'Replace Weak battery Charge the battery for at least 24
battery' LED hours. Replace the battery if the
shines. problem still exists after charging.
The 'Replace The battery is not Check whether the battery
battery' LED connected properly. connection is properly attached on
shines and the rear of the device.
every two
seconds a beep
sounds.
The 'Replace Self-test has failed. Charge the battery 24 hours and
battery' LED repeat the self-test.
shines and
short beeps
sound for one
minute. The
alarm is
repeated every
five hours.

Smart UPS 750 Repairs and battery replacement

The LED rows The UPS has Check whether the room
'Battery charge/ switched off. The temperature is within the specified
line voltage' temperature has value range (see section
and 'Device exceed the "Technical data"). Check whether
load' are permissible limit value.
the UPS is properly installed and
blinking whether there is sufficient
simultaneously. ventilation for the UPS.
Let the UPS cool off and re-start it.
All LEDs are off The UPS has powered None.
and the UPS is down and the battery The UPS returns automatically to
connected to has discharged due to normal operation as soon as
the network. an extended power power is restored and the battery
failure. is charged sufficiently.
All LEDs are on Internal UPS problem. Turn the UPS off immediately and
and a have it repaired!
continuous tone
sounds.
i If the fault cannot be eliminated, you must replace the UPS (see
chapter "Removal/Installation of Components").
Repairs and battery replacement

Repairs and battery replacement must be carried out by the repair center.

Pin assignment Smart UPS 750
Pin assignment
To evaluate the status messages of the UPS and to control on / off switching ,
a data interface is available.
RS-232
D-SUB 9-pin, F
Pin Assignment Meaning

1 UPS switch-off/TX input (V.24)
2 Line failure/RX output (V.24)
3 Switching contact, N/O contact between pin ¾ (SE) Battery
operation
4 Base contact for the switch contacts 3, 5, 6
5 Switching contact, N/O contact between pin 4/5 (SE) Weak
battery
6 Switching contact, N/C contact between pin 4/6
7 UPS ON/OFF (input signal)
8 Unregulated output, 24 V DC
9 GND (V.24)

Smart UPS 750 Pin assignment
USB
USB type B 4-pin, M
3 4
Pin Assignment
1 V DC
2 - DATA
3 + DATA
4 GND

Technical data Smart UPS 750
Technical data
230 V version
Rated power 750 VA / 500 W
Input
Voltage range: 220 - 240 V
Rated frequency: 50 or 60 Hz ± 3 Hz
Output
Nominal output voltage 230 V
Waveform: Sinusoidal wave
Battery
Battery type: Lead, sealed and maintenance-free
Charging period: approx. 3 h
Standard service life with half load: 12 minutes (250 W)
Standard service life with full load: 4.5 minutes (500 W)
Ambient conditions
Electrical safety: IEC 60950-1, EN 50091-1,
EN 50091-2, VDE, CE, C-TICK,
GOST
Ambient temperature (operation): 0 to 40 °C at max. 95 % r.h.
Dimensions
Height / width / depth: 160 x 140 x 360 mm
Weight 13.2 kg

Smart UPS 750 Technical data
120 V version
Rated power 750 VA / 500 W
Input
Voltage range: 110 - 120 V
Rated frequency: 50 or 60 Hz ± 3 Hz
Output
Nominal output voltage 120 V
Waveform: Sinusoidal wave
Battery
Battery type: Lead, sealed and maintenance-free
Charging period: approx. 3 h
Standard service life with half load: 12 minutes (250 W)
Standard service life with full load: 4.5 minutes (500 W)
Ambient conditions
Electrical safety: UL 1778, CSA 107.1, FCC Part 15
Class A, EN 55022, VCCI, BSMI
Ambient temperature (operation): 0 to 40 °C at max. 95 % r.h.
Dimensions
Height / width / depth: 160 x 140 x 360 mm
Weight 13.2 kg

Technical data Smart UPS 750

Removal/Installation of Components
This chapter describes removing and installing the components of
ProCash 1500xe USB in the frontload and rearload version and of
ProCash 1500xe Frontload USB Semi-Outdoor and customer-specific device
versions. Therefore the orientation of the components described may differ.
However, the procedure of removing and installing the components is the
same for all device versions. Wherever there are deviations, special note is
made and the respective device version is mentioned in parentheses behind
the component.

Device views Removal/Installation of Components
Device views
Front views
Device with front door (Front- and Rearload)
1 Control panel 3 Cash output

2 Lock of front door 4 Front door

Removal/Installation of Components Device views
Device with barcode reader (Front- and Rearload)

2 Lock of front door 5 Front door
3 Barcode reader

Device with cash-out panel (Rearload)

2 Lock of front panel 4 Front panel

Device with standard topper
3
4
1
6
2
1 Lock of front door 5 Customer panel

2 Cash output 6 Cash slot camera
3 Standard topper 7 Front door
4 Logo

Rear views
Rearload device with strongbox
1 Lock for the operator panel 3 Handle

USB window 4 Door lock of operating unit
2 Window for operator 5 Key-operated lock for strongbox
panel USB

Rearload device with UL safe
1 Lock for the operator panel 5 Operator panel USB window

USB window 6 Door lock of operating unit
2 Handle 7 Safe door
3 Number combination lock 8 Key lock
4 Safe door lever

Customer panel views
Device with 10.4" LCD monitor with softkeys and hybrid

DIP reader
1 Loudspeakers 6 Logo panel

2 10.4" LCD monitor with softkeys 7 Portrait camera
3 Optical indicator for presenter 8 Optical indicator for card input
4 Presenter 9 Card input slot of hybrid DIP
5 Keypad EPP V5 reader
10 Card logo

Device with 12" LCD monitor, softkeys and barcode

reader BR02

2 12" LCD monitor 7 Softkeys
3 Optical indicator for presenter 8 Portrait camera
4 Presenter 9 Optical indicator for card input
5 Keypad EPP V5 10 Headphone jack
11 Card input CHD V2x
12 Card logo
13 Barcode reader BR 02

Device with 15" LCD touch monitor
1 Loudspeakers 7 Portrait camera

2 15" LCD monitor with touch 8 Optical indicator for card input
3 Optical indicator for presenter 9 Card input CHD V2x
4 Presenter 10 Card logo
5 Keypad EPP V5
6 Logo panel

Device with 15" LCD monitor with touchscreen and

barcode reader

2 15" LCD monitor 7 Portrait camera
3 Optical indicator for presenter 8 Optical indicator for card input
4 Presenter 9 Headphone jack
5 Keypad EPP V5 10 Card input CHD V2x
11 Card logo
12 Barcode reader

Front door open
Frontload device with UL safe
1 Shutter of output transport 4 Key lock

2 Number combination lock 5 Safe door
3 Handle 6 Front door
The starting position of the handle (3) can be different depending on

i the lock and the device version.

Rearload device with strongbox
1 Shutter of output transport

Safe door open
Frontload device with UL safe
1 Release lever CMD 3 Relay panel for external features

2 CMD-V4

Customer panel open
ProCash 1500xe USB Frontload
1 Keypad EPP V5 9 Barcode reader

2 Loudspeakers 10 Optical indicator for card reader
3 Optical indicator for receipt 11 Portrait camera
printer 12 Touch controller
4 LCD monitor 13 Operating unit
5 System unit (PC) 14 Journal printer
6 Power distributor 15 Card reader CHD-V2x or
7 Central USB special electronics hybrid DIP reader*
8 Receipt printer
* A hybrid DIP reader or a CHD-V2x card reader can be installed.

ProCash 1500xe USB Rearload
1 Keypad EPP V5 7 Barcode reader

2 System loudspeaker 8 Optical indicator for card reader
3 Optical indicator for presenter 9 Anti-skimming base unit
4 LCD monitor 10 Card reader CHD-V2x or
5 Power supply unit hybrid DIP reader*
6 Receipt printer
* A hybrid DIP reader or a CHD-V2x card reader can be installed.

Door of operating unit open (only Rearload)
1 Operator panel USB 6 Fan

2 System unit (PC) 7 Power distributor
3 ASKIM button 8 Receipt printer
4 Hybrid DIP reader CHD-V2x, 9 Special electronics USB
card reject box, card reject
tray or card reject module *
5 Capacitor
* In connection with a CHD-V2x card reader the device may be equipped

with a card reject tray, a card reject box or a card reject module.

Opening / closing the device Removal/Installation of Components
Opening / closing the device
Opening / closing the front door

Opening it:
Turn the key (1) 90 degrees to the
right and open the front door.
Closing it:
Close the front door, and turn the key
(1) 90 degrees to the left.
Opening / closing the cash-out panel

Opening it:
right and swing the cash-out panel
forwards (see arrow).
Closing it:
Close the cash-out panel, and turn the
key (1) 90 degrees to the left.

Removal/Installation of Components Opening / closing the device
Lifting up / lowering the customer panel
Device with front door
• Open the front door (see section "Opening / closing the device").
Be careful not to injure your head when the customer panel is lifted up!
Lifting it up:
Hold the customer panel on both sides
(see arrows) and lift it up.
Lowering it:
Hold the customer panel on both sides
(see arrows) and push it down.
Danger of injury!
The customer panel may only
be closed with the front door
open and the equipment
carriage pushed into position.

Device with cash-out panel
• Open the cash-out panel (see section "Opening / closing the device").
Lifting it up:
Grasp the customer panel on the front
edge (1) and lift it.
Lowering it:
Grasp the customer panel on the front
edge and push it down.
Danger of injury!
The customer panel may only
be closed with the cash-out
panel open and the equipment
carriage pushed into position.

Removal/Installation of Components Opening / closing the device
Door of operating unit open / closed (only

Rearload)
Opening it:
right. Lift the door of the operating unit
up by the handle.
Closing it:
Close the door of the operating unit.
Turn the key 90 degrees to the left and
pull it from the lock.
Pulling out / pushing in the cash media dispenser
• Open the front door (only FL) (see section "Opening / closing the device").
• Open the safe door (please refer to the ProCash 1500xe operating
manual).
Pulling it out:
Pull the cash media dispenser out of
the device as far as possible by the
green release lever (1).
Pushing it in:
Hold the green release lever (1) and
push the cash media dispenser into
the device as far as possible (the cash
media dispenser must audibly click
into place).

Pulling out / pushing in the equipment carriage
Frontload
• Lift the customer panel up (see section "Opening / closing the device").
Pulling it out:
Using the green handle (1), pull the
equipment carriage out of the device
as far as possible.
Pushing it in:
Push the equipment carriage into the
device by the green handle until it
clicks into place.
Rearload
• Raise the door of the operating unit (see section "Opening / closing the
device").
Pulling it out:
Using the green handle (1), pull the
equipment carriage out of the device
as far as possible.
Pushing it in:
Push the equipment carriage into the
device by the green handle until it
clicks into place.

Removal/Installation of Components Operator panel USB
Operator panel USB

Frontload
• Open the front door (see section "Opening / closing the front door").
The connector of the I²C port for the central USB special electronics
i may only be attached or detached when the device is disconnected
The operator panel USB (1) is located

on the inside of the front door.
Lift the operator panel USB up and

detach both cables (1).

Operator panel USB Removal/Installation of Components
Remove screw (1).

Lift the operator panel USB out of its
holder.

in reverse order.
Rearload
device").
• Pull down the operator panel USB (please refer to the ProCash 1500xe
USB Operating Manual).
Detach connectors (1) and (2).

Removal/Installation of Components Operator panel USB
Remove screw (1).

Lift the operator panel USB out of its
holder (2).

in reverse order.

External control unit Removal/Installation of Components

Frontload
Loosen the screws (1) and (2) with a
Torx 20 screwdriver and push the
external control unit a little to the right.
Remove the cable tie (1), detach the

connector (2) at the rear and remove
the external control unit.

in reverse order.

Removal/Installation of Components Keypad EPP V5 (Semi-Outdoor)
Keypad EPP V5 (Semi-Outdoor)

Remove the service cover (1) of the
EPP V5 keypad.
Detach the USB cable (1). Remove

knurled screws (2) and (3) completely
and take out the mounting plate (4)
with the knurled screws. Lower the
EPP V5 keypad slightly and remove it
in the direction shown by the arrow.
When you replace it, make sure

i that the seals are correctly
positioned.


Keypad EPP V5 Removal/Installation of Components
Keypad EPP V5
Remove the service cover (1) of the
EPP V5 keypad.
Detach the USB cable (1), remove

screws (2) to (5) and remove the EPP
V5 keypad downwards.

in reverse order.

Removal/Installation of Components Barcode reader BR 02
Barcode reader BR 02
If there is an EPP V5 keypad in the
device, open the service cover (1) of
the EPP V5 keyboard and detach the
USB cable (2) underneath it.
Detach connector (3).

Remove screws (4) to (7) and remove
the cover.

the barcode reader with its mount.

Optical indicators for receipt printer / CHD V2xRemoval/Installation of Components
Remove screws (1) and (2) and

remove the mount.

in reverse order.
Optical indicators for receipt printer / CHD

V2x
The optical indicators for the receipt printer and the card handling
i device CHD V2x are removed in the same way.
Push the catches in the direction
shown by the arrow and remove the
optical indicators.

in reverse order.

Removal/Installation of Components Portrait camera
Portrait camera
Remove screws (1) and (2) from
below.
Remove screw (1) and take off the

cover (2) in the direction shown by the
arrow.

Customer panel special electronics Removal/Installation of Components
Remove the cable ties (1), remove the

cables and disconnect the plug
connections (2) and (3).

in reverse order.

Detach all connectors from the

customer panel special electronics (1).
Loosen screws (2) and (3) and push

the customer panel special electronics
up and remove it.

in reverse order.

Removal/Installation of Components Audio changeover switch
Audio changeover switch

Remove screw (1) and take off the
cover (2) in the direction shown by the
arrow.
Detach the connectors from the audio

changeover switch (1).
Release the board from its retaining

clips and remove it.

in reverse order.

Audio changeover switch Removal/Installation of Components
When re-placing the cover, make sure

to push it underneath the customer
panel edge (see arrow) and in the
cutout (1).

Removal/Installation of Components12.1" DVI Highbright box (Semi-Outdoor)
12.1" DVI Highbright box (Semi-Outdoor)

Loosen screws (1) to (3). Push the
plate (4) slightly in the direction shown
by the arrow and remove it downwards
from the monitor.
Detach connectors (1) to (3). Loosen

screw (4) and remove the ground
connection. Loosen the knurled
screws (5) and (6).
Hold on to the LCD monitor

i while doing so.
Remove the LCD monitor downwards.


12.1" LCD box DVI Removal/Installation of Components
12.1" LCD box DVI

Detach connector (1), loosen the
knurled screws of connector (2) and
detach it. Remove screw (3) for the
ground connection. Loosen knurled
screw (4).
Loosen the knurled screw (1). Push

the monitor a little in the direction
shown by the arrow and remove it
from the holder (2) on the left side and
the corresponding holder on the right
side.

in reverse order.
Depending on the device version, the screws can be either regular or

i knurled screws.

Removal/Installation of Components Softkeys
Softkeys
• Remove the LCD monitor (see section "12.1" LCD box DVI").
Detach connector (1) from the
customer panel special electronics.
Remove the seven screws (2). Pull the

frame (3) a little toward you and
remove it from the device.
Place the frame with the softkeys
facing downwards on a flat surface.
Depending on the device version, the screw can be in the upper left or
i in the upper right-hand corner.

Protective screen Removal/Installation of Components
Disconnect the plug connections (1)

and (2) and remove the ten screws (3).
Remove the frame (4) upward.
Remove the protective screen with the

softkeys from the frame, if necessary.
Lift the softkeys (1) on the left and on

the right side a little and remove them.
The softkeys are always

i replaced in pairs.

in reverse order.
Protective screen
• Remove the softkeys (see section "Softkeys") and remove the protective
screen.
Reinstall it by following the same steps in reverse order.

Removal/Installation of Components Touch controller
Touch controller
Remove screws (1) and (2).
Detach connector (1) at the rear of the

touch controller.
Disconnect the plug connection (2)

and remove the touch controller.

in reverse order.

15" LCD monitor Removal/Installation of Components
15" LCD monitor

Remove screws (1) and (2) of the
touch controller.
Loosen the screws (5) to (7) on the

side and remove screw (8).
Hold on to the LCD monitor

i while doing so.
Remove the LCD monitor.

in reverse order.

Removal/Installation of Components 15" Touchscreen
15" Touchscreen
• Remove the touch controller (see section "Touch controller").
• Remove the LCD monitor (see section "15" LCD monitor").

Remove screw (1) for the ground
connection.
Remove screws (2) to (7) and ...
... disconnect the plug-in connection

(8). Loosen the screw and remove the
ground connection (9).
Remove the touch screen.

The touch screen must have a ground connection (9). If it does not
i have one, it must be retrofitted.

Logo illumination Removal/Installation of Components
Logo illumination
• Remove the LCD monitor.
Remove screw (1) for the ground
connection.
Remove screws (2) to (7) and set the

touch screen aside.
Remove the plate (4) towards the

front.
Remove the logo light (1).

in reverse order.

Removal/Installation of Components Logo illumination
Standard topper
Only replace the fluorescent tubes when no power is supplied to the
device. Therefore, disconnect the device from the power supply (see
chapter "Introduction", section "General power interrupt" in the
operating manual).
• Switch the device off and disconnect it from the power supply (see the
operating manual).
Release the locking pins by pressing
them down slightly (1) with a
screwdriver (Phillips PH2) and turn
them 90 degrees in the direction
2 shown by the arrow (2) until they
spring up.
Tilt the panel forward carefully by max.

10 degrees (3).

Pull the panel obliquely upwards to

release it from the standard Topper
housing (see arrow).
Place the panel in a location where it

will not be damaged.
Turn the fluorescent tube (1) or (2) to

removal position (see arrow) and take
it out towards the center of the
standard Topper.

Removal/Installation of Components Logo illumination
Please dispose of the fluorescent tube according to the applicable

i regulations of your country.
• Place a new fluorescent tube (see illustration below) in the socket and turn
it into contact position.
Fluorescent tube 230 V / 18 W
General Electric 'F 18 / 33'
(Order no.: 6651607337)
Fluorescent tube 120 V / 20 W

General Electric 'F20T12-CW (cool
white)'
(Order no.: 5454907537)
Insert the logo panel at the base on

both sides (see arrow).

Push the panel as far as possible

towards the housing of the standard
Topper.
Press the locking pins down as far as

possible (1).
Then use a screwdriver (Phillips PH2)

to turn them 90 degrees in the
Ensure that the pins lock into place

and lie flush with the housing.
• Connect the device to the power supply again and switch the device on
(see the operating manual).

Removal/Installation of Components Logo cover
Logo cover
The logo replacement, which is performed by the customer, is
i described in the operating manual for the device.
Use a sharp tool (e.g. pocketknife) to

pull the logo panel forwards by the
three catches (1) to (3). Pull the logo
panel (4) forwards.
Replace the logo.

in reverse order.
Standard topper
Release the locking pins by pressing
them down slightly (1) with a
screwdriver (Phillips PH2) and turn
them 90 degrees in the direction
2 shown by the arrow (2) until they
spring up.
Tilt the panel forward carefully by max.

10 degrees (3).

Logo cover Removal/Installation of Components
Pull the panel obliquely upwards to

release it from the standard Topper
housing (see arrow).
Place the panel face down on the

floor.
Loosen the knurled screws (1).

1
Lift the tension frame up slightly by the
two grip edges (2).
1

Removal/Installation of Components Logo cover
Remove the tension frame in the

Remove the diffuser panel (1) and the

1
logo (2).
Insert the new logo.

2 Reinstall it by following the same steps
in reverse order.

System unit (PC) Removal/Installation of Components
System unit (PC)

Frontload only:
Undo the knurled screw (1) completely

and remove it from the chassis.
Push the bar (2) as far as possible in

the direction shown by the arrow and
remove it.
Pull the PC (1) out of the device far

enough to be able to access the back
side.
Detach all connectors from the back
panel of the PC.
Remove the PC from the device.

in reverse order.
Before installing the new PC restore the existing hardware

i configuration.
This may require using additional PC cards or memory elements of the
old PC.
Notes for mounting the bar:

When tightening the knurled screw on the bar, lift the crossbar a little,
if necessary.

Removal/Installation of Components System loudspeaker
System loudspeaker

remove the system loudspeaker.

in reverse order.

ASKIM module Removal/Installation of Components
ASKIM module
General information
The screws which are removed in the process of disassembling the
i components are needed again for re-installing the components.
• Switch the device off (see chapter "Basic Operation" in the operating
manual).
• Lift the customer panel or the door of the operating unit up (see chapter
"Basic Operation" in the operating manual).
ASKIM sensor
The steps required to remove the ASKIM sensor are the same for
i front- and rearload devices.
Frontload Rearload
• Detach the cable of the ASKIM sensor and from the anti-skimming base
unit (1).

Removal/Installation of Components ASKIM module
Open the cable chain (1) and take the

ASKIM sensor cable coming from the
anti-skimming base unit out of the
cable chain.
Loosen screw (1) and remove the

ground connection.
Remove the ASKIM sensor from the

cable ties (1) and route the cable in
front of the plate (2).

In rearload devices remove the screw

in position (4).
Remove the faceplate (1).
Remove the ASKIM sensor (1).

in reverse order.
• When you have replaced the ASKIM sensor or the anti-skimming base unit,
test the ASKIM module as described in the chapter "Anti-Skimming Module
(ASKIM) 01750080047", section "Function test".

Frontload
Detach the cable (1) and (2) from the

anti-skimming base unit.
Remove the screws (1) and (2) and

remove the anti-skimming base unit
(3).

in reverse order.

Rearload
Detach the cable (1) and (2) from the

anti-skimming base unit.
Remove the screws (1) and (2) and

remove the anti-skimming base unit
(3).

in reverse order.

ASKIM button
Frontload
Loosen screws (1) and (2) of the

solenoid and remove the cable clips
(3) and (4). Lay the solenoid with the
connecting cable (5) aside.
Clip the LED (1) and the ASKIM button

(2) into the bracket for the ASKIM
button as shown.
For the LED proceed as follows:
Pull the plastic holder off the LED.
Push the LED through the hole. Snap
the plastic holder back on the LED.
Push the LED with plastic holder in the
opening.
• Press the cable clips (3) and (4) through the holes of the bracket and push
the cable of the magnetic switch (5) in the clips.

Fasten the magnetic switch with the

button bracket in the device using the
available screws (1) and (2).
Screw tight the 'laminated cover' to the

'bracket ASKIM button' (3).
Lay the button and LED cable (1)

along the cable harness.
Connect the reserve cable ASKIM to
the special electronics and lay it, too,
along the cable harness (see
arrows) ...
... up to the anti-skimming base unit.
Fasten the cable to the cable harness

with cable ties.

Rearload
• Remove the system unit (PC).

Clip the ASKIM button (1) and the LED
(2) into the bracket for the ASKIM
button (3) as shown.
For the LED proceed as follows:
Pull the plastic holder off the LED.
Push the LED through the hole. Snap
the plastic holder back on the LED.
Push the LED with plastic holder in the
opening.
Screw the clamping bracket (1) to the

bracket for the ASKIM button with two
screws from below.
Fasten the laminated cover to the

bracket for the ASKIM button (2).
Lay the button and LED cable towards

the front in the direction shown by the
arrow.
Attach the cable to the cable harness

using the cable ties and take the cable
in the direction shown by the arrow to
the opening.

Connect the ASKIM reserve cable to

the special electronics (1) and secure
the cable with cable ties.
Lay the cable forwards through the
opening (see arrows).
Secure the cables with cable ties and

take them further in the direction
shown by the arrow up to the position
of the anti-skimming base unit connect
them there later.

Removal/Installation of Components Gas spring
Gas spring
The gas spring for the customer panel and for the operating unit door
i is removed in the same way.
Removing and installing the gas spring is described for the gas spring
of the customer panel by way of example.
Without the gas springs, neither the door of the operating unit nor the
customer panel will stay in an open position.
When you let go of the customer panel or the door of the operating unit
they will fall shut.
Be careful not to injure your head when the customer panel or the door
of the operating unit is lifted up!
• Lift the customer panel up or open the door of the operating unit (see
section "Opening /closing the device").
Support the customer panel to prevent it from falling shut.
First remove the lower SL safety catch

and washer (1), then remove the upper
SL safety catch and washer (2).
Detach the gas spring first at the

bottom (1) and then at the top (2).

Gas spring Removal/Installation of Components
Inspect the upper hang-up bolt

(1) of the gas spring. If it shows
signs of increased wear and tear
it has to be replaced together
with the bracket (see section
"Gas spring bracket").
Lubricate the hang-up bolt (1) with

multi-purpose grease BP LS 2
(01750049230) or an equivalent
lubricant.

Removal/Installation of Components Gas spring bracket
Gas spring bracket

If the hang-up bolt of the gas spring bracket shows signs of increased
wear and tear the bracket and the gas spring have to be replaced (see
section "Gas spring").
Without the gas springs, neither the door of the operating unit nor the
customer panel will stay in an open position.
When you let go of the customer panel or the door of the operating unit
they will fall shut.
• Remove the gas spring (see section "Gas spring").
Remove screws (1) and (2) and remove

the gas spring bracket (3).
Lubricate the hang-up bolt (4) with

multi-purpose grease BP LS 2
(01750049230) or with an equivalent
lubricant.

in reverse order.
• Install the new gas spring (see section "Gas spring").

Smart UPS 750 (USB-S) Removal/Installation of Components
Smart UPS 750 (USB-S)

Before removing the UPS, first detach the battery connector at the rear
of the device and push the ON/TEST button to drain the capacitors
inside the UPS.
Frontload
Pull the Smart UPS 750 (1) with the
carriage out of the device as far as
possible.
Detach all cables from the back panel
of the Smart UPS 750.
The 110 V model has the

i connecting cable firmly attached
to the Smart UPS 750.
Therefore the connecting cable
must be removed from the
cable harness up to the plug
connection.
Make sure that the cables do not reach into the space where the
i equipment carriage is moved back and forth.
• Remove the Smart UPS 750 from the carriage.

Removal/Installation of Components Central power supply unit
Central power supply unit

Be careful not to injure your head when the customer panel or the door
of the operating unit is lifted up!
• Lift the customer panel up and pull out the equipment carriage or lift door of
the operating unit (see section "Opening / closing the device").
Frontload and Rearload without UPS
Removing the angled bracket (only

if a journal printer is integrated)
Undo screws (1) and (2) and push the

angled bracket slightly in the direction
shown by the arrow.
Remove the angled bracket

downwards from the device.
Loosen screws (1) and (2), pull the

central power supply unit towards the
center of the device, push it down
some and remove it.
Be sure to remember the

i position of the connectors.
Detach all connectors.

in reverse order.

Central power supply unit (USB-S) Removal/Installation of Components
Central power supply unit (USB-S)

Frontload
• Pull the Smart UPS 750 with the carriage out of the device as far as
possible (see section "Smart UPS 750 (USB-S)").
Remove screws (1) and (2) and take
the central power supply out upwards.
Be sure to remember the

i position of the connectors.
Detach all connectors.

in reverse order.

Removal/Installation of Components Power distributor
Power distributor
Frontload
Detach all connectors (1) from the

power distributor.
Loosen screw (2), push the power

distributor a little in the direction shown
by the arrow and remove it downwards
(the power distributor is only hinged in
the back).

in reverse order.
Depending on the device version the

power distributor features a ground
connection (1).

Power distributor Removal/Installation of Components
Rearload
device").
Detach all connectors (1) from the
power distributor.
Loosen the screw (2), lift the power

distributor up in front (see arrow), push
it slightly towards the center of the
device and remove it forwards (the
power distributor is only hinged in the
back).

in reverse order.

Removal/Installation of Components Receipt printer TP07/NP07
Receipt printer TP07/NP07

How to remove the printer is described for receipt printer TP07. The
i NP07 printer is removed in the same way.
• Pull out the equipment carriage (see section "Opening / closing the
device").
Detach the two connectors (1) and (2).
Press the green release mechanism

(1) down and push the printer in the
direction shown by the arrow (2) until it
stops.
Remove the printer up and out of the

device.

Removing the rocking bar Removal/Installation of Components
When replacing the thermal printer TP07 check whether there is

i rocking bar on the presenter. If there is one, remove the rocking bar
and place it in the new thermal receipt printer TP07 (see chapter
"Receipt Printer TP07/NP07", section "Setting the printer to the paper
type (only TP07)" in the service manual).
Removing the rocking bar

On the locking mechanism you will see
the word 'OPEN'. Press on 'OPEN' as
indicated by the arrow (1). Slightly
raise the presenter in the direction
shown by the arrow (2) and lift it out of
the printer.

Removal/Installation of Components Removing the rocking bar
Carefully press the left arm in the

direction shown by the arrow (1) until
you can remove the presenter's left-
hand bolt from the opening (2) in the
arm. On the right, detach the presenter
rocking bar from the right-hand bolt in
the direction shown by the arrow (3).
If thermal paper is used which

i has the thermal print side on the
inside of the paper roll, the
rocking bar must be mounted
(see chapter "Receipt Printer
TP07/NP07", section "Setting the
printer to the paper type (only
TP07)").
Push the shaft mountings (1) and (3)

4 3 2 1 over the corresponding shafts (2) and
(4) in the direction shown by the arrow.

Removing the rocking bar Removal/Installation of Components
Lower the old presenter in the

'CLOSE' is shown on the latching

mechanism.
Press the area marked CLOSE down

in the direction shown by the arrow (2)
until the latching mechanism audibly
locks into place.
Put the new printer in place making

sure that lugs (1) / (2) and the grooves
(3) / (4) of the printer mounting ...
... and the corresponding grooves (1) /

(2) and lugs (3) / (4) on the underside
of the printer interlock.

Removal/Installation of Components Journal printer
You may have to press the

i brackets (1) and (2) on the
printer together a little.
Push the printer far enough (3) that

the green release mechanism
engages in the direction shown by the
arrow (4).
Journal printer
device").
Detach the two connectors (1).
Loosen the screws (2) to (5).

Push the journal printer a little in the
direction shown by the arrow and lift it
up and out.

in reverse order.

Card handling device CHD V2x Removal/Installation of Components
Card handling device CHD V2x

When replacing the card reader check whether there is a chip card in
i the SAM socket. If so, remove the chip card and place it in the new
card reader (see the operating manual).
Make sure the device is installed in the correct position.

The position of the track is clearly identified by the connections.
device").
Detach connectors (1) and (2) and

remove the ground strap (3).
The position of the connectors

i depends on the track position.
Loosen screws (1) and (2) on the base

of the equipment carriage.
Push the card reader forward in the

direction of the customer panel and
remove it upwards.

Removal/Installation of Components Card handling device CHD V2x
Remove screws (1) and (2) and use

them again for the new card reader.
After installing the ACT version of card

reader CHD V2x, check that the
locking facility is activated.
The illustration shows the locking

facility when activated.
If the locking facility is not activated,

press the lever (1) as far as possible in
the direction shown by the arrow.
Then press the lever (2) as far as
arrow to activate the locking facility.
Continue with the installation by following the same steps in reverse order.

Capacitor Removal/Installation of Components
Capacitor
device").
Remove the cable ties (see arrows)
and remove the capacitor.
The position of the capacitor

i varies depending on the device
model and the date of
manufacture.

Remove the cable tie and the rubber
cover (2) to remove the connection
cable underneath.

in reverse order.
When removing the capacitor, do not touch the contacts, since the
capacitor may still have a residual current.
Avoid any short circuit at the contacts.
When installing the capacitor, be sure to take note of the polarity of the
connecting cables.
Make sure that the rubber cap on the positive pole is secured with a
cable tie.

Removal/Installation of Components Card reject box
Card reject box

device").
• Open the card reject box with the key.
Loosen screws (1) and (2), push the

card reject box forward (see arrow)
and lift it up and out.

in reverse order.

Card reject module Removal/Installation of Components
Card reject module

device").
Before exchanging the card reject module make sure that there are no
i ID cards left in the box.
Detach connectors (1) and (2). Loosen

screws (3), 4and (5).
Push the card reject module back (see
arrow) and lift it up and out.

in reverse order.
pushing it forwards until it stops.

Removal/Installation of Components Hybrid DIP reader
Hybrid DIP reader

Remove the hybrid DIP reader with its

holder.

the cover plate (5).

Hybrid DIP reader Removal/Installation of Components

the hybrid DIP reader.
Check if there is a chip card in the

SAM socket (1) of the defective
module.
If so, remove the chip card and insert it

in the new module.
Continue with the installation by

following the same steps in reverse
order.

Removal/Installation of Components Loudspeakers
Loudspeakers
The two loudspeakers in the customer panel are removed in the same
i way.

remove the loudspeaker incl. the
holder.
Remove screws (1) to (4) and take the

loudspeaker off the holder.

in reverse order.

Fan Removal/Installation of Components
Fan
Frontload
• Remove the PC (see section "System unit (PC)").

Remove the four screws (1) and set
the fan aside.
Loosen screws (2) and (3) of the
voltage distributor and lift it up and out.
Disconnect the plug connection of the
fan which is located behind the voltage
distributor.
The second fan is removed in the
same way as the first one.

in reverse order.
Rearload
device").
Disconnect the appropriate plug
connection (1) of the fan to be
removed.
Loosen the two screws (2) of the left

fan or the two screws (3) of the right
fan and remove the fan.

in reverse order.

Removal/Installation of Components Central USB special electronics

The connectors of the I²C ports may only be attached or detached
i when the device is disconnected from the power supply.
Open the strain relief by pushing it in

at position (1) at the top ...
... and position (2) at the bottom and

open it.

Central USB special electronics Removal/Installation of Components
Detach all connectors from the left

side of the special electronics (1).
Undo screws (1) and (2) and push the

special electronics module a little in
Move it towards the center of the
device and pull it away carefully.
(The special electronics is only
attached on the right.)
Undo screw (1) and push the clamping

bracket (2) a little in the direction
shown by the arrow.

Removal/Installation of Components Central USB special electronics
Unhook the cable clip on the right side

and detach all cables from the top of
the special electronics.
Press the strain relief together at

positions (1) and (2) and open it in the
Detach the front row of connectors.

Central USB special electronics Removal/Installation of Components
Push the strain relief at position (1) in

Detach the rear row of connectors.

in reverse order.
Installation note for frontload devices
After the central USB special

electronics is installed lay the cable
harness completely behind the bracket
(1) so that it does not reach into the
device and is protected against
damage.

Removal/Installation of Components Equipment carriage lock
Equipment carriage lock

device").
Remove the lock (3).
Remove the lock (3).

in reverse order.

Shutter Removal/Installation of Components
Shutter
• Open the front door or the cash-out panel and lift the customer panel (see
section "Opening / closing the device").
Only device with cash-out panel
Remove screw (1) of the ground strap.
Detach the optical indicator cable (2)
from the cable clips.
Grasp the cash-out panel (3) on both
sides, pull it up as far as possible and
remove it forwards.
Detach connector (1) from the optical

indicator, remove the cable and lay the
cash-out panel aside.

Removal/Installation of Components Shutter
Loosen screws (1) to (3).
Open the safe door (Frontload) or pull

out the CMD-V4 a little (Rearload) and
remove the shutter upwards in the
Set the shutter down on the safe.
Loosen screw (1) and push the ground

connection to the left in the direction
shown by the arrow.
Turn the shutter over.

Shutter Removal/Installation of Components

remove the shutter support with the
cover (3). It will be needed when it is
reinstalled.

in reverse order.
When installing the shutter be sure to push it down as far as possible.

i
After adjusting the shutter, complete a test dispense and output of a

i banknote.

Removal/Installation of Components Shutter (Semi-Outdoor)
Shutter (Semi-Outdoor)
• Open the cash-out panel and lift the customer panel (see section "Opening
/ closing the device").
To make the next steps easier, you can open the safe door.
i
Undo screws (1) to (3) and remove all

cables (4) from the cable clips. Lift the
shutter in the direction shown by the
arrow and remove it forwards. Make
sure that you take the shutter from
screws (1) and (2) first, and then from
screw (3).
Turn the shutter over.
Loosen screw (1) and remove the

ground connection. Remove the
connector (2) and take the cable (3)
out of the shutter through the opening
(4).
As you do so, make sure you do
i not damage any of the existing
seals.
in reverse order.
When installing the shutter be sure to push it down as far as possible.

i
After adjusting the shutter, complete a test dispense and output of a

i banknote.

Optical indicator of shutter Removal/Installation of Components
Optical indicator of shutter

Device with front door
• Open the front door (see section "Opening / closing the device").
optical indicators.

in reverse order.
Device with cash-out panel

• Open the cash-out panel and lift the customer panel (see section "Opening
/ closing the device").
Remove screw (1) of the ground strap.
Detach the optical indicator cable (2)

from the cable clips.
Grasp the cash-out panel (3) on both

sides, pull it up as far as possible and
remove it forwards.

Removal/Installation of Components Seal for cash-out panel (Semi-Outdoor)

optical indicators.

in reverse order.
When fastening the ground

i strap make sure that the
lockwasher (1) is between the
metal plate (2) and the cable
shoe of the ground strap (3).
Tighten screw (4).
Seal for cash-out panel (Semi-Outdoor)

• Open the cash-out panel (see section "Opening / closing the device").
the plate (5) upwards.
Now remove the seal (6).

in reverse order.

Cash slot camera Removal/Installation of Components
Cash slot camera

Removal and installation are described later.
i
Relay panel for external features USB

• Pull out the cash media dispenser (see section "Opening / closing the
device").
Detach all connectors (1) and loosen
screws (2) and (3). Push the relay
panel for external features USB in the
direction shown by the arrow and
remove it.


Removal/Installation of Components Heating controller (Semi-Outdoor)
Heating controller (Semi-Outdoor)

• Pull out the cash media dispenser (see section "Opening / closing the
device").
Detach all plugs (1) and remove screw
(2). Loosen screw (3), and remove the
heating control.

in reverse order.

Heating unit Removal/Installation of Components
Heating unit
• Open the safe door (please refer to the ProCash 1500xe USB operating
manual).
Disconnect the plug connection (1).
Lead the heater connector through the
opening (2) out of the safe.
Remove the connecting cable (1) from

the cable guides (2) and (3).
Disconnect the plug connection at (4)

and loosen the knurled screw (5).
Pull the heating unit up in the direction

shown by the arrow and remove it to
the side.

Removal/Installation of Components Axial fan for the heating unit
Place the heating unit on a flat

surface, remove the screw (1) and
then remove the heating from its
mounting in the direction shown by the
arrow (2).
Place the new heater in the old

mounting, then install it by following
the same steps in reverse order.
Axial fan for the heating unit

manual).
Disconnect the plug connection (1).
Lead the heater connecting cable
through the opening (2) out of the
safe.

Axial fan for the heating unit Removal/Installation of Components

the cable guides (2) and (3).
Disconnect the plug connection at (4)
and loosen the knurled screw (5).
Pull the heating unit up in the direction

shown by the arrow and remove it to
the side.
Place the heating unit on a flat

surface, remove screws (1) to (4) and
remove the cover plate (5) upwards.

Removal/Installation of Components Power supply unit for the axial fan
Remove the axial fan (1) upwards out

of its mounting.
When you install it, make sure

i that the axial fan rotates in the
right direction. The direction of
rotation is shown by arrows (2)
and (3).
Continue with the installation by

following the same steps in reverse
order.
Power supply unit for the axial fan

Disconnect at (1) and remove the
connecting cable from cable guides (2)
and (3).
Lead the connecting cable through the
opening (4) into the safe.
manual).

Power supply unit for the axial fan Removal/Installation of Components

the cable harness (2) and remove the
cable ties (3). Disconnect at (4) on the
power supply unit and remove the
power supply unit from the device.

in reverse order.

Maintenance and Service
The information required for carrying out troubleshooting and maintenance on
the individual components can be found in the sections on the various
components in this manual.
When carrying out work on components and modules that carry an
electrical charge, this equipment must first be disconnected from the
power supply. Due to construction, it is not enough to switch off the
device using the power switch on the power distributor. In addition, the
safety plug must be disconnected from the power distributor.
If the device is equipped with a UPS, you should note that the UPS
continues to supply power even after it has been disconnected from
the power supply network.
Additional equipment such as heaters or UPS (uninterruptible power

supply) are connected to the power supply by means of separate
power cables.
In the case of devices with UPS, see also the chapter "Smart UPS
750".
i If the device's heater is out of operation, it is necessary to comply with

the ambient conditions for storage (see chapter "Appendix", section
"Environmental conditions"). Levels must not fall below or exceed
these conditions because irreparable damage may be caused to the
device otherwise. In the event of non-compliance, Wincor Nixdorf
International GmbH shall not assume liability for any damage that is
caused to the device.

Test options Maintenance and Service
Test options
− All components of the system unit (PC) can be tested using the SDIAG test
program.
− As a rule, the integrated components can be checked with KDIAG or, in
individual cases, with PDIAG.
− It is also possible to carry out a check of the components with DSP
(Diagnostics and Service Package). This requires, that DSP has been
installed on the hard disk of the system unit (PC) either during the system
installation or later by a service technician.
The current versions of the test programs are available in the intranet /
extranet.
Intranet: http://intranet.wincor-nixdorf.com
Extranet: http://extranet.wincor-nixdorf.com
Maintenance
Journal printer NP06/TP06, receipt printer

NP07/TP07
The printers are maintenance free.
• Remove any paper scraps, paper dust and foreign material in the printing
area. You can use tweezers, a brush or a vacuum cleaner to do this.
The operator should clean the printer at least with every change of paper. A
thermal print array has to be replaced after about
50 km of paper (subject to a charge).

Maintenance and Service Maintenance
Hybrid DIP reader
• Remove residues of dirt from the card insertion slot using a brush.
In the event of problems, the operator has to clean the magnetic heads using
the universal cleaning card for ID card readers.
EPP keypad
• Check that the battery for the EPP works. Replace it if necessary (after
about five years; subject to a charge).
i The battery may only be replaced in a switched-on state to prevent the

keys from being lost.
For cleaning the operator should use the professional cleaning set for IT
equipment.
Soft and function keys, alpha keyboard and

operator panel USB
The keyboards are maintenance free.
• For cleaning the operator should use the professional cleaning set for IT
equipment.

Maintenance Maintenance and Service
MM / CIM
• Remove the sensor head. Clean it with a brush or cloth, or with a specific
cleaning brush.
• Use test cards to check the functioning of the read head.

The operator has to clean this with the cleaning brush. This is subject to a
charge if the operation is requested by the technician.
Preventive maintenance should be carried out twice a year.
CMD-V4
Preventive maintenance on the CMD-V4 should be carried out every two years
or after 200,000 transactions at the latest.
i Use no liquids in cleaning any photosensors.
For detailed information on maintenance refer to the CMD-V4 Service Manual.
System unit (PC)

The system unit is maintenance-free.
• Check whether the fan works and moves easily.
• Clean the fan using a brush or vacuum cleaner.

Housing
• Clean the housing with a vacuum cleaner or cloth.
• Repair damage to paint if necessary and possible.
Portrait camera / cash slot camera

The cameras are maintenance free.
i If there is a fan for the cash slot camera, follow the instructions in the
section "Fan".
Heater (Semi-Outdoor)
• Check the function using an internal test.
Media entry indicators
• Check whether they function.
Fan
• Check the functioning and easy movement of the fans, and clean them.
Monitors, LCD boxes

The operator has to clean the panes and monitor / LCD screens as required
using the professional cleaning set for IT equipment.

General
• Check whether the components have been installed correctly.
• Check whether all cables have been laid safely and fastened correctly.
• Inspect the gas spring of the customer panel incl. its fixtures and replace
them if they shows signs of increased wear and tear. If no signs of wear
and tear are visible, lubricate the hang-up bolt. Do this also when
replacing the mounting bracket. .
• Check the gas springs of the doors and replace them if necessary.
• Check the ground connections and replace them if necessary.
• Check the parts protecting the cables and replace them if necessary.
• Check whether the UPS functions (self-test).
• Check the functioning of locks and make contacts and adjust them.
• Check whether the telescopic runners work.

Approved maintenance materials

You can order the items listed below electronically or from our service partner.
Orders: http://extranet.wincor-nixdorf.com
http://www.wincor-nixdorf.com/mediaservice
E-mail address for
logistics questions: mailto:serviceslogistic@wincor-nixdorf.com
E-mail for technical
questions: mailto:servicesupport@wincor-nixdorf.com
Commercial name / product name Part number

LIXTON platen cleaner W1 01750080438
WN Hybrid test card 01750066226
Air duster spray with extension tube 01770007430
Cleaning brush for MM/CIM sensor 01750012317
Cleaning card universal for hybrid reader 01750016388
Screen cleaner ECS-260 01750035530
Constant GLY 2100 01750056270
ITS:06377122 / universal cloth 01770005406
Cleaning fluid 03224600952
ITS:06476953 /Q-TIP 01770005429
ITS:06517714 / flat brush 1" 01770005440
Cleaning card CHD Austria 01750057227
Multi-purpose grease BP LS 2 01750049230
You will find a list of all the cleaning and maintenance materials approved by
Wincor Nixdorf in the intranet or extranet.
i Please note the manufacturer's specifications on the packaging and on

the enclosed information sheet.
The product may be damaged or soiled if materials are used that are
not approved or if they are used improperly.
Please dispose of the packaging and empty containers according to
the applicable regulations of your country.


Index
Card reject module 5-43
A Cash media dispenser 2-29, 8-1
Anti-Skimming Module 2-23 Cash slot camera 9-19
Anti-skimming module (ASKIM) 5- CCTV monitoring 2-16
1 Central power supply unit III
ASKIM 2-23 01750069162 3-1
Audio changeover switch Central special electronics
01750042748 9-1 assignment 2-23
Audio changeover switch Central USB special electronics 2-
01750059867 9-5 11
Audio loudspeaker / headphone 2- Central USB special electronics
15 module 3-15
CHD V2x Card Reader 5-23
B CMD V4 shutter 01750053690 / -
Barcode Reader BR 02 7-147 56960 8-5
Block diagrams Customer panel special electronics
Barcode reader BR 02 2-5 3-35
Barcode scanner 2-4 Customer panel special electronics
Cash media dispenser 2-4 USB 2-12
Cash slot camera 2-5
Headphone 2-6 D
Heater (only semi-outdoor) 2-6
Journal printer 2-3 Disposal 1-17
Loudspeaker 2-6 Door switch 2-14
Portrait camera 2-5
Receipt printer 2-3 E
C EICON C91 4-25
Embedded compact PC P4 / C4
Card Reader CHD V2x 5-23 4-1
Card readers EPP V5 5-65
Overview 2-27
01750112081 A ProCash 1500xe USB - Service Manual II-I

Index
External control unit 01750073862 N

3-45
NP06 7-75
External control unit USB 2-14
NP07 7-1
H
O
Headphone 2-15
Operating the flat displays 2-25
Hybrid DIP reader 5-51
Operator panel USB 10-13
I Optical indicators
Overview 2-28
Ink staining system 8-3
Intrusion protection facility 2-23 P
K PC
Embedded 4-1
Keyboard 2-29 Overview of PC cards 2-21
Overview of PCs 2-17
L System settings 2-18
PC assignment 2-22
Loudspeaker 2-15
Plug-in media entry indicators 10-
M 25
Portrait camera (color) 9-15
Media entry indicators Portrait camera (Maku) 9-11
Assignment 2-13
Power distributor 01750073167 3-
MM / CIM 86 5-75 13
Monitor Power supply
12.1'' LCD Box DVI 6-1 DC voltage 2-10
12.1'' LCD Box DVI 6-11 Line voltage 2-7
15'' LCD Box DVI 6-35
15'' LCD Box DVI 01750060091 Printer
6-47 TP06/NP06 7-75
15'' LCD monitor 6-19 TP07/NP07 7-1
Touchscreen for LCD 6-57 Printers
Monitors Overview 2-27
Overview 2-24 Printing Cassette 7-121
II-II ProCash 1500xe USB - Service Manual 01750112081 A

Index
R Gas spring 11-61

Gas spring bracket 11-63
Recycling 1-17 Heating controller Semi-Outdoor
Relay panel for external features 11-95
Overview 2-26 Heating unit 11-96
Relay panel for external features Hybrid DIP reader 11-79
USB 01750083012 10-1 Journal printer 11-73
Keypad EPP V5 11-28
Remote status indicator 2-26, 10-
Logo cover 11-47
9
Logo illumination 11-42
Removal/Installation of Loudspeakers 11-81
Components Opening / closing the device
12.1'' LCD Highbright monitor 11-18
(Semi-Outdoor) 11-35 Operator panel 11-23
15'' LCD monitor 11-40 Optical indicator
15'' Touchscreen 11-41 CHD V2x 11-30
ASKIM module 11-52
Audio changeover switch 11-33 Receipt printer 11-30
Axial fan for the heating unit 11- Shutter 11-92
97
Optical indicator of shutter 11-
Barcode reader BR 02 11-29
92
Card handling device CHD V2x
Portrait camera 11-31
11-74
Power distributor 11-67
Card reject box 11-77
Power supply unit for the axial
Card reject module 11-78
fan 11-99
Cash slot camera 11-94
Receipt printer TP07/NP07 11-
Cash-out panel Semi-Outdoor
69
11-93
Relay panel for external features
Central power supply unit 11-65
USB 11-94
Seal for cash-out panel 11-93
11-83
Shutter 11-88
CHD-V2x 11-74
Shutter Semi-Outdoor 11-91
Control panel special electronics
Smart UPS 750 (USB-S) 11-64
11-32
Softkeys 11-37
Device views 11-2
System loudspeaker 11-51
EPP keypad Semi-Outdoor 11-
System unit (PC) 11-50
27
Touch controller 11-39
Equipment carriage lock 11-87
External control unit 11-26 Removal/Installation of
Fan 11-82 Components FL
01750112081 A ProCash 1500xe USB - Service Manual II-III

Index
Capacitor 11-76 TH60 7-121

Central power supply unit 11-66 Thermostat 0284502000 10-27
Removal/Installation of Token Ring PCI card 4-45
Components RL
Touchscreen
12.1'' LCD box DVI 11-36
Overview 2-24
Protective screen 11-38
Touchscreen for LCD Monitor 6-
S 57
TP06 7-75
Smart UPS 750 10-31
TP07 7-1
Softkeys 5-61
SOP button 2-15 U
T Uninterruptible power supply
(UPS) 2-30
Temperature control 2-31
II-IV ProCash 1500xe USB - Service Manual 01750112081 A

Notes
01750112081 A ProCash 1500xe USB - Service Manual

Published by
33094 Paderborn
Germany
Order No.: 01750112081 A 1 GB

SM 1500xeusb e 112081a1

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

SM 1500xeusb e 112081a1

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Self-Service

Do you have ...

... any questions or suggestions

Please contact the following address

Fax: +49 (0) 52 51 693-62 09

ProCash 1500xe USB - Service Manual 01750112081 A

Edition September 2006

© Wincor Nixdorf International GmbH 2006

All rights, including rights of translation and

All rights, including rights created by patent

All names of hardware and software

This manual was

ProCash 1500xe USB - Service Manual 01750112081 A

2 Function and Integration...............….....

4 PCs and PC Cards..................................

7 Printers and Scanners............................

01750112081 A ProCash 1500xe USB - Service Manual 0-1

Abbreviations ............................................................................................... XXI

Function and Integration..............................................................................2-1

01750112081 A ProCash 1500xe USB - Service Manual I-I

Receipt printer ...........................................................................................2-3

I-II ProCash 1500xe USB - Service Manual 01750112081 A

Cash media dispenser ..................................................................................2-29

Central Power Supply Unit III 01750069162................................................3-1

Power Distributor 01750073167.................................................................3-13

Central USB Special Electronics Module .................................................3-15

Customer panel special electronics..........................................................3-35

01750112081 A ProCash 1500xe USB - Service Manual I-III

External Control Unit..................................................................................3-45

Embedded compact PC P4 / C4...................................................................4-1

I-IV ProCash 1500xe USB - Service Manual 01750112081 A

Required hardware resources.......................................................................4-27

Token Ring PCI Card ..................................................................................4-45

01750112081 A ProCash 1500xe USB - Service Manual I-V

LEDs on the board........................................................................................5-11

Card Reader CHD V2x ................................................................................5-23

Card Reject Module ....................................................................................5-43

I-VI ProCash 1500xe USB - Service Manual 01750112081 A

Hybrid DIP Reader ......................................................................................5-51

12.1" DVI High Bright Box ............................................................................6-1

01750112081 A ProCash 1500xe USB - Service Manual I-VII

12.1" LCD Box DVI ......................................................................................6-11

15" LCD Monitor .........................................................................................6-19

I-VIII ProCash 1500xe USB - Service Manual 01750112081 A

Power supply unit ....................................................................................6-32

15" LCD Box DVI .........................................................................................6-35

15" LCD Box DVI 01750060091 ..................................................................6-47

Touchscreen for LCD Monitor (USB) ........................................................6-57

01750112081 A ProCash 1500xe USB - Service Manual I-IX

Receipt Printer TP07/NP07...........................................................................7-1

I-X ProCash 1500xe USB - Service Manual 01750112081 A

Mark detection .........................................................................................7-32

01750112081 A ProCash 1500xe USB - Service Manual I-XI

Thermal printer TP07 .........................................................................7-63

Journal Printer TP06/NP06.........................................................................7-75

I-XII ProCash 1500xe USB - Service Manual 01750112081 A

01750112081 A ProCash 1500xe USB - Service Manual I-XIII

Print head ..............................................................................................7-111

Printing Cassette (TH60) ..........................................................................7-121

I-XIV ProCash 1500xe USB - Service Manual 01750112081 A

Thermal paper specifications ......................................................................7-144

Barcode Reader BR 02 .............................................................................7-147

Cash Media Dispenser (CMD-V4) ................................................................8-1